ARCHIVES SERIAL • Short Loans COlieClIOI'I NOT FOR LOAN The University of Newcastle
FACULTY OF ARTS HANDBOOK~
y)<'." ( ,,' ," 'i .',. I,' ~'" ' 1.. ••. '- ..... " .' THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCAS1LE New South Wales The University of Newcastle Calendar consists of the foUowing volumes: Volume 1 Legislation Location Address: Rankin Drive, Shortland Volume 2 University Bodies and Staff Volume 3 Faculty of Architecture Handbook Postal Address: The University of Newcastle NSW 2308 Volume 4 Faculty of Arts Handbook VolumeS Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook Telephone: (049) 215000 Volume 6 Faculty of Education Handbook Volume 7 Faculty of Engineering Handbook Telex: AA28194 - Library Volume 8 Faculty of Medicine Handbook AA28618 - Bursar Volume 9 Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook AA28784 - lUNRA (The University of Newcastle Research Associates Limited) Volume lO Adminislration & Technology, Education, Health and Visual & Performing Arts Handbook Volume 11 Faculty and Conservatorium of Music Handbook Facsimile: (049) 601661
Also available are the Undergraduate Guides Hours of Business: Mondays to Fridays excepting public holidays 9 am to 5 pm
This Volume is intended as a reference handbook for students enroUing in courses conducted by the Faculty of Arts. The colour band, Pearl BCC lSI, on the coveris the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors of Arts of this University. The information in this Handbook is correct as at 29 October 1990.
ISBN 0159 - 3420
Recommended Price: Five doUars plus postage.
Designed by: Marie-T Wisniowski Typeset by: The Secretariat Division, The University of Newcastle Printed by: Newcastle Camera Print, 17 Amott Slreet, Newcastle West CONTENTS CONTENTS
FACULTY OF ARTS SECfIONSIX GENERAL INFORMATION located in centre section PRINCIPAL DATES 1991 (including Medicine) Advice and Information ii SECfIONONE FACULTY STAFF 1 Faculty/School Secretaries ii Accommodation Officer ii SECfION TWO FACULTY INFORMATION 8 Careers and Student Employment Officer ii Prerequisites for Diploma in Education Units 8 Counselling Service ii Standing in tbe Course Leading to the Degree of Bachelor of Arts 8 Health Service ii Review of Academic Progress 9 Student Loans II Students with Special Needs iii SECfIONTHREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS 10 Enrolment and Re-enrolment iii Student Conduct and Responsibilities iv Bachelor of Arts - Regulations 10 EXAMINATIONS v Combined Degree Courses 11 Examination Periods v Bachelor of Arts (psychology) - Regulations 12 Bachelor of Social Work - Regulations 13 Sitting for Examinations v Schedule of Subjects 15 Rules for Formal Examinations v Examination Results v Special Consideration v SECTION FOUR SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS 35 TRANSCRIPTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD vi Guide to SUbject Entries 35 UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS - REGULATIONS VI Classics 35 CHARGES vii Classical Civilisation 35 Method of Payment vii Classical Literature in Translation 41 Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) vii Classics Special Studies 43 Scholarship Holders and Sponsored Students viii Greek 45 Loans viii Latin 47 Refund of Cbarges viii Sanskrit 48 CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING viii Drama 52 STUDENT SERVICES viii Economics 60 Banking viii Education 77 Cashier ix English 80 Chaplaincy Service ix Geography 89 Community Programmes ix History 94 Convocation ix Linguistics 103 Co-Op Bookshop ix Mathematics 106 Lost Property ix Modern Languages 118 Noticeboards ix French 118 Post Office ix German 123 Public Transport ix Japanese 131 Student Insurance Cover ix Philosophy 133 University Computing Services x Psychology 137 University Libraries xi Sociology 142 Bachelor of Social Work Course Program 148 Interdisciplinary Subjects 152
SECTION FIVE POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS 153 Honours Degree of Bachelor of Arts 153 Master Degrees 154 Master of Arts 155 Master of Letters 156 Master of Environmental Studies 156 Master of Applied Ethics 156 Master of Theatre Arts 157 Diploma in Arts 145 SECTION ONE FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF
PRINCIPAL OFFICERS
Vice-Chancellor and Principal Professor K.J. Morgan, BSc, MA, DPhil(Oxf) Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Academic) Professor M.P. Carter, BA(Nott), PhD(Edin) Deputy Vice-Chancellor (Administration) L.F. Hennessy, BA(Syd) Deputy Vice-Chancellor (planning) D.R. Huxley, BA, LittB(NE), MA, PhD Pro Vice-Chancellor and Dean of Students Professor K.R. Dutton, MA(Syd), DU(Paris), Officier des Palmes academiques, FACE Pro Vice-Chancellor (Development) L.R. Eastcott, MEd(Syd), PhD(AJberta), BA, DipEd Deputy President of Academic Senate Professor R.J. MacDonald, BSc, PhD(NSW), FAIP Dean for Research Professor G.M. Kellerman, AO, MB, BS, MSc(Syd), FAACB, FRACP, FRCPA
FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF The Faculty of Arts comprises the Departments of Classics, Drama, English, Geography, Hisrory, Linguistics, Modem Languages (French, Gennan, Japanese), Philosophy, Social Work and Sociology. Major sequences and Honours subjects are also offered in the Faculty by the Departments of Economics, Education, Mathematics and Psychology. Dean V.E. Emeljanow, BA, MA(NZ), PhD(Stan) Sub-Dean O.N. McIntyre, BA(Tas), MA(ANU), PhD Faculty Secretary DJ. Donnelly, BCom
DEPARTMENT OF CLASSICS Professor R.O. Tanner, MA(Melb & Camb) (Latin) (Head of Department)
SenIor Lecturers R. Beare, MA(Camb), PhD(Exe) I;' . B.F. Curran, BA, PhD i .. ~ D.W. Palmer, MA(Melb), BD(Drew), TbM(Harv) " Lecturer T J. Ryan, MA, DipEd
Tutor EJ. Baynham, BA, PhD(Victoria), DipEd
Departmental Omce StaffD.F. Statham SECTION ONE FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF SECTIONONE Departmental Office StatT D.E. Kite (Departmental Secretary) DEPARTMENT OF DRAMA I. Hargrave professor V.E. Emeljanow, BA, MA(NZ), PhD(Stan) (Head of Department) L.King R. Talbot Lecturers E.G. Williams M. Gauntlet!, BA(WA), PhD(LaTrobe) J. R. Goodall, BA(Lond), CertEd(Oxf), PhD(Macq) BJ. o'Connor, BA(Syd), LittB(NE), MA(Tor), DipEd(Syd), MACE DEPARTMENT OF EDUCATION D.M. Watt, BA(Monash), PhD(NSW) professor R.S. Laura, BA(Lewis & Clark), MDiv(Harv), MA(Camb), DPhil(Oxt)
Tutors Associate Professors K. Newey, BA(Syd) M.N. Maddock, BSc(Tas), BEd(Q'ld), MS, PhD(F1or), DipEd(Tas), FACE J. O'Sullivan, BA(Syd), BA(Hons), DipEd J.A. Ramsland, BA(NE), MEd(Syd), MA, PhD, MACE, FColiP (DIrector, School of Humanities) Senior Lecturers Theatre Manager J. Jablonski S.F. Bourke, BSc(NSW), BA, MLilt(NE), MEd(Monash), PhD(LaT), MACE LK.S. Chan, BEd, PhD(WAust) Departmental Office StaffD. Freeman P.N. Chopra, BSe(Benares), BA, DipEd(Adel), MAPsS, MACE PJ. Moore, BA, BEdStud, MEd, PhD, MAPsA (Head of Department) W.G. Warren, MA, MPsych(Clin), PhD, MAPsS, AASA DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS Lecturers Professors WK. Au, MA (Massey), MACE B.L.J. Gordon, MEc(Syd), PhD, DSC(Syd) (personal Chair) T.E. Cook, BA(Macq), MEd(NE), PhD(Macq), MACE, MAPsS, MACEA D.B. Hughes, BSc.Eeon.{Lond), AM, PhD (Prin) (Head of Department) D.T. Gamage, BA(Vidyo), MA(Sri Lanka), MEdAdmin(NE), DipIntAffairs(BCIS), PhD(LaT), AFAIM MACEA, FICAS A.P. Holbrook, BEc, DipEd, PhD (LaT) Associate Professors R.W. Howard, MA(Auck), PhD(Q'ld) R.W. McShane, BA(NE), MA(Alta) R. Mackie, MA, DipEd(Syd) A.C. Oakley, BEc(PhDXAdelaide) J.W. McQuaiter, BSe(Syd), BA, DipEd(NE) C.W. Stahl, BA(CaIif State College), PhD(CaIit) Honorary Professor L.N. Short, MSc(Syd), DPhiJ(Oxt), DipEd(Syd), FACE, FRSA
Senior Lecturers Honorary Associate A.R. Barean, MA, MEd(Syd), PhD(ANU), DipEd(Syd), FACE c.J. Aislabie, MEc(Syd), PhD(Lond) Supervisor Curriculum Resources and Research Centre P. Mahony, BA(Macq), DipEd, ALAA H.W. Dick, BEc(Monash), MEc, PhD(ANU) J A. Doeleman, DrsEcon(Nederlandse Econornisehe Hogeschool, Rotterdam) Senior Technical Officer B. Jordan, BA, ASTC W.C. Dunlop, BA(Auck), MCom, PhD Technical Officer K.J. Scotl J.R. Fisher, BA, PhD(Hull) Laboratory Assistant B.W. Mills, HNC(Elec), CertEd(Leeds) M.T. Gordon, BA(Syd), MCom, PhD R.H. Green, BA, LLB(Adelaide), PhD(Cantab) Departmental Office Staff S.N. Jacobi, AB(Prin), MA(South Carolina) G. Gardner G.R. Keating, MEc(NE) S.Kahagalle D.K. Macdonald, BA, MCom, PhD(NSW) M.F.Stroud W.F. Mitchell, BCom(Deakin), MEc(Monash) P J.C. Stanton, MA(Syd), PhD, DipEd(Syd) DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH Lecturers Professor D.L. Frost, MA PhD(Camb) P.R. Anderson, BA, MCom, DipEd(NSW) KJ. Burgess, BEc(Syd), MEc(Syd), MA(Exeter), DipTertStud(UNE) Associate Professor N.C. Talbot, BA(Durh), PhD(Leeds) J.C. de CastroLopo, MA(Wis) A. Hossain, BSc(Jahangimagar), MScEcon{Jahangimagar), MAEcon(Melb), PhD(LaT) Senior Lecturers K.M. Renfrew, BCorn, BMath, BA· D.V. Boyd, BA(York, Can), MA, PhD(Buffalo) S.R. Shenoy, BA(Gujar), BScEcon, MA(Lond)* D.H. Craig, BA(Syd), DPhiJ(Oxt) S.S. Waterman, AB{Brown), MA(Hist), MA{EconXCalif) CJ. Hanna, BA, PhD P.L. Kavanagh, MA; DipEd(Syd), PhD Tutors C.W.F. McKenna, BA, PhD(Leeds) (Head of Department) MJ. Alexander, BEc(Adelaide) C.P. PollnilZ, BA(Adel), PhD(Leie) WJ).Bradford,BEc CJ. CooIes, BCom· Lecturers P. Kniest, BEe R.P. Jolly, BA(Syd), DPhiJ(Oxf) A.G. Webber, BEe I.M. Mitchell, BA{Lond), MA,DPhiJ(Sus) D.M. Osland, PhD(Adel), BA, DipEd Honorary Associates I. Salusinszky, BA(Melb), DPhiJ(Oxt) WJ.Sheehan,BEc(Syd),MA B.A. Twohill, BA Departmental Office Staff P.M. Hill
• Fractional appoilllme1lu 3 2 FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF SECTION ONE FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF SECTIONONE
DEPARTMENT OF GEOGRAPHY DEPARTMENT OF MATHEMATICS professor E.A. Colhoun, BA(Belf), MS(Wis), PhD(BeIf), MA(Dub) (Head of Department) professor I. Raeburn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Utah)
Associate Professors Associate Professors J.C.R. Carom, MSc(Hull), PhD W. Brisley, BSc(Syd), MSc (NSW), PhD, DipEd(NE) RJ. Loughran, BSc(Dunebn), MSc, PhD(NE) C.A. Croxton, BSc(Leicester), MA, PhD(Camb), FAIP, FInstP(Lond) J.R. Giles, BA(Syd), PhD, DipEd(Syd), ThL Senior Lecturers P.K. Smrz, PromPhys, CSc, RNDr(Charles(Prague» H.A. Bridgman, BA(Beloit), MA(Hawaii), PhD{Wis) W,J.A. Jonas, BA(NSW), MA, PhD(pNG), DipEd(NSW) Senior Lecturers G.N. McIntyre, BA(Tas), MA(ANU), PhD B. Sims BSc, PhD J.C. Turner, BScAgr(Syd), MS, PhD(Wis) W. T.P. Lau, ME(NSW), PhD(Syd) D.L.S. McElwain, BSc(Qld), PhD(York(Cant», MACS Lecturer K.W. Lee, BA(Liv), MA(NE) W.P. Wood, BSc, PhD(NSW), FRAS (Head of Department)
Tutor S.J. Curtis, BSc, DipEd Lecturers I.M. Benn, BSc(Edin), PhD(Lancaster) Postdoctoral Fellow M.K. Macphail, BSc(Syd), PhD(Tas) R.P. Berghout, MSc(Syd) J.G. Couper, BSc, PhD(NE) Honorary Associates A.R. Gover, MSc(NZ), DPhil(Oxon) BL.Campbell, MSc Honoris causa W. Summerfield, BSc(Adel), PhD(Flin) W.F. Geyl, BSc(Lond), DrsPhysGeog(Utrecht) E. V1achynsky, BSc(Syd), PhD(Syd)
Cartographer CJ .Harden Tutors S. Boswell, BMath Technical Officer N. G. Gardner N.E. Hannah, BMath W.B. Moors, MSc(Auck) Computer Programmer R,J .Dear S. Sciffer, BMath Map Llhrarlan Vacancy Professor Emeritus R.G. Keats, BSc, PhD(Adel), DMath(Waterloo), PIMA, FASA, MACS Departmental Office StatT M.B.Lane Departmental Office Staff J. Garnsey, BA(Syd) DEPARTMENTOF~ORY L. Steel professor AD. Ward, MA(Well), PhD(ANU) (Head of Department)
Associate Professors DEPARTMENT OF MODERN LANGUAGES E.M. Andrews, MA(Oxf), PhD(ANU), DipEd(Oxf) FRENCH L.E. Fredman, MA, LLB(Melb), AM(Stan), PhD(Tulane) Professor (personal Chair) K.R. Dutton, MA(Syd), DU(paris), FACE, OjJicier des Palmes acadbniques D.I. Wright, BA(Adel), PhD(ANU) N. Rutherford, BA(NSW), PhD(ANU) (50% duties) Senior Lecturer B.R. Dawson, MA(Syd), docteur de troisieme cycle (paris-IV)
Senior Lecturers Lecturers P J. A. Hempenstall, BA(Q'ld), DPhil(Oxf) M.P. Connon, BA(Oxford), DipEd(NE), DIMAV(poitiers) J.W. Turner, MA, DipEd(Syd), PhD C.A. Whilehead, BA(NE), MA(Syd)
Lecturers GERMAN HD.M. Chan, MA(Cant), M A(Lond) Professor vacancy M.V. Sampson, BA(ANU), MA(Sus) D.P. Lemmings, BA, MA(Sus), DPhil(Oxf), PGCE(Lond) ASIOClate Professors A. Ba1hofer, MPhiI, DrPhil(Vienna) Departmental Office Staff F.Walla, MPhil, DrPhil(Vienna) (Head of Department) P.James Senior Lecturer J.D. Stowell, BA(Melb) R.Gay Lecturer HR. Purves, MA(Otago), PhD(Lond) DEPARTMENT OF LINGUISTICS Professor vacancy
Senior Lecturers . k' . U· 't) G.M. Horn, BA(Joims H), MA(The American DC) PhD( Mass) Dr Hab(Adam Mic leWlCZ mverSl y G.V. MacNeill, MA(Otago) P .G. Peterson, MA( Well), PhD (Head of Department)
Departmental Office Staff P.A. King 5 4 SECTION ONE FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF SECTION ONE FACULTY OF ARTS STAFF
JAPANESE Honorary Associates ProCessor vacancy M. Arthur, BA, DipPsych(Syd), MHP(NSW), MAPsS D.B. Dunlop, MB, BS(Syd), DO, FRSM, MACO Associate Professor K. Ono, BEd(Aichi Kyoiku), MEd, MA(Syd), PhD B. Fenelon, BA(Qld), MA, PhD, MAPsS, AAAN, MSPR J. Miles, BA, PhD Lecturers F.V. Smith, MA(Syd), PhD(Lond), FBPsS M. Fukuhara, BA(Tokyo UE), MA(Tokyo UPS) J.W. Staines, BA, BEc(Syd), BEd(Melb), PhD(Lond), MBPsS, FAPsS Y. Ito, BSc(Tohoku), BA, MA(Hiroshima), PhD(Melbourne) T. Takatsu, BA(Waseda), MA(ANU) ProCessional Omcer D.F. Bull, BSc S. Van Aacken, BA(Keio), MA(Hawaii) Senior Tecbnlcal Omcers Tutors R.Glegbom H.M. Norrie, BA, DipEd AO. Harcombe C.L. Pinfold, BA, DipEd L.Cooke
Departmental Omce StalT Tecbnlcal Omcers P.Cowen D. Golvers, BA P. Falanga, BA E.M.Huber G. Haselmann J.Lee-Chin P.W.Smith
DEPARTMENT OF PHILOSOPHY Computer Programmer J. Symon, BSc ProCessor CA. Hooker, BA, BSc, PhD(Syd), PhD(York, Can) Laboratory Craftsperson M. Newton Senior Lecturers D.W. Dockrill, BA(Syd), PhD(ANU) Departmental Omce StalT J.M. Lee, BA, LLB(Q'ld), MA(Oxf), PhD(ANU) (Head ofDepartment) W,N.Mead A.C.W. Sparkes, BA(Q'ld), BA(Lond), MA(NSW), PhD S. Bowcock S. Harris Lecturer J.N. Wright, BSc, PhD(Melb)
Emeritus ProCessor AM. Ritchie, MA(Syd), PhD(Lond) ~ DEPARTMENT OF SOCIAL WORK
Departmental Omce Staff D. Nesmith, BA Professor B.A English, BSW, PhD(NSW) (Head of Department) Senior Lecturer vacancy
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY Lecturer vacancy ProCessor M.G. King, BA, PhD(Qld), FAPsS, MAPsS Departmental Omce StalT D. Koplick Associate ProCessors D.C. Finlay, MSc, PhD(Melb), MAPsS, (Head of Department) D.M. Keats, BA(Syd), MEd, PhD(Qld), DipEd(Syd), FAPsS, MSAANZ DEPARTMENT OF SOCIOLOGY Professors Senior Lecturers M.P. Carter, BA(Nott), PhD(Edin) (personal Chair) M.M. Cotton, MA, PhD(NE), MPsych(Clin), MAPsS L. Bryson, BA, DipEd(Melb), PhD(Monash) RA. Heath, BSc, PhD(McM) M. Hunter, BSc, PhD(Lond), CertEd, MBPsS, MAPsS ASSOCiate Professor A. Brand, BA(Amst), MA(WAust), PhD(Leiden) N.F. Kafer, BA, PhD(ANU), MAPsS D. Munro, MA(Manc), PhD(Lond), Cert Soc St(Glas), Dip Data(SA), MAPsS Senior Lecturers H.P. Pfister, BA(Macq), PhD, MAPsS J.E. Bern, BA(Syd), PhD(Macq) (Head of Department) J.L. Seggie, BA, PhD L. Connor, BA, PhD(Syd) J.D.C. Shea, MA(Cant), PhD(Qld) MASH, MASSERT, MACPCP G.B. Samuel, MA(Oxf), PhD(Camb), DipCompSc
Lecturers Lecturers R. Brown, BA, PhD R. Donovan, BA(Durh), PhD(Warw) J. Kenardy, BSc, PhD(Qld» E. Jordan, BA(Q'ld), DipEd(NCAE), PhD C.E. Lee, BA, PhD(Adel), MAPsS S. Tomsen, BA, PhD(Macq) S.A. Mcfadden, BSc, PhD(ANU) K.A.L. Shannon, BA, PhD ~ Departmental Omce StalT ;~ L. McNamara Tutor R A Cody, BA " A Holley ~l Emeritus Professor JA. Keats, BSc(Adel), BA(Melb), AM, PhD(Prin), FASSA, FBPsS, FAPsS
6 l 7 SECfIONlWO FACULTY INFORMATION SECTIONTWO
(3) A candidate seeking standing must provide the Faculty Professional Recognition of Board with details of the courses completed for which Bachelor of Social Work Degree standing is sought; these details should include the name of A personis eligible for membership of the Australian Association the institution, the name and content of the courses, the of Social Workers Ud (AASW) if he or she completes a program marks, grades or credit points awarded, the structure of the of professional social work education which both meets the qualification previously studied (degree, diploma, requirements set down by the AASW and has been formally certificate, etc.), wherever possible a staff list of the approved by the AASW. institution (including qualifications) and such other information as the Faculty Board may require. The Bachelor of Social Work of the University of Newcastle has been given provisional approval by the AASW. The degree will (4) Standing will be granted by the Faculty Board on the be f~lly assessed for approval in time for the first group of reco~endation of the Head of the relevant department(s), candidates to present themselves for graduation. oreqrnvalent(s),inconsultationwiththeDeanorSub-Dean and the Faculty Secretary. The 1991 Credit Point System (5) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 1, a candidate who is an undergraduate enrolled in another course of the Following the amalgamation of the University of Newcastle and University who transfers that enrolment to the course the Hunter Institute of Higher Education, a new credit point leading to the degree may be granted such standing as the system has been adopted across the new University for the 1991 Faculty Board deems appropriate. academic year. (6) All applications for standing will be made to the Faculty A student who enrols in a standard full time study load will now Secretary, Faculty of Arts. enrol in 80 credit points for the year. Consequently a student enrolling in a three year degree will now be required to complete Any enquiries should be directed in the first instance to the Faculty a total of 240 credit points in order to qualify for the award of a Secretary (ext 296). degree. FACULTY INFORMATION Transition Provisions This compares with 1990 when 48 credit points was a full time In order to ensure that, in the transition to the new system, study load and 144 credit points was required for the completion The following qualifications are offered in the Faculty of Arts: Modern Languages candidates who passed subjects under the regulations in force of a three year degree. Mathematics prior to 1990 are not disadvantaged, the subjects passed prior to Bachelor of Arts (BA) To ascertain at what stage of completion students are at in 1991 Science 1990 will be converted as follows: credit points terms, it is necessary to convert the value of all Bachelor of Arts (psychology) (BAPsych) Drama (as a second method only) 20 credit points for each Part I subject Bachelor of Arts (Honours) (BARons) subjects completed prior to 1991 to 1991 credit points as shown Candidates are strongly urged to opt for two units. 30 credit points for each Part II subject below. . Bachelor of Social Work: (BSW) 40 credit points for each Part III subject Master of Applied Ethics (MAppEthics) (b) Primary The credit points accredited for subjects passed in 1990 will be Master of Arts (MA) 1. For all subjects passed prior to 1990: Prerequisites converted by a factor of 10:6 (refer to "1991 Master of Fnvirorunental Studies (MES) Credit Point 1991 Credit Points For secondary methods normally at least 2I9ths of a degree in the System", this page). Master of Letters (MUtt) main teaching area and 1/9th of a degree in any subsidiary area Part I subjects 20 Master of Theatre Arts (MThA) Exceptional Circumstances Arising in Transition For primary method at least 2/9ths ofadegreein aspecified areaand Part II subjects 30 Doctor of Philosophy (PhD) In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in 1/91h of a degree in each oftwo others. The specified areaisusually Doctor of Letters (DLiu) particular transition cases the Dean may determine the transition Part III subjects 40 a secondary teaching area program to be followed. 2. ~or subjects passed in 1990 convert the 1990 credit points Prerequ&tes for Diploma in Education Units Further details may be obtainedfromthe Faculty Secretary,Faculty mto 1991 credit points using the table below of Education (ext 417). Students who intend to proceed to a Diploma in Education should The Review of Academic Progress 48 CP System(1990) 80 CP System(1991) familiarise themselves with the prerequisites for units offered in the Students intending to become teachers should contact the NSW 3 5 Diploma course. Department of Education to ensure that they are eligible for in the Faculty of Arts employment and promotion within the Department. 6 10 These prerequisites are stated in terms of passes in subjects of the Acting under the Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory Progress 12 20 University of Newcastle. Applicants with qualifications from other as ~t out in Volume 1 of the Calendar, the Faculty Board will universities and those who finished a Newcastle course recently Standing in Undergraduate revJ.ew: 18 30 whose courses of study have included subjects which are deemed Degrees in the Faculty (1) all students who have failed to pass at least 50% of their total 24 40 for this purpose to provide an equivalent foundation, may be enrolment at the end of the second year of attendance; 30 50 admitted to candidature by the Dean on the recommendation of the (1) The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and unspecified semester subjects to a candidate, on such (2) all ~ull-time students who have arecord of complete failure in 36 60 Head of the Department of Education. conditions as it may determine, in recognition of work theIr first year of attendance or part-time students with an 42 70 The Diploma in Education course is offered in the following completed in this University or another institution, provided equivalent failure record; 48 80 methods: that credit shall not be given to any candidate for more than (3) all students who have failed two subjects twice; or 54 90 (a) Secondary 110 credit points. (4) students enrolled in the course leading to the degree of 60 100 Art (2) Candidates granted standing in recognition of work at Bac.helor ?f Social Work who have failed a compulsory 96 160 subject tWlce and may take action under the Regulations. Fnglish another institution must complete at least 40 credit points at 144 240 History the 300 level in this University. 192 320 Social Sciences (Geography, Commerce, Social Science) 9 8 FACULTY INFORMATION SECTION THREE SEcrIONlWO Four year degrees such as the Bachelorof Arts (psychology) now illustrative examples follow: require 320 credit points in order to qualify for the award. Th~ (a) Student A is a Bachelor of Arts student and has passed the conversion of subjects passed prior to 1991 into 1991 credIt following subjects in the years specified: points for four year degrees is the same as that above. Students should note tbat in addition to accumulating the required Conversion number of credit points they must follow a degree pattern to 1991 CP specified in the relevant degree regulations to qualify for the 1988 English I = Part I subject 20 award of a degree. History I = Part I subject 20
1989 English ITA = Part IT subject 30 Psychology I = Part I subject 20 1990 American Cinema = 6cp 10 Gender & Writing = 6cp 10 English ill (core) = 12cp 20
Total of 1991 credit points = 130 completed at commencement of 1991 Total 1991 credit points required for award of degree = 240 1991 credit points required to BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS complete degree = 110 Regulations Governing the Ordinary (2) A candidate may not enrol in any year in any combination of subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of (b) Student B is a Bachelor of Arts student and has passed the Degree of Bachelor of Arts the timetable for that year. following subjects in the years specified: 1. General (3) Except with the permission of the Dean, a candidate shall These Regulations prescribe the requirements for the ordinary not enrol in subjects totalling more than 50 credit points per Conversion degree of Bachelor of Arts of the University of Newcastle. semester or the semester equivalent for full year subjects. to 1991 CP (4) A candidate who fails any subject twice shall not be 1986 Sociology I =Part I Subject = 20 2. Definitions permitted to enrol again in that subject except with the 1987 Class.Civ. I = Part I Subject = 20 IntheseRegulations, unless the context or subject matter otherwise permission of the Dean on the recommendation of the Head of Department. Geography I = Part I Subject = 20 indicates or requires: "course" means the total requirements prescribed from time to Drama I = Part I Subject = 20 time to qualify a candidate for the degree; 4. Qualification for Admission to the Degree 1988 Leave of Absence "Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty; (1) To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall 1989 DramallA = Part IT Subject = 30 "the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Arts; pass subjects totalling 240 credit points presented in Sociology llB = Part IT Subject = 30 accordance with the provisions of Regulation 9 of these "Department" means the Department offering a particular subject Regulations. 1990 The Theatre of and includes any other body so doing; Reality = 9 cp (1990) 15 "Faculty" means the Faculty of Arts; Community Drama I = 3 cp (1990) 5 5. Subject "Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty; The Dramas of (1) To complete a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, Alienation&Surrealism= 9 cp (1990) 15 "subject" means any part of the course for which a result may be tutorials, seminars, workshops, laboratory classes and field recorded. Subjects shall be classified as 100,200,300 or 400 level work and submit such written work or other work as the Theatrecraft I = 3 cp (1990) 5 by the Faculty Board. Department shall require. "discipline" means a sequence of subjects recognised by the (2) Topassasubjectacandidateshallcompleteitandpasssuch Total of 1991 credit points completed 180 Faculty Board as constituting a discipline. examinations as the Faculty Board shall require. at commencement of 1991 Total 1991 credit points required 240 3. Enrolment 6. Standing for award of degree (1) A candidate's enrolment in any year must be approved by (1) The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and 1991 credit points required 60 the Dean or a nominee of the Dean. unspecified subjects to a candidate, on such conditions as to complete degree it may determine, in recognition of work completed in this university or another institution. 11 10 BAOIELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS SliCfION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS SECfIQN TIIREE
10. Results 7. Standing 7. Prerequisites and Corequisites Regulations Relating to the Degree of The result obtained by a successful candidate in a subject shall be (1) The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and (1) The Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of Bachelor of Arts (Psychology) Terminating Pass, Pass, Credit, Distinction, or High Distinction. unspecified subjects to a candidate, on such cooditions as it the Department may prescribe prerequisites and/or 1. General may determine, in recognition of work completed in this corequisites for any subject offered by that Department. These Regulations prescribe the requirements for the degree of university or another institution (2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board granted Combined Degree Courses Bachelor of Arts (psychology) of the University of Newcastle. after considering any recommendation made by the Head 8. Prerequisites and Corequisites of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a subject 11. General unless that candidate has passed any subjects prescribed as A candidate may complete the requirements for the degree in 2. Definitions (1) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board granted after its prerequisites at any grade which may be specified and conjunction with another Bachelor'S degree by completing a "course" means the total requirements prescribed from time to time coosidering any recommendation made by the Head of the has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is already combined degree course approved by the Faculty Board and also to qualify a candidate for the degree. Department, no candidate may enrol in a subject unless that candidate has passedany subjects prescribedasitsprerequisites enrolled in any subjects prescribed as its corequisites. the Faculty Board of the Faculty offering that other Bachelor's "Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty. at any grade which may be specified and has already passed (3) A candidate attaining a Terminating Pass in a subject shall degree. "the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Psychology). or concurrently enrols in oris already enrolled in any subjects be deemed not to have passed that subject for prerequisite "Department" means the Department offering a particular subject prescribed as its corequisite. purposes. 12. Admission to a combined degree course: and includes any other body so doing. (2) A candidate attaining a Tenninating Pass in a subject shall be (a) shall be subject to the approval of the Deans of the two "Faculty" means the Faculty of Arts. deemed not to have passed that subject for prerequisite Faculties 8. Withdrawal purposes. "Faculty Board" means the Faculty board of the FacUlty. (1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or the course only (b) shall, save in exceptional circumstances, be at the end ofthe by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and candidate's first year of enrolment for the ordinary degree; "subject" means any part of the course for which a result may be 9. Withdrawal the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of and recorded. Subjects shall be classified as 100,200,300 or 400 level (1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or the course only such notification. (c) shall be restricted to candidates with an average of at least by the Faculty Board. by informing the Secretary to the University in writing andthe (2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the "discipline" means any sequence of subjects recognised by the credit level. withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such relevant date shall be deemedtohavefailedinthatsubject Faculty Board as coostituting a discipline. notification. unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without 13. The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined degree (2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the penalty. The relevant date shall be: course shall be no less in quantity and quality than if the two 3. Grading of Degrees relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject (a) in the case of a subject offered only in the first courses were taken separately as shall be certified by the Deans The degree may be conferred either as an ordinary degree or as an unless granted pennission by the Dean to withdraw without semester, the Monday of the 9th week of first semester; of the two Faculties. honours degree. For the honours degree there shall be three classes penalty. The relevant date shall be: (b) in the case of a subject offered only in the second of honours: Oass L Oass II and Oass m. Class II shall have two (a) in the case of a subject offered only in the first semester, the Monday of the 9th week of second 14. To qualify for admission to the two degrees a candidate shall divisions, namely Division I and Division II. semester, the Monday of the 9th week of fIrst semester; semester; satisfy the requirements for both degrees. (b) in the case of a subject offered only in the second (c) in the case of any other subject, the Monday of the 4. Enrolment semester, the Monday ofthe 9th weekofsecood semester; 3rd week of second semester. 15. Relaxing Provision (1) A candidate's enrolment in any year must be approved by the (c) in the case of any other subject, the Monday of the 3n1 In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a " Dean or the Dean's nominee. week of second semester. 9. Degree Patterns particular case the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty J (2) A candidate may not enrol in any year in any combination of The subjects totalling 240 credit points presented for the degree Board may relax any provision of these Regulations. i subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of the 10. Degree Pattern shall be chosen from those approved by the Faculty Board in timetable for that year. • The list of subjects apprOlJed by the Faculty Board is divided into Group ';II", (1) The subjects totalling 320 credit points shall be presented in accordance with the following conditions: (3) Except with the permission of the Dean a candidate shall not A and Group B subjects. t accordance with the following provisions: (a) not more than 80 credit points from Group B* ** Disciplilles countillg towards the Bachelor of Arts are set out ill the enrol in subjects totalling more than 50 credit points per (a) The subjects shall include: subjects may be counted; list of approved subjects. semester or the semester equivalent for full-year subjects. (b) no more than 80 credit points at the 100 level may Psychology 101 and 102; at least five of Psychology 201, be counted; 5. Qualification for Admission to the Degree 202, 203, 204, 205 and 206 (including PSYC201); Psychology 301 and five other subjects at the 300 level; (c) at the 100 level no more than five discipline To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass and 80 credit points at the 400 level at either pass or subjects totalling 320 credit points presented in accordance with the areas** may be counted; honours level. Where available, additional subjects at the provisions of Regulation 10 of these Regulations. (d) no more than 20 credit points in any one discipline 300 level may be taken. at the 100 level may be counted, except with the (b) not morethan SO credit points from GroupB* subjects '.Subject permission of the Dean; may be counted; (e) at least 30 credit points at the 200 level and at least (1) To complete a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, (c) no more than SO credit points at the 100 level may be 40 credit points at the 300 level must becompletedin the tutorials, seminars, workshops, laboratory classes and field counted; one discipline; work and submit such written work or other work as the Department shall require. (d) at the 100 level no more than five discipline areas may (f) no subject may be counted which is in the opinion be counted; of the Faculty Board substantially equivalent to work (2) To pass a subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such for which a candidate has already received either credit examinations as the Faculty Board shall require. (e) no more than 20 credit points in any one discipline at or standing. the 100 level may be counted, except with the permission of the Dean;
13 12 BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS SECfION TIIREE SECTION 1HREE (2) To pass a subject a candidate shall complete it and pass such (2) A candidate may not present for the degree subjects which (f) no subject may be counted which is in the opinion of Rules Relating to the Degree of examinations, including Field Education assessments, as have previously been counted towan!s another degree or the Faculty Board substantially equivalent to work for Bachelor of Social Work the Faculty Boan! shall require. diploma obtained by the candidate, except to such extent as which a candidate has already received either credit or the Faculty Board may permit. standing. 1. General 7. Standing (2) A candidate may not present for the degree subjects which These Regulations prescribe the requirements for the degree of 11. Results have previously been cOlmted towan!s another degree or Bachelor of Social Work of the University of Newcastle. The Faculty Board may grant standing in specified and unspecified diploma obtained by the candidate, except to such extent as subjects to a candidate, on such conditions as it may determine, (1) The result obtained by a candidate in a Field Education in recognition of work completed in this university or another subject shall be either Pass or Fail. the Faculty Boan! may permit. 2. Definitions institution. (2) all "course" means the total requirements prescribed from time to time The results obtained by a successful candidate in other subjects shall be: 11. Results to qualify a candidate for the degree. 8. Prerequisites and Corequisites Terminating Pass, Pass, Credit, Distinction or High Distinction. The results obtained by a successful candidate shall be: "Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty. (1) The Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Head of Terminating Pass, Pass, Credit, Distinction or High Distinction "the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Social Worle. Department may prescribe prerequisites and/orcorequisites 12. Relaxing Provision "Department" means the Department offering a particular subject for any subject offered by the Department. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a 12. Relaxing Provision and includes any other body so doing. (2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board granted particular case the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a "Faculty" means the Faculty of Arts. after considering any recommendation made by the Head Boan! may relax any provision of these Regulations. particular case the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty of the Department, no candidate may enrol in a subject "Faculty Board" means the Faculty Boan! of the Faculty. Boan! may relax any provision of these Regulations. unless that candidate has passed any subjects prescribed as "subject" means any part of the course for which a result may be its prerequisites at any grade which may be specified and recorded. Subjects shall be classified as 100,200,300 or 400 level has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is already by the Faculty Board. enrolled in any subjects prescribed as its corequisite. "discipline" means any sequence of subjects recognised by the (3) A candidate attaining a Terminating Pass in a subject shall Faculty Board as constituting a discipline. be deemed not to have passed that subject for prerequisite purposes. 3. Grading of Degrees The degree may be conferred either as an ordinary degree or as an 9. Withdrawal honours degree. For the honours degree there shall be two classes (1) Acandidatemaywithdrawfromasubjectorthecourseonly of honours: Class I and Class II. Class II shall have two divisions, by informing the Secretary to the University in writing and namely Division I and Division II. the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification. 4. Enrolment (2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the (1) A candidate's enrolment in any year must be approved by the . relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject Dean or a nominee of the Dean. unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without penalty. The relevant date shall be: (2) A candidate may not enrol in any year in any combination of . subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of the 'i (a) in the case of a subject offered only in the first timetable for that year. ' semester, the Monday of the 9th week of frrst semester; (3) Except with the permission of the Dean a candidate shall i (b) in the case of a subject offered only in the second not enrol in subjects totalling more than 50 credit points per { semester, the Monday of the 9th week of second semester or the semester equivalent for full-year subjects. t semester; .1 (c) in the case of aField Education subject, the 29th day 5. Qualification for Admission to the Degree j of Field Education Placement; To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass (d) in the case of any other subject, the Monday of the subjects totalling 320 credit points presented in accordance with 3rd week of second semester. the provisions of Rule 10 of these Rules. 10. Degree Pattern 6. Subject . (1) The subjects totalling 320 credit points shall be presented (1) To complete a subject a candidate in accordance with the following provisions: (a) shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars, the subjects shall include 200 credit points from Social workshops and laboratory classes, Work subjects (20 at the 100 level and 60 at each of the (b) shall participate in all such field education 200, 300 and 400 levels), 80 credit points from other specified subjects and 40 credit points from subjects placement activities and approved as elective subjects by the Faculty Boan!. (c) shall submit such written or other work as the Department shall require.
15 14 SEcrION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS SECfION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
SUBJECTS APPROVED BY THE FACULTY BOARD, FACULTY OF ARTS Computer Subject Name Lengtb Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites GROUP A SUBJECTS Number Points perwk
Subjects from this group may be chosen subject to pre and corequisites and the appropriate degree regulations. Greek CLAS151 Elementary Greek FY 20 5 Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites CLAS155 Advanced Greek FY 20 3 HSC Greek or equiv. Number Points perwk CLAS251 Greek Text and Syntax I } Sem 20 3 Entry to all GREEK CLASSICS CLAS252 Greek Text & "Syntax IT } 200 level units Classical Civilisation CLAS253 Greek Special Study FY 10 requires 20cps at CLAS101 Greek Civilisation FY 20 4 GREEK 100 level. CLAS102 Roman Civilisation} CLAS351 Greek Text & Language I } Sem 20 3 Entry to all GREEK - CLAS352 Greek Text & Language IT} CLAS203 Roman History (Core) Sem 10 3 Entry to all CLASS. CN. 200 level units 300 level units ; CLAS353 Greek Palaeography & Text Study FY 10 CLAS204 Roman Society Sem 10 3 requires 20cps at CLASS. CW. 100 level or requires 30cps at Greek Special Author Study FY 10 CLAS205 Roman Britain and Sem 10 3 HISTlOO level. ' CLAS354 GREEK 200 level. Anglo-Saxon England CLAS421 Classical Studies Honours - Greek FY 80 . CLAS451 Greek Honours FY 80 CLAS301 Greek History (Core) Sem 10 3 Entry to all CLASS. CN. 300 level units CLAS302 Greek Society Sem 10 3 requires 30cps at CLASS. CW.(ll) 200 level CLAS303 Roman History (Core) Sem 10 3 (including CLAS201 or 203, plus CLAS241). Latin CLAS304 Roman Society Sem 10 3 30 cps at HISTIOO level enables entry to . CLAS161 Elementary Latin FY 20 5 CLAS305 Roman Britain and Sem 10 3 individual units. CLAS165 Advanced Latin FY 20 3 HSC Latin or Anglo-Saxon England equiValent CLAS311 Option I - Alexander the Great FY 10 - Augustus CLAS261 Latin Text & Language} Sem 20 3 Entry to all LATIN CLAS312 Option IT - Greek, Etruscan FY 10 CLAS262 Latin Text & Language} 3 200 level units & Roman Art CLAS263 Latin Special Study FY 10 1 requires 20cps at LATIN 100 level CLAS411 Classical Studies Honours - FY 80 Civilisation CLAS361 Latin Text & Language} Sem 20 3 Entry to all LATIN CLAS362 Latin Text & Language } 3 300 level units CLAS363 Latin Palaeography & Text Study FY 10 1 requires 30cps at Classical Literature in Translation CLAS364 Latin Special Author Study FY 10 LATIN200 level CLAS231 Greek and Roman Epic Sem 10 2+1 Entry to all CLASS. LIT. 200 level units CLAS431 Classical Studies Honours - FY 80 CLAS233 Greek and Roman Oratory Sem 10 2+1 requires 20cps at CLASS. CW. 1100 or Latin CLAS234 Roman Satire Sem 10 2+1 GREEK 1100 or LATIN 1100 or ENGUSH CLAS246# Comparative Tragedy Sem 10 3 100 level. CLAS461 Latin Honours FY 80 CLAS471 Combined Greek & Latin Honours FY 80 CLAS331 Greek and Roman Epic Sem 10 2+1 Entry to all CLASS.uT. 300 level units CLAS332 Greek and Roman Comedy Sem 10 2+1 requires 30cps at CLASS. CN. IT 200 or Sanskrit CLAS333 Greek and Roman Oratory Sem 10 2+1 GREEK IT 200 or LATIN IT 200 (and must CLAS171 Elementary Sanskrit FY 20 4 CLAS334 Roman Satire Sem 10 2+1 include CLAS241 or equivalent). 30 cps at CLAS335 Erotic Poetry Sem 10 2+1 ENGUSH 200 level enables entry to DRAMA individual units. DRAM101 Introduction to Drama FY 20 5 DRAM201 Classics Special Studies The Greek Theatre Sem 10 3 DRAM101 lxDRAM250-262 DRAM202 The Emergence of Popular Sem 10 3 DRAMI01 As for DRAM201 CLAS241 Values (Core) FY 10 20cps at CLASS.CN.! 100 or LATIN 1100 Theatre or GREEK I 100 level. DRAM203 The Public Stage of the Sem 10 3 DRAM 101 As for DRAM201 CLAS242 Historiography I - Thucydides FY 10 1 20cps at CLASS.CN.!l00 or HISTlOO level. Renaissance & Sallust DMM204 Theatre in the Age of Reason Sem 10 3 DRAMI01 As for DRAM201 CLAS244 Historiography m - FY 10 As for CLAS242 DRAM205 Players and the Painted Stage Sem 10 3 Polybius & Uvy DRAM101 As for DRAM201 DRAM2lO The Development of Actor's Sem 10 3 DRAMI0l CLAS342 Historiography I - Thucydides FY 10 30cps at CLASS.CN. IT 200 or CLASS. UT. 30cp atDRAM200 Craft from Garrick to Olivier & Sallust IT 200 or HIST200 level. level DRAM212 Directors and Directions in the Sem 10 3 CLAS344 Historiography ill - Polybius FY 10 As for CLAS342 DRAM101 As for DRAM210 Modem Theatre &Uvy
# On offer at Central Coast Campus only in 1991. 16 17 SECTION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS SECflON THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points perwk Number Points perwk
DRAM250 Acting I DRAM101 lx5cp at DRAM200 Sem 5 2 ECON201 Economics II FY 20 4 ECON101 level ECON202 European Economic History Sem 10 2 ECON102 or DRAM251 Acting II 5 2 DRAM250 As for DRAM250 Sem ECON103 or DRAM252 Community Drama I 5 2 DRAMI0l As for DRAM250 Sem ECONI01 DRAM253 Community Drama II Sem 5 2 DRAM252 As for DRAM250 ECON203 Asian Economic History I Sem 10 2 As for ECON202 DRAM254 Theatrecraft I 2 DRAM 101 As for DRAM250 Sem 5 ECON204 Asian Economic History II Sem 10 2 As for ECON202 DRAM255 Theatrecraft II DRAM254 As for DRAM250 Sem 5 2 i ECON205 Asian Economic History III Sem 10 2 As for ECON202 DRAM256 Uses of Drama I Sem 5 2 DRAMI0l As for DRAM250 ECON208 Comparative Economic Systems A Sem 10 2 ECON101 DRAM257 Uses of Drama II Sem 5 2 DRAM256 As for DRAM250 ECON209 Comparative Models and Cases Sem 10 2 ECON101 DRAM258 Radio I Sem 5 2 DRAMI0l As for DRAM250 ECON21O Political Economics Sem 10 2 ECONlOi DRAM259 Television I Sem 5 2 DRAM101 As for DRAM250 ~ ECON211 Theory of Public Choice Sem 10 2 ECON101 DRAM260 A Director's Perspective I DRAM101 Sem 5 2 As for DRAM250 ECON216 Industry Economics A Sem 10 2 ECON101 DRAM261 A Director's Perspective II Sem 5 2 DRAM101 As for DRAM250 , ECON217 Industry Economics B Sem 10 2 ECON216 DRAM262 The Dramatic Script Sem 5 2 DRAM101 As for DRAM250 .' ECON218 Problems of Developing Countries Sem 10 2 ECONI0l ii ECON230 Introductory Labour Economics Sem 10 2 ECON101 DRAM301 The Theatre of Reality !em 15 3 30cp at DRAM 200 lx5cp at DRAM200 ;1 ECON240 Introductory Econometrics Sem 10 3 ECON104 level level ; ECON241 Econometrics I Sem 10 2 ECON240 DRAM302 The Dramas of Alienation and Sem 15 3 30cp at DRAM200 As for DRAM301 ~ ECON242 Applied Econometrics I Sem 10 4 ECON240 :~ ECON243 Mathematical Economics A Surrealism level :! Sem 10 2 ECON104 or MA TH103 DRAM304 The Epic Tradition Sem 15 3 30cp at DRAM 200 As for DRAM301 ) Intending students 'J ECON301 EconomicsID FY 20 2 ECON201 DRAM312 Contemporary Approaches to Sem 20 3 ) must consult the ~I• ECON302 European Economic History Sem 10 2 20cps from Group B Shakespeare ) Head of the Dept. ~ Economic History )ofDrama. ECON303 Asian Economic History I Sem 10 2 As for ECON302 DRAM314 American Drama & Theatre Sem 20 3 )Normally 30cp at ECON304 Asian Economic History II Sem 10 2 As for ECON302 DRAM315 Japanese Theatre Sem 20 3 ) DRAM200 level in a ECON305 Asian Economic History III Sem 10 2 As for ECON302 )cognate discipline ECON306 International Economics A Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM350 Acting I Sem 5 2 30cp at DRAM200 lx15cp at DRAM300 ECON307 International Economics B Sem 10 2 ECON306 level level ECON308 Macroeconomic Planning Sem 10 2 ECON104 & ECON201 DRAM351 Acting II Sem 5 2 DRAM350 As forDRAM350 ECON3Q9 Urban Economics Sem 10 1.5 ECON201 DRAM352 Community Drama I Sem 5 2 30cp at DRAM200 As for DRAM350 ECON31O Regional Economics Sem 10 2 ECON201 level ECON311 Environmental Economics Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM353 Community Drama II Sem 5 2 DRAM352 As for DRAM350 ECON312 Managerial Economics Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM354 Theatrecraft I Sem 5 2 30cp at DRAM200 As for DRAM350 ECON313 Growth and Fluctuations Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM355 Theatrecraft II Sem 5 2 DRAM354 As for DRAM350 ECON314 Topics in Economic Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM356 Uses of Drama I Sem 5 2 30cp at DRAM200 As for DRAM350 Development level ECON315 Public Finance Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM357 Uses of Drama II Sem 5 2 DRAM356 As for DRAM350 ECON316 Australian Public Finance Sem 10 2 ECON315 DRAM358 Radio I Sem 5 2 30cp at DRAM200 As for DRAM350 ECON317 Economic Doctrines & Sem 10 2 ECON201 level Methods A ECON318 DRAM359 Television I Sem 5 2 As for DRAM358 As for DRAM350 Economic Doctrines & Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM360 A Director's Perspective I Sem 5 2 As for DRAM358 As for DRAM350 MethodsB ECON319 DRAM361 A Director's Perspective II Sem 5 2 DRAM360 As for DRAM350 Economic Doctrines & Sem 10 2 ECON201 DRAM364 Television II Sem 5 2 DRAM359 As for DRAM350 MethodsC ECON322 DRAM365 Television ID Sem 5 2 DRAM364 As for DRAM350 Monetary Theory Sem 10 2 ECON201 ECON323 DRAM366 The Dramatic Script Sem 5 2 As for DRAM350 As for DRAM350 Financial Institutions and Policy Sem 10 2 ECON322 ECON325 Industrial Relations IDA Sem 10 2 1R202 ECON326 DRAM401 Drama Honours FY 40 Industrial Relations IIlB Sem 10 2 ECON325 ECON330 DRAM402 Drama Honours FY 40 Labour Economics I Sem 10 2 ECON230 & ECON201 (Also available to ECONOMICS students who have ECONI01 Economics I FY 20 4 completed ECON206 ECONI02 Economic History A Sem 10 3 or ECON207) Labour Economics II Sem 10 2 ECONI03 Australian Economic History Sem 10 3 ECON330 -Econometrics II Sem 10 2 ECON241 or ECON213 or ECON215 18 19 SECTION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS SECTION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer Subject Name Lengtb Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points perwk Number Points perwk
ECON341 Econometrics III Sem 10 2 ECON340 ENGL230 Special Topic Sem 20 2 ENGLlOl ECON342 Applied Econometrics II Sem 10 3 ECON242 or 241 or ECON212 or 215 or ENGLJOI English III (Core) FY 20 2 ENGL201 ECON213 ENGLJ02 Renaissance Drama Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOI ECON343 Mathematical Economics B Sem 10 2 ECON243 . ENGLJ03 Modernism Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGL301 ENGLJ04 Gender and Writing Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOI ECON401 Economics IV (Part 1) FY 40 ENGLJ08 American Cinema Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOI ECON402 Economics IV (part 2 FY 40 ENGLJll Romance & Realism in 18th Sem 10 2 ENGL20l ENGLJOI ECON404 Industrial Relations IV (part 1) FY 40 & 19th Century Fiction ECON405 Industrial Relations IV (part 2) FY 40 ENGLJ12 Old & Medieval English Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOl Literature IR201 Industrial Relations IIA Sem 10 2 ECONI0lor :ENGLJI3 Shakespearean Tragedy Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOI Economic History or ,ENGLJI4 18th Century Fiction Sem 10 2 ENGL20l ENGLJOI Law subjects to the "ENGLJI5 Romanticism Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOI value of 2Ocps. ;~ENGLJI6 19th Century Narrative Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOI IR202 Industrial Relations lIB Sem 10 2 IR201 Traditions JENGLJ17 Early 20th Century Literature Sem 10 2 ENGL20l ENGL301 EDUCATION rlENGLJ20 Creative Writing - Prose, Sem 10 2 ENGL201 ENGLJOI EDUC101 Education IA# Sem 10 3 '5 Dramatic Dialogue & Poetry EDUCI02 Education IB# Sem 10 3 JENGLJ30 Special Topic Sem 20 2 ENGL20l
EDUC201 Education II FY 30 4 60cp at 100 level .. ENGL401 English Honours FY 80 EDUC303 Individual & Social Development FY 20 4 EDUC201 EDUC304 or 305 or IENGL402 English Honours FY 40 EDUC306 ENGL403 English Honours FY 40 EDUC304 Research Methodology in FY 20 4 EDUC201 EDUC303 or 305 or ENGL404 English/History Honours FY 40 Education EDUC306 ENGL405 English/History Honours FY 40 EDUC305 Philosophy of Education FY 20 4 EDUC201 EDUC303, ECON304, EDUC306 FRENCH EDUC306 History of Western Education FY 20 4 EDUC201 EDUC303, ECON304, EDUC305 FREllO Elementary French I Sem 10 6 Nil FREI20 Elementary French II Sem 10 6 French 11 0 or EDUC491 Education Honours FY 80 equivalent FRE130 Post-Elementary French Sem 10 50r6 HSC French (not ENGLISH 2UZ) & formal ENGLlOl English I FY 20 3 placement test ENGL201 English II (Core) FY 20 2 ENGLlOl ENGL202 Renaissance Drama Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 FRE201 Voltaire and the Enlightenment Sem 5 Either FRE2IO, ENGL204 Gender and Writing Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 FRE220 or FRE230 ENGL208 American Cinema Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 FRE202 Themes et Textes Sem 5 Either FRE2IO, ENGL21 0 English II (Writing) FY 20 3 60cp from Group A FRE220 or FRE230 with at least 1 subject passed at credit level FRE203 Robbe-Grillet and the Narrative Sem 5 Either FRE2IO, or better FRE2200r ENGL211 Romance & Realism in 18th Sem 10 2 ENGLI0l ENGL201 FRE230 & 19th Century Fiction FRE204 Modem French Drama and the Sem 5 Either FRE2IO, ENGL212 Old & Medieval English Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 Greek Myth FRE220 or FRE230 Literature FRE205 The Phonetics of French I Sem 5 Either FRE210, ENGL213 Shakespearean Tragedy Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 FRE220 or FRE230 ENGL214 18th Century Fiction Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 FRE206 The Phonetics of French II Sem 5 FRE205 Either FRE2IO, ENGL215 Romanticism Sem 10 2 ENGLI0l ENGL201 FRE220 or FRE230 ENGL216 19th Century Narrative Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 FRE210 Intermediate French I Sem 10 50r6 FREI20 Traditions FRE220 Intermediate French II Sem 10 50r6 FRE130 or FRE210 ENGL217 Early 20th Century Literature Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 FRE230 Post-Intermediate French Sem 10 3 FRE220 ENGL220 Creative Writing - Prose, Sem 10 2 ENGLlOl ENGL201 Dramatic Dialogue & Poetry
nCetltrai Coast Campus only in 1991 20 21 SECfION TIIREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIO~: gcnON TIIREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites 'Computer SUbject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points perwk ,Number Points perwk
FRE301 The French Cinema Sem 5 Either FRE310 lGEOG401 Geography Honours Sem 40 FRE320, FRE330 or GEOG402 Geography Honours Sem 40 FRE340 FRE302 France in the 1920s Sem 5 Either FRE310 ··GERMAN FRE320, FRE330 or Elementary German, Sem 1 FRE340 Sem 10 6 Basic German Text Study, Sem 1 FRE303 The Nineteenth Century Novel Sem 5 Either FRE310 Sem 5 2 As for GER111 Elementary German, Sem 2 FRE320, FRE330 or Sem 10 6 GER110 or equivalent Post HSC German, Sem 1 FRE340 Sem 10 5 HSC German or FRE304 The Twentieth Century Novel Sem 5 Either FRE31 0 GERl200r FRE320, FRE330 or equivalent Post-HSC German, Sem 2 FRE340 Sem 10 6 GER130 or equivalent German Language Revision, Sem 1 Sem FRE305 French Poetry from Baudelaire Sem 5 Either FRE31O, 320 5 3 HSC German or to Apollinaire FRE330 or FRE340 GER1200r FRE306 literature and Society in the Sem 5 Either FRE31 0 equivalent Business German, Sem 1 Sem Seventeenth Century FRE320, FRE330 GER113 5 2 As for GER111 GER111 German Language Revision, Sem 2 Sem or FRE340 GER121 5 3 GER111 0r FRE307 Approaches to Writing French Sem 5 Either FRE310 equivalent Basic German Text, Sem 2 FRE320, FRE330 or GER122 Sem 5 2 GER112 or GER121 FRE340 equivalent Business German, Sem 2 FRE308 The Spoken Language Sem 5 Either FRE31O, 320, GERl23 Sem 5 2 GER113 GER121 0r FRE330 or FRE340 equivalent FRE310 Advanced French I Sem 10 3 FRE220 Continuing German A, Sem 1 FRE320 Advanced French II Sem 10 3 FRE230 or FRE310 GER210 Sem 15 6 GERl20 or equivalent FRE330 Advanced French ill Sem 10 3 FRE320 GER230 Intermediate German A, Sem 1 Sem 15 3 20cp of German or FRE340 Advanced French N Sem 10 3 FRE330 equivalent GER250 Intermediate German B, Sem 1 Sem 15 3 As for GER230 FRE410 Honours French 1-2yrs 80 GER220 Continuing German B, Sem 2 Sem 15 6 GER2100r GEOGRAPHY equivalent GER240 Intermediate German A, Sem 2 Sem 15 3 lOcp of German at GEOO101 Introduction to Physical Sem 10 4 See* 200 level or Geography equivalent GEOO102 Introduction to Human Geography Sem 10 4 See * Intermediate German B, Sem 2 Sem 15 3 As for GER240 GEOO201 Methods in Physical Geography Sem 10 4 GEOO101 Continuing German Language Sem 5 3 GER120 or equivalent GEOO202 Methods in Human Geography Sem 10 4 GEOO102 Sem 1 GEOO203 Biogeography and Climatology Sem 10 4 GEOO101 2 Introductory German Text Study Sem 5 2 As for GER211 GER211 GEOO204 Geomorphology of Australia Sem 10 4 GEOO101 Sem 1 GEOO205 Contemporary Australia & Sem 10 4 GEOO102 Business German, Sem 1 Sem 5 2 As for GER211 GER211 or 111 East Asia Intermediate German Language A, Sem 5 2 GER121 or GER140 GEOO206 Socio-Economic Geography Sem 10 4 GEOG102 Sem 1 or equivalent Intermediate German Language B, Sem 10 2 As for GER231 GEOG301 Advanced Methods in Physical Sem 10 4 GEOG101 & Sem 1 Geography GEOG201 Intermediate Text Study A Sem 5 GER140 or 121 or A German language GEOG302 Advanced Methods in Human Sem 10 4 GEOG102& Sem 1 120 or equivalent option Geography GEOG202 IntermediateText Study B, Sem 5 As for GER233 As for GER233 GEOG303 Geography of Aboriginal Australia Sem 10 4 GEOG102 Sem 1 GEOG304 The Biosphere and Conservation Sem 10 4 GEOG203 IntermediateText Study C, Sem 5 As for GER233 As for GER233 GEOO305 Climatic Problems Sem 10 4 GEOG203 Sem 1 GEOO306 Geography of Australia: Sem 10 4 GEOG102 Intermediate Text Study D, Sem 5 As for GER233 As for GER233 An Historical Perspective Sem 1 GEOO307 The Hydrosphere Sem 10 4 GEOO101 Continuing German Language, Sem 5 3 GER2110r GEOO309 A Subject in Human Geography Sem 10 GEOG102 Sem2 equivalent (fitle to be advised) Introductory German Text Study Sem 5 2 As for GER211 GER2210r Sem2 equivalent * Students should note that GEOG101 and GEOG102 are prerequisites for a major study in Geography Business German, Sem 2 Sem 5 2 GER213 or equivalent GER221 andfor admission to Goegraphy Honours GEOG401
22 23 SECfION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATION~§ECfION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Computer SUbject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points per wk Number Points per wk
GER241 Intermediate German IOcp at GER 200 level Sem 10 2 GER325 Intermediate Text Study G, Sem 5 2 As for GER323 As for GER323 Language A, Sem 2 or equivalent Sem2 GER242 Intermediate German As for GER241 Sem 10 2 GER326 Intermediate Text Study H, Sem 5 2 As for GER323 As for GER323 Language B, Sem 2 Sem2 GER243 IntermediateText Study A, Sem 5 IOcp at GER 200 level A German GER381 Advanced German Language A Sem 5 2 GER351 or GER352 Sem2 or equivalent language option Sem2 GER244 Intermediate Text Study B, Sem 5 As for GER243 As for GER243 GER382 Advanced German Language B Sem 5 2 As for GER381 Sem2 Sem2 GER245 Intermediate Text Study C, Sem 5 As for GER243 As for GER243 GER383 Advanced German Sem 5 2 IOcp at GER 300 level GER381 Or 382 Sem2 Literature A, Sem 2 or equivalent GER246 Intermediate Text Study D, Sem As for GER243 As for GER243 5 ~ER384 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER383 As for GER383 Sem2 Literature B, Sem 2 fJER385 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER383 As for GER383 GER310 Intermediate German, Sem 1 Sem 20 6 15cp at GER 200 level Literature C, Sem 2 or equivalent rtrER386 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER383 As for GER383 GER330 Advanced German A, Sem 1 Sem 20 6 15cp from GER243- Literature D, Sem 2 246 or equivalent GER350 Advanced German B, Sem 1 Sem 20 6 As for GER330 ,tGER410 German Honours FY 80 GER320 Intermediate German, Sem 2 Sem 20 6 15cp at GER 300 level , or equivalent GER360 Advanced German A, Sem 2 Sem 20 6 At least 10 cp from ecause the requirements and point-score value of many of the History subjects listed below have changed GER330-356 am the subjects of the same name in 1990, it is necessary to give the 1991 subjects a new code designation. GER380 Advanced German B, Sem 2 Sem 20 6 GER360 "he subjects with changed point-score values are therefore klbelled HISY rather than HIST. These subjects GER311 Intermediate German Sem 10 2 15cp at GER 200 level till appear in the 1991 timetable with the code HIST. For example HISY204 in the Handbook is exactly Language C, Sem 1 or equivalent quivalent to HIST204 in the timetable, and simiklrly for other HISY subjects. GER312 Intermediate German Sem 10 2 As for GER311 Language D, Sem 1 The Foundations of Australian Sem 10 3-1/2 GER313 Intermediate German Sem 5 2 As for GER311 GER311 or 312 Society Literature A, Sem 1 Australia in the Twentieth Sem 10 3-1/2 HISTlOI GER314 Intermediate German Sem 5 2 As for GER311 As for GER313 Century Literature B, Sem 1 East Asian Civilisations Sem 10 3 GER315 Intermediate German Sem 5 2 As for GER311 As for GER313 The Foundations of Western Sem 10 3 Literature C, Sem 1 Culture A GER316 Intermediate German Sem 5 2 As for GER311 As for GER313 The Foundations of Western Sem 10 3 HISTl04 literature D, Sem 1 CultureB GER351 Advanced German Sem 5 2 GER241 or 242 Language A, Sem 1 History of India A Sem 15 3 20cp at HISTlOO GER352 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER351 HISY202 level Language B, Sem 1 History of India B Sem 15 3 As for HIST201 GER353 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER351 GER351 or 352 HISY201 French Revolution and its Sem 15 3 20cp at HlSTl 00 literature A, Sem 1 its Aftermath level GER354 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER351 As for GER353 Nationalism, Fascism and the Sem 15 3 As for HISY204 literature B, Sem 1 Search for Peace GER355 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER351 As for GER353 American History to the Sem 15 3 20cp at HIST 100 level literature C, Sem 1 Civil War GER356 Advanced German Sem 5 2 As for GER351 As for GER353 American History after the Sem 15 3 As for HISY207 Literature D, Sem 1 Civil War GER321 Intermediate German Sem 10 2 GER311 or 312; or Reform, Revolution and Sem 15 3 20cp at HISTl 00 Language C, Sem 2 GER351 or 352 Marxism in Modern China level or HISTl03 or equivalent From Meiji to Showa Sem 15 3 As for HISY21 0 GER322 Intermediate German Sem 10 2 As for GER321 Colonisation and Culture Sem 15 3 20 cp at HlSTlOO Language D, Sem 2 Change: the South Pacific level I]ER323 Intermediate Text Study E, Sem 5 2 15cp at GER 300 level GER321 or 322 Imperialism and Independence: Sem 15 3 As for HISY212 Sem2 or equivalent the South Pacific GER324 Intermediate Text Study F Sem 5 2 As for GER323 As for GER323 Sem2 Central Coast Campus only in 1991 24 25 SECfION TIIREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIO~CflON THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Computer SUbject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points perwk S"umber Points perwk HISY216 England from Refonnation to Sem 15 3 20cp at HISTlOO level LINGUISTICS Revolution LINGI0l Introduction to Linguistics FY 20 4 HISY217 The Great Transfonnation? Sem 15 3 As for HISY216 English Society in the 18th & Linguistic Description FY 20 Early 19th Centuries UNG201 2 LlNGlOl LmG211 Language & Cognition Sem 10 2 LlNGlOl LlNG201 Second Langliage Acquisition Sem 10 2 LlNGlOl HISY301 History of India A Sem 15 3 30cp at HIST200 level HISY302 §,ING212 LlNG201 Language in Multicultural Sem 10 2 LlNGlOlor HISY302 History of India B Sem 15 3 As for HISY301 HISY301 r;,ING215 Societies SOC101/102 HISY303 Indian History: Select Documents FY 10 1 As for HISY301 HISY301& 302 Historical Linguistics Sem 10 2 LlNGlOl HISY304 French Revolution and its Sem 15 3 30cp at HIST200 level ~G217 LlNG201 . G220 Speech and Language Disorders Sem 10 Aftennath 2 LlNGlOl LlNG201 .~ HISY305 Nationalism, Fascism and the Sem 15 3 As for HISY304 3 Linguistic Theory Sem 20 3 LlNG201 Search for Peace 8JNG301 ResearchnVlinorThe~s FY 10 LlNG201 LlNG301 HISY306 Socialism and the Rus~an Sem 10 2 As for HISY304 HISY304 or [:'G302 G303 Research/Minor Thesis FY 10 LlNG201 40cp at LlNG 300 Revolution HISY305 " HISY307 American History to the Civil Sem 15 3 30cp at HIST200 level level Directed Reading Sem 10 War imG304 LlNG201 30cp at LING300 HISY308 American History after the Sem 15 3 As for HISY307 !J level plus permis~on Civil War of Head of Dept. Language and Cognition Sem 10 2 LlNG201 HISY309 American History, Directed FY 10 As for HISY307 HISY307 or LlNG301 . G312 Second Language Acqui~tion Sem 10 2 LlNG201 Reading HISY308 LlNG301 ~G311. G313 Conversational Analysis Sem 10 2 LlNG201 LlNG301 HISY310 A Special Topic in Chinese History Sem 20 3~1/2 30cp at HIST200 level .. G314 Structure of Languages Other Sem 10 2 LlNG201 LlNG301 HISY311 A Special Topic in Japanese Sem 20 3~1/2 As for HISY310 Than English History; Japan in the 1930s and ~ G315 Languages in Multicultural Sem 10 2 the Road to War LlNG201 LlNG301 Societies HISY312 Colonisation and Culture Sem 15 3-1/2 30cp at HIST200 level Variation in Language Sem Change: the South Pacific 10 2 LlNG201 LlNG301 Historical Linguistics Sem 10 2 LlNG201 HISY313 Imperialism and Independence: Sem 15 3 As for HISY312 LlNG301 Topics and Syntax Sem 10 the South Pacific 2 LlNG201 LlNG301 Analy~s of Speech Sem 10 LlNG201 HIST314 Selected Documents in Sem 10 As for HISY312 HISY312 or LlNG301 Speech and Language Disorders Sem 10 LlNG201 Pacific History HISY313 LlNG301 HISY316 England from Refonnation to Sem 15 3 30cp at HIST 200 level Linguistics Honours FY 80 Revolution HISY317 The Great Transfonnation? Sem 15 3 As for HIST316 English Society in the 18th & Early 19th Centuries Mathematics 111 Sem 10 6 HISY318 Selected Documents in British FY 10 As for HISY316 Mathematics 112 Sem 10 6 MA THIll or 101 History Mathematics 102 Sem 10 6 MATHl 01 or see2 HISY319 Issues in Australian History Sem 15 3 30cp at HIST200 level Mathematics 103 Sem 10 6 MATH102 or HISY320 History and Society Sem 15 3 30cp at HIST200 level MATHlll & 112
HIST401 History Honours FY 80 Mulitvariable Calculus Sem 5 2 MATHlO2&103 or MATH 101 &102 or JAPANESE MATH102& permis~on of H.O.D. JPNllO Elementary Japanese FY 20 6 Partial Differential Equations 1 Sem 5 2 MATH102&103 or MATH203 JPN210 Intennediate Spoken Japanese FY 20 4 JPNIlO or equivalent JPN220 MATHI0l&102 JPN220 Intennediate Written Japanese FY 10 2 JPNII0 or equivalent JPN210 Ordinary Differential Equations 1 Sem 5 2 MATHI02&103 or JPN311 Advanced Spoken Japanese I Sem 10 3 JPN210 MATH101 &102 JPN312 Advanced Spoken Japanese IT Sem 10 3 JPN3ll Real Analy~s Sem 5 2 MATHI02&103 JPN321 Advanced Written Japanese I Sem 10 3 JPN220 Analysis of Metric Spaces Sem 5 2 MATHI02&103 JPN322 Advanced Written Japanese IT Sem 10 3 JPN321 Complex Analysis 1 Sem 5 2 MATH102 MATH201 JPN331 Communication in Japanese I Sem 10 3 JPN210 Complex Analysis 2 Sem 5 2 MATH206 JPN332 Communication in Japanese IT Sem 10 3 JPN331 JPN341 Reading in Modem Japanese I Sem 10 3 JPN220 JPN342 Reading in Modem Japanese II Sem 10 3 JPN341 JPN41 0 Honours Japanese FY isoryenlry requiremenl- HSC3 unit Mathematics with a marko/at least 1201150 (or must have passed MATH10l) 26 27 SECfION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIOFON THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer SUbject Name Lengtb Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites tmputer Subject Name Lengtb Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points perwk mber Points perwk MATH209 Algebra Sem 5 2 MATHI02MATHI03 fIIL207 Scientific Knowledge and Sem 10 3 40cp &MATH2183 Scientific Method MATH210 Differential Geometry I Sem 5 2 MATH103 MATH201 Philosophy of Language Sem 10 3 PHIL101 MATH2183 Introduction to Rationality Theory Sem 10 3 PHIL101 MATH211 Group Theory Sem 5 2 MATH102 & 103 Informal Logic Sem 10 3 PHIL101 MATH212 Discrete Mathematics Sem 5 2 MATH 102 & 103 Politics Sem 10 3 PHIL101 or MATH102& Utilitariansim Sem 10 3 PHIL101 permission of H.O.D. Technology & Human FY 10 3 PHIL101 MATH213 Mathematical Modelling Sem 5 2 MATH I 02&MATH1 03 Values I MATH214 Mechanics Sem 5 2 MATH102&MATHI03 MATH203 Directed Readings Sem 10 3 PHIL101 MATH215 Operations Research Sem 5 2 MA THlO2&MATHI03 Locke and Berkeley Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level or MATH101 & 102 Topics in Ancient, Medieval and Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level or MATH111 & 102 Modem Philosophy MATH216 Numerical Analysis Sem 5 2 MATHI02&MATH103 Scientific Knowledge and Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level or (MATH101 & 102 Scientific Method &COMP101) Philosophy of Language Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level or (MATHlll & 102 Introduction to Rationality Theory Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level &COMP101) Informal Logic Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level MATH217 Linear Algebra 1 Sem 5 2 MATH1020r Politics Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level MATHlll & 112 Utilitariansim Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level MATH218 Linear Algebra 2 Sem 5 2 MATH102 & 103 Technology & Human FY 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level or (MATH101 & 102 Values I &COMPlOl) Philosophy Seminar 3A Sem 10 3 30cp at PHlL200 level 30cp at PHIL300 level MATH301 Logic & Set Theory Sem 10 3 Philosophy Seminar 3B Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200level 70cp at PHlL300 MATH302 General Tensors & Relativity Sem 10 3 MA TH201 MATH202 level MATH203 MATH2183 Honours Seminar 3C Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level MATH303 Variational Methods and Sem 10 3 MATH201 MATH203 Directed Readings Sem 10 3 30cp at PHIL200 level Integral Equations MATH204 MATH304 Ordinary Differential Equations 2 Sem 10 3 MATH201 MATH203 Philosophy Honours FY 80 MATH204 MATH2183 MATH305 Partial Differential Sem 10 3 MA TH201 MATH202 Equations 2 MA TH203 MATH204 Psychology Introduction 1 Sem 10 5 MATH307 Quantum & Statistical Sem 10 3 MATH201 MATH 203 Psychology Introduction 2 Sem 10 5 PSYC101 Mechanics MATH206 3 MATH308 Geometry 2 Sem 10 3 MATH218 MATH211 Foundations for Psychology Sem 10 4 PSYC102 MATH310 Functional Analysis Sem 10 3 MATH205 Basic Processes Sem 10 4 PSYCI02 PSYC201 MATH313 Numerical Analysis Sem 10 3 MATH201 MATH203 Developmental & Social Sem 10 4 PSYCI02 PSYC201 (Theory) MATH204 MATH2183 Processes 3 MATH314 Optimization Sem 10 3 MATH201 MATH218 Individual Processes Sem 10 4 PSYCI02 PSYC201 MATH315 Mathematical Biology Sem 10 3 MA TH201 MATH203 Applied Topics in Psychology 1 Sem 10 4 PSYC102 PSYC201 MATH213 Applied Topics in Psychology 2 Sem 10 4 PSYC102 PSYC201 MATH316 Industrial Modelling Sem 10 3 MA TH201 MA TH202 MATH203 MATH213 Advanced Foundations for Sem 10 4 PSYC201, 202 & 203 MATH216 Psychology MATH401 Mathematics Honours Sem 40 Independent Project FY 10 4 PSYC201 PSYC301 MATH402 Mathematics Honours Sem 40 Basic Processes in Psychology 1 Sem 10 4 PSYC201 PSYC301 Basic Processes in Psychology 2 Sem 10 4 PSYC201 PSYC301 pmLOSOPHY Advanced Social Processes Sem 10 4 PSYC201 PSYC301 PHILI01 Introduction to Philosophy FY 20 3 Advanced Applied Topics Sem 10 4 PSYC201 PSYC301 PHIL205 Locke and Berkeley Sem 10 3 PHIL101 in Psychology 1 PHIL206 Topics in Ancient, Medieval and Sem 10 3 PHIL101 (orIRES201 IRES201 (or Advanced Applied Topics Sem 10 4 PSYC201 PSYC301 Modem Philosophy as corequisite) PHIL101 as in Psychology 2 prerequisite)
J MATH208 in 1990 28 29 SECfION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIO~lgCflON THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites GROUP B SUBJECTS Number Points perwk 'Not more than 80 credit points from this Group may be counted towards the Bachelor of Arts or Bachelor of Arts(Psychology) degrees.
FY 40 Consult Department PSYC401 Psychology Honours 401 .Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Psychology Honours 402 FY 40 Consult Department PSYC402 Number Points perwk PSYC403 Psychology 403 FY 30 Consult Department Psychology 404 FY 50 Consult Department PSYC404 ;;BIOLOGY iBlOLtOl Plant and Animal Biology Sem 10 6 SOCIOLOGY ilBIOLl02 Cell Bio Genetics & Evolution Sem 10 6 SOCIOI Introduction to Sociology A Sem 10 3 ~ "- SOCI02 Introduction to Sociology B Sem 10 3 SOCIOI ~BIOL201 Biochemistry Sem 10 6 BIOLtOl & 102 BIOL202 Animal Physiology Sem 10 6 BIOLt01.& 102 S0C201 Introductory Theory Sem 10 3 SOCI01, 102 BlOL203 Population Dynamics Sem 10 6 BIOLtOl & 102 (Sociology) BIOL204 Cell & Molecular Biology Sem 10 6 BIOLtOl & 102 S0C202 Medical Systems Sem 10 3 SOCIOl, 102 BIOL205 Molecular Genetics Sem 10 6 BIOLtOl & 102 SOC203 Work in Industrial Society Sem 10 3 SOCIOl, 102 or BIOL206 Plant Physiology Sem 10 6 BIOLtOl & 102 Industrial Relations IIA SOC204 Introductory Research Sem 10 3 SOCIOl,l02 BlOL301 Cell Processes Sem 10 6 BIOL201 & one Methods and Design BIOL2oo SOC205 Introductory Theory (Social Sem 10 3 SOCIOl, 102 Reproductive Physiology Sem 10 6 TwoBIOL200 Anthropology) Environmental Plant Physiology Sem 10 TwoBIOL2oo S0C206 Politics and Public Policy Sem 10 3 SOCIOl,102 Whole Plant Development Sem 10 6 TwoBIOL2oo S0C207 Women and the Welfare State Sem 10 3 SOCIOl, 102 Immunology Sem 10 6 TwoBIOL200 SOC214 Indonesian Society and Culture Sem 10 3 SOC1Ol,102 Ecology and Evolution Sem 10 6 BIOL203 & one BIOL2oo S0C302 Research Methods in Sociology Sem 20 4 30cp at 200 level Molecular Biology of Plant Sem 10 6 Two BIOL200 incl, and Social Anthropology including SOC201 Development oneofBIOL2010r andS0C204 BIOL204 or BIOL205 S0C303 Knowledge, Ideology and Sem 20 4 30cp at 200 level BIOL3lO Microbiology Sem 10 6 BIOL201 and one Psychiatry including SOC201 other BIOL200 level S0C304 Medicine in Industrial Society Sem 20 4 20cp at 200 level subject (BIOL204 including SOC201 advisable) S0C305 Society and Culture: Sem 20 4 20cp at 200 level CHEMISTRY Thailand and Tibet CHEMI01 Chemistry 101 Sem 10 6 Sem 20 4 20cp at SOC200 level S0C306 Family and Community CHEM102 Chemistry 102 Sem 10 6 CHEM101 including SOC201 20cp at SOC200 level S0C307 Crime, Justice and the State Sem 20 4 CHEM211 Analytical Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM102 including SOC201 CHEM221 Inorganic Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM102 CHEM231 Organic Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM102 10 3 20cp at SOC 200 level S0C314 Indonesian Society and Culture Sem CHEM241 Physical Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEMI02 CHEM251 Applied Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM102 Sociology Honours FY 80 SOC401 CHEM261 Environmental Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM102 SOC402 Sociology Honours FY 40 SOC403 Sociology Honours FY 40 Analytical Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM201 Chemometrics Sem 5 3 CHEM201, MATHl02 Interdisciplinary Subjects Industrial Chemical Analysis Sem 5 3 CHEM201 IEACI01 East Asian Civilisations Sem 10 3 A quota may apply to Inorganic Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM202 this course with priority Organic Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM203 to students taking Asian Physical Chemistry Sem 10 6 CHEM204, MATH102 Languages Metal-Metal Bonding & Cluster Sem 5 3 CHEM202 Chemistry IRES201 Religious Studies II FY 20 4 40cp at 100 level Students enrolled C1:IBM323 Bioinorganic Coordination Sem 5 3 CHEM202 IRES201 may al ; Chemistry enrol in PHIL203 CHBM332 Heterocyclic Chemistry Sem 5 3 CHEM203 COMP241 Cognitive Science FY 10 2 See Engineering Handbk CHEM333 Organic Reaction Mechanisms Sem 5 3 CHEM203 ~~34 Biologically Important Molecules Sem 5 3 CHEM203 GQBM342 Electrochemical Solar Energy Sem 5 3 CHEM204, MATH102 Conversion 6b!M343 Molecular Spectroscopy Sem 5 3 CHEM204 30 31 SECfION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONSj SECflON THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIONS
Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Computer SUbject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points perwk Number Points perwk ECONOMICS MUSIC ECONI04 Introductory Quantitative FY 20 4 (Candidates may only MUSI0l Introductory Music* FY 20 5 Subject to approval, Methods count one ofIQM and 2 Unit HSC Music or Introductory Statistics Grade 4 AMEB Theory/ towards the degree) Musicianship & Practical i) an entry aggregate or equivalent at discretion equivalent to or greater of Dean of Faculty of than that required for Music. admission to the PHYSICS Bachelor of Economics PHYSI0l Physics 101 Sem 10 6 See ScienCe Faculty or Bachelor of Handbook Commerce degrees or PHYSI02 Physics 102 Sem 10 6 See Science Faculty ii) a pass in Economics Handbook IA and one other PHYSI03 Physics 103 Sem 10 6 See Science Faculty subject. Handbook
GEOLOGY PHYS201 Quantum Mechanics and Sem 10 6 MATHl03 MATH20l GEOLlOl The Environment Sem 10 6 Electromagnetics PHYSI03 (Advisory) GEOL102 Earth Materials Sem 10 6 GEOLlOl GEOLlOl PHYS202 Mechanics and Thermal Sem 10 6 MATH 102 Physics PHYS103 GEOL211 Optical Mineralogy Sem 5 3 GEOLl02 PHYS203 Solid State and Atomic Sem 10 6 PHYS201 GEOL212 Introductory Petrology Sem 10 6 GEOL211 Physics GEOL213 Ancient Environments & Organisms Sem 10 6 GEOLl02 PHYS204 Electronics and Sem 10 6 MATH 102 GEOL214 Geological Structures & Resources Sem 10 6 GEOLl02 Instrumentation PHYS102 GEOL215 Geology Field Course 215 Sem 10 14 days GEOLl02 GEOL216 Geology Field Course 216 Sem 5 7 days GEOL215 GEOL214 PHYS301 Mathematical Methods and Sem 10 6 MATH201!203 Quantum Mechanics PHYS201 GEOL311 Igneous Petrology & Crustal Sem 10 6 GEOL202 PHYS302 Electromagnetics and Sem 10 6 MATH201/pHYS201 Evolution Electronics GEOL312 Metamorphic Petrology Sem 10 6 GEOL202 PHYS303 Atomic, Molecular and Sem 10 PHYS202/203 GEOL313 Structural Geology & Geophysics Sem 10 6 GEOL204 Solid State Physics PHYS301 GEOL314 Stratigraphic Methods Sem 10 6 GEOL203 PHYS304 Statistical Physics and Sem 10 6 MATH201/PHYS202 GEOL315 Sedimentology Sem 10 6 GEOL202 & GEOL203 Relativity GEOL316 Geology of Fuels Sem 10 6 GEOL203 PHYS305 Nuclear Physics and Sem 10 6 PHYS302 GEOL317 Resource & Exploration Geology Sem 10 6 GEOL202 & GEOL204 Advanced Electromagnetics GEOL318 Geology Field Course 318 Sem 5 7 days GEOL203, 204 & one of GEOL20S, 206, 207 STATISTICS GEOL319 Geology Field Course 319 Sem 5 7 days GEOL312, GEOL313, STATlO1 Introductory Statistics Sem 10 5 GE0L317, GEOL318 STAT201 Mathematical Statistics Sem 10 4 MATHI030rSTATIOl MANAGEMENT & MATH 102 STAT202 Regression Analysis Sem 10 4 INFOlOl Introduction to Information Systems Sem 10 5 STAT2010rSTATIOl STAT203 Queues and Simulation Sem 5 2 MATHI02 INFOl02 Information Storage & Management Sem 10 5 INFOlOl STAT204 Non-parametric Statistics Sem 5 2 STAT201 or STATIOI MNGT203 Foundations of Management Sem 10 2 70cps at 100 level &MATHl02 MNGT204 Principles of Marketing Sem 10 2 70cps at 100 level
MNGT303 Behaviour in Organisations Sem 10 2 MNGT203 STAT301 Statistical Inference Sem 10 4 STAT201 &STAT202 MNGTI04 Personnel Management Sem 10 2 MNGT203 &MATH201 MNGT305 Consumer Behaviour Sem 10 2 MNGT304 STAT302 Study Design Sem 10 4 STAT201 & STAT202 MNGTI06 Marketing Research Sem 10 2 MNGT204 STAT303 Generalized Linear Models Sem 10 4 STATIOl MNGTI07 International Marketing Sem 10 2 MNGT204 Time Series Analysis Sem 10 4 STATIOl MNGTIlO Total Quality Management Sem 10 2 MNGT203 MNGTI12 Enterprise Management Sem 10 2 MNGT203 MNGTI13 Enterprise Development Sem 10 2 MNGT203 offered by the Departments in the Faculty of Engineering are available to Arts students subject to prerequisites and wbere applicable. quota may be applicable to this subject. Intending students should consult the F acully Secretary prior to enrolment or re-enrolment. 32 33 SECTION THREE BACHELOR DEGREE REGULATIO~CTION FOUR
BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK SUBJECTS
Computer Subject Name Length Credit Hours Prerequisites Corequisites Number Points perwk
SWK101 Introduction to Social Work FY 20 Nil Nil
SWK201 Social Work Theory 1 FY 20 SWK101 * SWK202, SWK203 SWK202 Social Work Practice 1 FY 20 SWKI0l* SWK201 , SWK203 i SWK203 Field Education 1 FY 20 SWK101 * SWK201, SWK202'
SWK301 Social Work Theory 2 FY 20 SWK201 SWK302,SWK303; SWK302 Social Work Practice 2 FY 20 SWK202 SWK301, SWK303 SWK303 Field Education 2 FY 20 SWK203 SWK301, SWK302:;
SWK401 Social Work Theory 3 FY 20 SWK301 SWK402, SWK403~ SWK402 Social Work Practice 3 FY 20 SWK302 SWK401, SWK403 ~ SWK403 Field Education 3 FY 20 SWK303 SWK401,
LAWIOI Foundations of Law Sem 10 Nil** Nil
Students should note that there are subjects offered by the Faculty of Arts that students enrolled in the Bachelor of Social Work degree may undertake. Refer to the Bachelor of Social Work Course Programme in Section 4. DESCRIPTIONS
Classics Subject Descriptions
.IIDIEict(luumes and reading lists are set out in a standard format The Department offers undergraduate subjects in several quite reference. An explanation of some of the technical distinct disciplines: Oassical Civilisation, Oassical literature in used in this Handbook is given below. Translation, Ancient Greek, Latin, and Sanskrit. At Honours level there are courses on offer in Classical Studies (combinations of at r.ren!qUisites are subjects which must be passed before a least two of the above disciplines), Greek, and Latin. At present ~ndi.liIate may enrol in a particular subject. The only Prerequisites there is no Honours course in Sanskrit for topics are any topics or subjects which must be taken enrolling in the particular topic. To enrol in any subject of CLASSICAL CIVILISATION the topic may be part, the ~uisites for that subject Slill be satisfied. 100 LEVEL . a Prerequisite for a subject is marked "(advisory)", it A full-year course which treats the Greek and Roman origins of . to a pall in the Higher School Certificate. In such cases we&tem literature, thought, and political organisation. Intportant subject will be given on the assumption that a pass aspeds of each civilisationare examined through topics in classical been achieved at the level indicated. history, literature, values and thought. refer t() Sl2bjects or topics which must be taken ~llCUltrerltly, unless already completed. CLASIOl} CLASSICAL CIVILISATION (I): 20cp ....lti.n. Thelegislatioo defines "examination" as including CLASI02} GREEK AND ROMAN CIVILISAnON .ltd-1~1!aI eJGHniinaliorls, assignments, tests or any other work by Offered Semester 1 & 2 grade of acandidalein a subject is assessed. Some Prerequisite Nil made toindicateforeach subject how assessment ~ed. Hours 4 lecture hours per week and a regular tutorial essential books rewmmendedfO£purcbase by students . Ex6minalion Examination papers plus progre£Sive assessment Greek Civilisation will be treated in the first semester, Roman in the • :.rerenftll aM books whiclrllleJelevaftt to the subject or topic, whidt need not be purchased .. sec:ond ISsoaatedwitheachsubjectareshowntothe The course will be taught in pua11e1 strands: the subject description and are abbreviated to "cp". (a) Historical and political issues (b) Literary and related issues * May be replaced by a corequisite SWK204 - Social Work Special Project for students with advanced standing for the rest of year. **Either HSC aggregate required for Bachelor of Commerce QK total of40 credit points prior to enrolment in this subject. 34 35 S~E~CT~IO~N~FO~UR~ ______~C~LA~S~S~ICS~~SU~B~ffi~CT~D~E~SC~R~W~TI~O~~E~cr~I~O~N;F~O~UR~==~~~~ ______~C~LA~S~S~ICS~~SU~B~ffi~CT~D~E~S~CRW~~TI~O~N~S CLAS101 GREEK CIVILISATION lOcp CLASSICAL CIVILISATION ~ ~~ ~~ Hours 2 lecture hours per week and a regular tutorial Social Conflicts in the Roman Republic (Chatto & WinduJ; (i) Early Greek history to 510 BC; the Fifth Century to 404 BC ~A series of units offered as semester length and full-year courses Examination Examination paper plus progressive assessment (ii) Homer's Iliad, Greek Tragedy, Greek Old Comedy or which provide detailed treatments of major aspects of Greek and Content Crawford, M. ,Roman civilisation. In each of these units considerable emphasis Detailed treatment of critical themes and episodes in two key eras (iii) Greek Thought and Values The Roman Republic (Fontana) .willbe placed uponthe use of ancient source materialsin translation of Greek history: Texts or any year the units on offer will be those dealing with the (i) The Delian League and Periclean era History Scullard, H.H.2 GREECE or ROME: the other will be treated (ii) The era from the end ofthePeloponnesian War to the Battle of Fine, J.V.A.I From the Gracchi to Nero (V.P.) jnthefolliowingyesil'. Some optional units may beoffered onamore 'Irn.aular bl8Si:s de:pel1ditlg llpon student demand and staff aVailability. Chaeroneia (338 B.C.) The Ancient Greeks (Belknap) Jones, AH.M. Texts or Augustus (Chatto & Windus) ~u."""lirf:ments for Progression (i) The Delian League and Periclean Era Burn, AR Plutarch 200 level unit has its own prerequisite and may be taken The Pelican History ofGreece (penguin) The Fall of the Roman Republic (penguin) lIindependlently of other units by eligible students. Fine, lV.A The Ancient Greeks (Belknap) Plutarch Uterature students who wish to complete a sequence of Classical Rise and Fall ofAthens (penguin) iOivillisation at 200 level which will enable them to progress to 300 or Horace should take note of the following conditions: Thucydides The Complete Odes and Epodes (penguin) Hornblower, S. The Peloponnesian War (penguin) The minimum requirement is 30 credit points, to be made up of The Greek World: 479-323 B.C. (V.P.) livy (3) units, each worth 10 credit points. Literature The Early History ofRome (penguin) Plutarch Aeschylus Students are to complete TWO semester length units, including The Rise and Fall ofAthens (penguin) Plautus Core Semester units: The Oresteia (tr. M. C. Ewans, Department of Drama) Pot ofGold and other Plo.ys (penguin) Thucydides IEithelrCI,AS:2UI GREEK HISTORY The Peloponnesian War (penguin) Aristophanes Virgil The Wasps and Other Plo.ys (Penguin) The Aeneid (tr. C. Day Lewis)(Oxford UP) (ii) The Fourth Century Homer Values One unit must be CLAS241 Classics Special Study: Values, or Hornblower, S. The Iliad(tr. Richmond Lattimore)(Chicago U.P.) equivalent H this course is being/has been counted towards The Greek World: 479-323 B.C. (V.P.) Texts Supplied by the Department reg. CLASSICAL LITERATURE IN or or The Iliad (tr. R Fitzgerald)( Oxford) 2ThistextwillproveofusetostudentsintendingtoreadCklssi..11U~~'U~TION 200, pre 1990 GREEK ITA, or LATIN ITA], Fine, lV.A. [For use at Central Coast Campus] Civilisation 2001300 level. are to select ONE of the CLAS242-245 HISTORIO- The Ancient Greeks (Belknap) Sophocles References Ellis, J.R. and Milns, R.D. Electra and Other Plo.ys (Penguin) Brunt, P.A. & Moore, J.M. The Spectre ofPhilip (Sydney U.P.) Euripides Res Gestae Divi Augusti (Oxford) Core Semester Units [3 lecture hours per week] Xenophon Medea and Other Plo.ys (penguin) Plutarch GREEK HISTORY [Central Coast Campus only] A History ofMy Times (penguin) Makers ofRome (Penguin) CLAS203 ROMAN HISTORY Values and Thought References Dio 2. Semester Options [3 lecture hours per week] Texts Supplied by the Department The Roman History (Penguin) Aristotle CLAS202 GREEK SOCIETY The Athenian Constitution (Penguin) References Special Note: ROMAN SOCIETY Bowra,C.M. Finley, M.I. Students who intend to undertake a major sequence in Periclean Athens (penguin) The World ofOdysseus (penguin) Civilisation are advised to consider purchasing the ROMAN BRITAIN AND ANGLO-SAXON ENGLAND Davies, J.K. Murray,O. reference works: J.Core Full-Year Unit [1 lecture hour per week] Democracy and Clo.ssical Greece (Fontana) Early Greece (Fontana) Greece CLAS241 CLASSICS SPECIAL STUDY: VALUES Fitzhardinge, L.P. IStudents intending to read Clo.ssical Civilisation 200 or 300 level Crawford, M. & Whitehead, D. The Spartans (Thames & Hudson) are advised to acquire this text, which is set for both courses. Archaic and Clo.ssical Greece (Cambridge) 4,FuII-Year Options [llecture hour per week] Fornara, C.W. (ed) Ferguson, J. & Chisholm, K. (iii) under Requirements, above] Archaic Times to the End of the Peloponnesian War CLAS102 ROMAN CIVILISATION lOcp Political and Social Life in the Great Age ofAthens CLAS242 - CLAS245 - HISTORIOGRAPHY I - IV (Cambridge) Contents Lock Educational) Harding, P.(ed) Rome No student who has passed any 2OO{300 course as a 200 (i) Roman History from the foundation of the Republic to the death subject may attempt it as a 300 level subject or vice versa FromtheEnd ofthe Peloponnesian War to the Battle ofIps us of Augustus (14 AD) Chisholm, K. and Ferguson, J. (Cambridge) Rome: The Augustan Age (Oxford) (ii) Plautus' Comedies, Augustan literature (Virgil's Aeneid, CLASSICAL CIVILISATION (II): lOcp Plutarch Horace's Odes,livy) Lewis, N. and Reinhold, M. GREEK HISTORY (Core) On Sparta ed R.J.A. Talbert (penguin) (iii) Roman Values Roman Civilisation. Sourcebook I: The Republic Powell,A. History Howatson, M.C. (ed) Athens and Sparta (Routledge) The Oxford Companion to Clo.ssical Literature Classical Civilisation I; or History I, or (Oxford) CLASI 01-1 02; or 10 cps at History 1()() level
'36 37 SECfION FOUR ClASSICS SUBJECf DESCRll'TIO~1!;~cr~IO!!N~F~O~UR~ ______-,C",lA=S",Sco::ICS=-:S"-OU,-=,B=-JE""Cf::::.O-D::::E""S"-,C~Rll'=-TI=O:!..:N",,S
CLAS202 CLASSICAL CIVILISATION (11): lOcp Marsh, F.B. teferences GREEK SOCIETY (Option) History of the Roman World: 146-30 B.C. (V.P.) , CLASSICAL CIVILISATION tarooPino, J. Not offered in 1991 or . Daily Life in Ancient Rome (penguin) 300 LEVEL Prerequisite Oassical Civilisation I; or History I, or Scullard, H.H. towell, F.R A series of units offered as semester length and full-year courses CLAS101-102; or 10 cps at History From the Gracchi to Nero (V.P.) t Cicero and the Roman Republic (Penguin) which provide detailed treatments of major aspects of Greek and 100 level (ii) Early Imperial History Iludley, D. Roman civilisation. In each of these units considerable emphasis will be placed upon the use of ancient source materials in IIanslation. Hours 2 lecture hours per week and a regular tutorial Salmon, E.T. r Roman Society (Penguin) History of the Roman World: 30B.C. to A.D. 138 (V.P.) Lmvie, RM. . In any year the units on offer will be those dealing with the Examination Examination paper plus progressive assessment civilisation of either GREECE or ROME: the other will be treated Suetonius ~ The Romans (pengum) Content J in the following year. Some optional units may be offered on a more The Twelve Caesars (Penguin) Lsritvie, RM. An exploration of a wide variety of facets of Greek social life and regular basis depending upon student demand and staff aVailability. Tacitus ,- The Romans and Their Gods (Chatto & Windus) civilisation in the Fifthand Fourth Centuries B.C. Among the topics Requirements will be - Art; Religion; Philosophy and Thought; Status of Women, The Complete Works ofTacitus (Modem Library) j i.LAS205 CLASSICAL CIVILISATION (II): lOcp Each 300 level unit has its own prerequisite and may be taken Children and Slaves; Economics; Politics; Education and Sport. References I ROMAN BRITAIN AND ANGLO- independently of other units by eligible students. Texts Cicero j' SAXON ENGLAND (Option) Students wishing to complete a major sequence of Oassical Ferguson, J.E. and Chisholm, K. Selected Political Speeches (penguin) 'rerequisites Oassical Civilisation I; or History I, Civilisation at 300 level should takenoteofthefollowing conditions: Political and Social Life in the Great Age ofAthens (Ward Lewis, N. & Reinhold, M CLAS101-102; or 10 cps at History 100 level (i) The minimum requirement is 40 credit points, made up of FOUR Lock International) Roman Civilization. Sourcebook I: The Republic (Harper) ours 2 lecture hours per week and a regular tutorial (4) units, each worth 10 points Finley, M.I.Economy and Society in Ancient Greece (penguin) Roman Civilization. Sourcebook ll: The Empire (Harper) Plutarch .Jlllnllination Examination paper plus progressive assessment (ii) Students are to complete at least TWO (2) semester-length References units:- Fall of the Roman Republic (penguin) ontent Andrewes, A. (a) ONE of these MUST be a Core Semester Unit:- e course covers the period from the arrival of Caesar in Britain Greek Society (penguin) Plutarch Makers ofRome (penguin) 55 B.C. to the era of Alfred the Great in the Ninth Century. The Either CLAS301 GREEK HISTORY or CLAS303 ROMAN Kitto, H.D.F. ajor topics include; the period of conquest, Caesar to Domitian; HISTORY Sallust The Greeks (penguin) enting the frontier, Trajan to Severns; Roman government in lugurthine War/Conspiracy ofCatiline (penguin) (b) At least ONE and no more than TWO can be chosen from the Powell,A. ritain; Constantine to 410; the end of Roman Britain and the optional Semester-Length Units: Wells, C. emus Saxonum; the Anglo-Saxon conquest; the Gregorian Athens and Sparta (Routledge) CLAS302 GREEK SOCIE1Y The Roman Empire (Fontana) . sionto the Fnglishand the spread ofChristianity; Englandinthe Swaddling, J. eventh Century; the kingdom of Northumbria and the Supremacy CLAS304 ROMAN SOCIETY The Ancient Olympic Games (British Museum) CLAS204 CLASSICAL CIVILISATION (II): f Mercia; the Danes; Alfred the Great. CLAS305 ROMAN BRITAIN & ANGLO-SAXON ROMAN SOCIETY (Option) CLAS203 CLASSICAL CIVILISATION (II): lOcp ithin these topic studies attention will be paid, where appropriate, ENGLAND ROMAN HISTORY (Core) Offered Semester II military, political and administrative, religious and social issues. (iii) Students are to complete at least ONEofthe Optional Full-Year nsiderable emphasis will be placed upon the use of original Offered Semester I Prerequisites Oassical Civilisation I; or History I, Studies: materials in translation. Prerequisite Oassical Civilisation I; or History I, or CLASI0I-I02; or 10 cps at History 100 level CLAS311 Alexander the Great - Augustus CLASI0I-I02; or 10 cps at History 100 level Hours 2 lecture hours per week and a regular tutorial CLAS312 Art - Greek; Etruscan and Roman Examination Examination paper plus progressive assessment When both are on offer, students may elect to count both towards Hours 2 lecture hours per week and a regular tutorial A History of the English Church and People (penguin) Content a major sequence. Examination Examination paper plus progressive assessment . er,DJ.V. (iv) Full-Year Classics Special Study Options in Historiography. Content Exploration of various aspects of Roman social life and civilisati The Anglo-Saxon Age c 400-1042 (Longman) in the Late Republican and Early Imperial eras. Among the Students electing to read ONE study from '(ii) (b), and ONE from and,S. Detailed treatment of critical themes and episodes in two key eras of topics will be:- Roman Art; Social Status of Women, Children (iii), may elect to read ONE of the Classics Historiography Special Roman Britain: A Sourcebook (Croom Helm) Roman History: Slaves; Religion; Roman Law; Political and Ethical Philosoph Studies and count it towards amajorsequenceat Oassical Civilisation (i) The Late Republic. the Roman Economy and the Provinces; Frontier Policy; eferences 300 level. Topics include - Constitutional and Judicial Crises; Military Games. ,S. NB: No student who has passed any 200/300 course as a 200 level Revolution - Sulla, Lepidus, Catilina, and Caesar; The Italian Texts Britannia (Routledge) subject may attempt it as a 300 level subject or vice versa Question; Slavery and the Rebellion of Spartacus; The Fall of the Cicero onsway, G.N. (ed) The following prerequisite applies to all Oassical Civilisati0l13oo Republic Selected Works (penguin) The Anglo-Saxon Chronicle (Dent-Dutton) level units: (ii) Early Imperial History. Lewis, N. and Reinhold, M. eynes, S. and Lapidge, M. (eds) Prerequisite A study of the period from Tiberius to Domitian Roman Civilization. Sourcebook I: The Republic (H Alfred the Great: Asser's Life of Alfred and other 1991 - A 30 cps sequence of Oassical Civilisation 200, which Contemporary Sources (penguin) Texts Roman Civilization. Sourcebook ll. The Empire (Harper) MUST include either CLAS201 or CLAS203, plus CLAS241; 30 ·cIunond,I.A. cps at History 200 level enables entry to individual units. (i) The Late RepUblic Seneca Letters From a Stoic (penguin) Roman Britain (penguin) NB: In respect of subject descriptions, CLAS301-305 are the same Lacey, W.K.C. and Wilson, B.W.J.G. ~b, J.F. & Farmer, D.H. (eds) as CLAS201-205. Res Publica. Roman Politics and Society According to Martial , The Age ofBede (penguin) Cicero (Oxford) On The Spectacles (tr. T J. Ryan)(Department of Oassi
38 39 SECfION FOUR CLASSICS DESCRIPTIONS
The Optional Studies available at 300 level are: image (via legislation, the literati, coinage, religion, arcihiteclUJtLASSll:AL LITERATURE IN TRANSLATION CLAS231 CLASS. LIT.: lOcp public works) will be treated GREEK AND ROMAN EPIC CLAS311 CLASS CIV {III): OPTION I lOcp Texts series of units offered as semester-length and full-year courses Content ALEXANDER THE GREAT Brunt, P.A. and Moore, I.M. provide in-depth treatment of major authors and literary A survey of the origins of Classical Epic; the Iliad and Odyssey of AUGUSTUS Res Gestae Divi Augusti (Oxford) from the classical Greek and Roman periods. Homer; the Aeneid of Virgil. Offered Full-Year Dio Ibrou2hclut E~ of these units, the writers will be examined solely Texts Hours 1 hour per week The Roman History: The Reign ofAugustus (penguin) point of view of literature and not as source materials for Homer IaJrtiCillaI historical or related cultural studies. ExaminoJion Examination paper plus progressive assessment Jones, A.H.M. The Iliad (tr. R Lattimore, Chicago) availability and student demand will influence the range of i) Alexander the Great Augustus (Chatto & Windus) Homer on offer in any given year. The Odyssey (tr. R Lattimore, Harper) Content Suetonius The Twelve Caesars (penguin) Virgil The aim of this course is to come to an appreciation of the problems 200 level unit has its own prerequisite and may be taken The Aeneid (tr. C. Day Lewis, Oxford) involved in defining Alexander the Great. The adopted approach References 1n,llepenclenl1y of other units by eligible students. throughout will be acombination of historical and historiographical Chisholm, K and Ferguson, J. References elements, which will allow a balance between use of the main Rome: The Augustan Age (Oxford) students wishing to complete a sequence of Classics 200 Griffin,I. which will enable them to progress to 300 level, should take Alexander sources for historical information and an evaluation of Walker, S and Burnett, A Homer (OUP) of the following conditions: the methods and biases of these authors, particularly Anian and The Image ofAugustus (British Museum) Griffin, J. Curtius. The minimum requirement is 30 credit points, to be made up of Homer: The Odyssey (Cambridge) Part One: units, each worth 10 credit points CLAS312 CLASS. CIV. {III): OPTION II: Silk, M. A survey of the historical Alexander. These lectures will examine GREEK, ETRUSCAN & ROMAN ART Students are to attempt TWO semester-length units Homer: The Iliad (Cambridge) three aspects: Alexanderthe General, Alexanderthe Statesman and Offered Full-Year One unit MUST be CLAS241 Classics Special Study: Values Camps, W.A. the Personality of Alexander. its equivalent. If this course is being/has been counted towards Hours 2 hours per week An Introduction to Virgil's Aeneid (Oxford) Part Two: sequence [e.g. CLASSICAL ClVlLISAnON IIA or 200 ExaminoJion Examination paper plus progressive assessment 990 GREEK I1A, or LATIN I1A] students are to select A survey of the historiography of Alexander: The Image Makers. CLAS232 CLASS. LIT.: lOcp theL:L.A~;:l4:l-JJ'J:l mSTORIOGRAPHY full-year options These lectures will discuss the sources available to our extant Content GREEK AND ROMAN COMEDY historians and their worth. Concentration will focus on Anian and Semester I: GREEK ART Not offered in 1991 Curtius, as representatives respectively of the 'Greek' and 'Roman' The course aims to give an elementary knowledge nft'Iv>}".t,OTV"·- Content View. development of Greek Art from the Minoans to the beginning .... SeJml!!lter-lA~lIl!1tb Units [2lecturehours plus a text analysis hour A survey of the origins of Greek Comedy; Old and New Greek Texts Hellenistic period, with special emphasis on the sculpture of Comedy; the origins ofItalian Comedy; Roman Comedy in the 2nd Anian Archaic and Oassical periods, particularly the Periclean Age. ....J..,I1.,"'H Century B.C. The Campaigns ofAlexander (Penguin) The course will be illustrated with slides and videos. Texts Quintus Curtius Rufus Texts Aristophanes The History ofAlexander (penguin) Higgins,R Wasps and Other Plays (Penguin) Plutarch Minoan and Mycenaean Art (Thames & Hudson, Lysistrata and Other Plays (Penguin) Age ofAlexander (Penguin) Art Series) No student who has passed any 2OO{300 course as a 200 level Birds and Other Plays (penguin) Justin Boardman, J. may attempt it as a 300 level subject or vice versa Philippica XI-XII (tr. T.I. Ryan Department of Classics) Greek Art (Thames & Hudson, World of Art Series) Menander Plays and Fragments (Penguin) References Reference conditions applying to CLAS231 to 239 inclusive are as Plautus Bosworth, A.B. Robertson, M. Pot ofGold and Other Plays (Penguin) Conquest and Empire: The Reign of Alexander the Great A Shorter History ofGreek Art (C.U.P.) .follows: The Rope and Other Plays (Penguin) (Cambridge) Semester ll: EfRUSCAN AND ROMAN ART Terence ii) Augustus A survey of the history of Etruscan and Roman Art, or CLAS15l/155 (Greek); or CLAS161/l65 The Comedies (penguin) Content architecture, sculpture, painting, mosaic and minor arts from or 20cps at English 100 Level B.C. to 200 A.D., with special emphasis on the Augustan A21.Jq"th.'1'3 lecture hours week plus 1 text analysis hour* per week Following an examination of the career of Gaius Julius Caesar, 2 per CLAS233 CLASS. LIT.: lOcp laying particular emphasis upon his family heritage, his conception The course will be illustrated with slides Examination paper plus progressive assessment GREEK AND ROMAN ORATORY ofdignilas, involvement in the state religion, as well as the political Texts Content methods employed and the precedents set by him (and Pompeius Magnus) in the period 59 to 44 B.C., there will be an in depth Brendel,O. this hour each week students will be required to treat selected A detailed treatment of the elements and practice of Oratory in the treatment of his heir, Augustus, focussing upon his emergence to a Etruscan Art (pelican History of Art) ~~fr(»nt~ne~ant,autj~~vr~~~pm~~sis.These~g~ Greek world from earliest examples to the era of Demosthenes; the position of prominence [44 to 43 B.C.l, then pre-eminence [to 30 Henig, M. (ed) in translation, occasionally with key terms left in the development of Oratory at Rome, with special reference to the B.C.l, and, finally, to Principate [28 B.C. onwardsl. A Handbook ofRoman Art (Phaidon Press) separate hour will be arranged for students with GREEK works of Cicero. LATIN to treat the material in the original. IssuessuchastheCaesarianlegacy,the'Maecenas-AgrippaDebate', the evolution of aIadical form of government, the cultivation of an
40 41 FOUR
Texts Texts CLASS. LIT. : lOcp Euripides CLASSICAL ETHICAL AUTHORS Hippolytus (tr. R. Warner) Saunders, AN.W. (ed) Aesop Greelc Political OraJory (penguin) The Fables ofAesop (penguin) Racine Phaedra and other plays (tr. Cairncross)(penguin) Warrington J. (00) Apollonius Shakespeare Demosthenes' Public Orations (Everyman) Voyage ofArgo (Penguin) evolution of classical ethical thought from Socrates. to Cicero. Hamlet (Signet) Cicero Apuleius b:mpllifit~ in notable works of Plato, Aristotle. and CIcero. Murder Trials (Penguin) The Golden Ass (penguin) Buchner Woyzeck (tr. M. Ewans)(peter Lang) Selected Political Speeches (penguin) Longus Daphnis and Chloe (Penguin) Ibsen The Master Builder (tr. M. Meyer) CLAS234 CLASS. LIT. : ROMAN SATIRE lOcp Ovid Metomorphoses (Penguin) Janacek Content Jenufa in Opera Guide 33 (Calder) The origins of Satire at Rome into the 2nd Century B.e.: the major Petronius and Seneca Protagoras and Meno (penguin) References Roman satirists - Horace, Juvenal and Imperial Satire. The Satyricon. Apocolocyntosis (Penguin) Aristotle Texts CLAS237 CLASS. LIT.: On The Good Life (Penguin) On the Art of Poetry in Classical Literacy Criticism Horace THE GREEK THEATRE (penguin) SaJires and Epistles (Penguin) Not offered in 1991 Ewans.M. CLASS. LIT. : lOcp Juvenal NB:This course is the same lecture course as DRAM201 Janacek's Tragic Operas The Sixteen Satires (penguin) CLASSICAL LITERARY CRITICISM Content Nietzsche. F. Martial The Birth of Tragedy from the Spirit of Music The Epigrams (Penguin) This course offers anintroduction to the Athenianfestival_u... ul ...... _ ••,Mt the fifth century B.C. TIris is the earliest drama in western Steiner. G. examination of the major literary critics of the ancient world, Reference It is also the source of our conception of tragedy an Topics covered will include the festival and the playing space. _AlII.... '. T.S. (00). 300 LEVEL CLAS235 CLASS. LIT.: EROTIC POETRY lOcp plays and the playwrights, the chorus and the ading style, Aristotle. Horace. Longinus (Penguin) See entry for 200 level for general description Not offelWl1991 of the drama and its influence on subsequent developments Requirtllnents theatre. The exploration will be framed around Aischylos' '~'---"---- Content The Oresteia. Sopholdes' Oidipous the King. Euripides' Each 300 level unit has it own prerequisite and may be taken The origins of Erotic Lyric in the Greek woddin the ageofSappho and Aristophanes' The Frogs and The Poet and the W"mp.lefi!relllCes independently of other units by eligible students. and Alcaeus will be treated by way of introduction to the major modem works studied in the concluding weeks will include G.MA. Students wishing to completeamajorsequenceofClassicalLi.terature erotic writerS at Rome. Catu1lus. Propertius andOvid. Mlmkr in the Cathedral and Sttauss' Elektra. The Greelc and Roman Critics (UP) in Translation 300 level units should take note of the following Tex1s The classes will consist of a combination of lectures, D.A. and WinteIbottom, M.(eds) conditions: Catullus practical workshop sessions and viewing of prodiIctions on Ancient Literary Criticism (Oxford) (i) The minimum requirement is 40 credit points. made up of FOUR TI¥ POMrIS (tr. T.J. Ryan. Department of Qassics) Texts (4) units. each worth 10 credit points. COMPARATIVE TRAGEDY lOcp Ovid Aischylos (ii) At least TWO of these units must be semester-length, cllosen TI¥ Erotic Poems (Penguin) Oresteia (tr. M.e. Ewans)(supplied by the Department) from the range of CLAS331-CLAS339 studies on offer. P!opertius Aristophanes .Jr'rtll"efll 42 43 SECfION FOUR CLASSICS SUBJECf FOUR CLASSICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS CLASSICS SPECIAL STUDIES (b) 300 Level CLASl5l GREEK (I): ELEMENTARY 20cp These constitute a series of Full-Year units designed for students 1990 Oassica1 Civilisation ITA; Classics IIB; or any History Ifelrod()tus Offered Full-Year enrolled in a sequence at 200-300 level Classical Civilisation and! subject The Histories (Penguin) Prerequisite Nil or Classical Literature in Translation Eachis worth 10 credit points 1991 30 cps at Oassical Civilisation 200 level; \...UI>;SlatlLllernlQA.'nM"nO Hours 5 hours per week and consists of one lecture hour per week. The units may also be in Translation 200 level; or History 200 level studied independently by students who meet the Prerequisites. Examination Examination papers plus progressive assessment Hours 1 lecture hour per week Content Examination Examination paper plus progressive assessment 1. 200LEVEL Students are intrOduced to the study of Ancient Greek in an Each of the four Historiography Studies sets out to study Herodotus and Greek History (Croom Helm) intensive course of gmmmatical instruction and reading in the CLAS24l CLASSICS SPECIAL STUDY (II): lOcp purpose in writing, and the artistic qualities of major historians UUlhellllrio. H. W. original language. VALUES the Greek 'and Roman worlds, as well as the insights they An Introduction to Tacitus (Georgia) Text To be advised NB: This is a core course for students of Oassical Civilisation 200 as individual historians, to the nature of an(:ieIllt hiisto'riOigra:ph~'. II level and/or Oassical LiteIature in Translation 200 level. Students each study, a Greek and a Roman historian will be treated, CLASSICS SPECIAL STUDY (II): lOcp CLASl55 GREEK (I): ADVANCED 20cp reading both courses simultaneously ,aretocountCLAS241 towards becanse of a commonality of method, scope, or theme. HISTORIOGRAPHY ill - Offered Full-Year the Civilisation course. References POLYBIUS AND LIVY Prerequisite HSC Ancient Greek or Equivalent Offered Full Year While each of the studies has its own set texts and, QC(:asionallfifXIs Prerequisite Oassical Civilisation I, CLAS 101-102 specific references, the following works provide a gerlerll>ii1'vbills Hours 3 hours per week Hours 1 hour per week background to the nature of Greek and Roman His:toriioglraplW The Rise ofthe Roman Empire (Penguin) ExamiMlion Examination papers plus progressive assessment will prove of use to students reading any of the options. ExamiMlion Progressive assessment Content Laislner, M.L.W. The Early History ofRome (Penguin) Students are required to undertake an intensive course in Greek Content The Greater Roman Historians (California) language (1 hr pw) as well as the reading of two prescribed texts (2 A study of the key value terms and concepts of the Greeks and Usher,S. War with Hannibal (Penguin) hrspw) Romansthrough theuseof original terminology set within translated The Historians ofGreece and Rome (UP) Texts contexts. CLASSICS SPECIAL STUDY: lOcp Texts CLAS242 CLASSICS SPECIAL STUDY: HISTORIOGRAPHY IV • Thucydides Book I ed E. Marchant with a new introduction by T. Ewans,M.C. HISTORIOGRAPHY I • ARRIAN & QUINTUS CURTIUS RUFUS Wiedemann (Bristol Oassical Press) Greek Values and Society (Department of Classics) THUCYDIDES AND SALLUST Curran, B.F. Texts Aesdlylus Prometheus Bound ed M. Griffith(Cambridge U.P.) Roman Values (Department of Classics) Thucydides ~JeJtander the Great became the focus of attention for a great References References The Peloponnesian War (Penguin) writers in antiquity, both Greek and Roman. Two of Liddell, H.G.and Scott, R. Adcock, F.E. Sallust .\IlSC~,Alrian 81ld C:urlius Rufus, represent quite differing views and A Greek-English Lexicon. (New edn by Jones, H.S. and Roman Political Ideas and Practice (Ann AIbor) Jugurthine War/Conspiracy ofCatiline (penguin) .telhods in their treatment of AleJtander, no( to mention a widely .ivlll'J~t purpose in writing. Despite their preoccupation with McKenzie, R, with Supplement Oarendon, 1968) Adkins, A.W.H. References .UeJUlnI:ler, they are rightly described as historians rather than Smyth,H.w. Moral Values and Political Behaviour in Ancient Greece Hornblower, S. .li.ograpl~ers on account of their theme - the campaigns and Greek Grammar, (revised edn Harvard U.P., 1963) & (Chatto Windus) Thucydides (Duckworth) .8d1i.l~velrnerlts of Alexander - and their methodology. Raven,D.S. Hesiod Greek Metre: an Introduction, (2nd edn Faber, 1968) Hesiod and Theognis (penguin) CLAS243 CLASSICS SPECIAL STUDY: HISTORIOGRAPHY IT • Rosenmeyer, T.G. and Ostwald, M. et al EarI,D.C. HERODOTUS AND TACITUS The Campaigns ofAlexander (penguin) TheMetersofGreekandLatinPoetry(Bobbs-Merrill,1963) The Moral and Political Tradition of Rome (Thames & Hudson) Not offered in 1991 .ClliJ~s CUItius Rufus West,ML Content The History ofAlexander (Penguin) GreekMetre (Oarendon, 1982) CLASSICS SPECIAL HISTORIOGRAPHY STUDIES Herodotus is unquestionably the 'Father' of' 8Il(:ieIJlthistOltiOl!~.()J..A.sJ.'2 • CLAS 345 _ See CLAS242 - CLAS245 200 AND 300 LEVEL The epic scope of his treatment of the conflict between the 200 LEVEL NB: No student who has passed any 200/300 course as a 200 level and the Persians, the encyclopaedic nature ofluSIesearclhes" an' At this level the Department offers two full-year units in Ancient subject may attempt it as a 300 level subject or vice versa. remarkable impartiality of his presentation constitute the Greek. To progress to 300 level, students must pass in both units. for measuring all subsequent historians in the ancient world. The conditions applying to CLAS242/342to 245/345 inclusive are :JJe1~melnt offers TWO Full-Year Courses in Greek at 100 as follows:- Tacitus is, arguably, the finest practitioner in CLAS25l·2 GREEK (II): TEXT & 20cp 'psychological' historiography. His works are permelned SYNTAX Offered Full Year theme of the study ofllO\\leromd.its ,em~ts:upon IJOlllruler:andltll GREEK (I): ELEMENTARY is for students who Offered Full-Year Prerequisites (a) 200 Level The evolution of this theme - and related themes and issues - passed HSC Ancient Greek or its equivalent Prerequisite GreeklorCLAS151orCLAS155 1990 Classical Civilisation ITA; CLassics IIB; or any History II traced from his earliest work of history, the Agricola, GREEK (I): ADVANCED is for students who have subject crowning achievement, theAnnaIs. Greek or its equivalent. Hours 3 hours per week 1991 CLAS101-102; 10 cps at History 100 level ExamiMlion Examination papers plus progressive assessment 44 45 SECfION FOUR CLASSICS SUBJECf FOUR CLASSICS SUBJECf DESCRll'TIONS Content Content CLAS263 LATIN (11): SPECIAL STUDY lOcp Students are required to undertake a course in Greeklanguage (1 hr Students are required to undertake a course in Greeklanguage (1 are introduced to the study of Latin in an intensive course Offered Full-Year pw) and read two prescribed texts (2 hrs pw) pw) and read two prescribed texts (2 hrs pw) grammatical instruction and reading in the original language. Corequisite CLAS261-262 Texts and References As for CLAS155 TextandReferences AsforCLAS155 Hours 1 hour per week G.G. Examination Examination papers plus progressive assessment CLAS253 GREEK (II): SPECIAL STUDY lOcp CLAS353 GREEK (III): PALAEOGRAPHY Teach Yourself Latin (Hodder and Stoughton) Content Offered Full-Year AND TEXT STUDY (a) Students will be required to read, in conjunction with those Corequisite CLAS251-252 Offered Full-Year 1WI!ee1~:X:K, F.M. enrolled in CLAS363, a special author study (1 hr pw, for 1 Hours 1 hour per week Corequisite CLAS351-352 Latin: An Introductory Course (Bames & Noble) semester); and Examination Examination papers plus progressive assessment Hours 1 hour per week LATIN (I): ADVANCED 20cp (b) (i) Students will be required to read a course in Roman Values, Content Examination Examination papers plus progressive assessment in conjunction with those enrolled in CLAS241 (1 hr pw, for 1 semester). (a) Students will be required to read, in conjunction with those Content IPr,eret,ruisitle HSC Latin or Equivalent enrolled in CLAS353, a special author study (1 hr pw, for 1 (a) Students will be required to read a special author study (1 hr or semester); and (ii)Students, who haveread/arecurrently readingthe full CLAS241 (b)StudentswillberequiredtoreadacourseinGn~kPal,aeograplf (b) (i) Students will be required to read a course in Greek Values, (1 hr pw). IEwmlination Examination papers plus progressive assessment Values course, in lieu of (b) (i) will be required to read the Latin Palaeography study as for CLAS363 (b) (1 hr pw for 1 semester). in conjunction with those enrolled in CLAS241 (1 hr pw, for 1 Texts semester). Texts For (a) IStudclilts are required to undertake an intensive course in Latin or Ilanguage (1 hr pw) as well as the reading of two prescribed texts (2 For (a) As for CLAS253 (a) (ii)Students, who have read/are currently reading thefull CLAS241 Horace For (b) Values course, in lieu of (b) (i) will be required to read the Greek Selected Satires (available from Department) PaIaeography study as for CLAS353 (b) (1 hr pw for 1 semester). All materials will be supplied by the Department. For (b)(i) Texts Bellum Catilinae ed J. T. Rarnsey(Scholars Press) Curran, B.F. For (a) CLAS354 GREEK (111): SPECIAL AUTHOR Roman Values (Department of Classics) STUDY Pindar De Rerum Nature I ed P.M. Brown(Bristol Oassical Press) For (b)(ii) Selected Odes (available from Department) Offered Full-Year Materials supplied by the Department Corequisite CLAS351-352 For (b)(i) P.G.W.(ed) References Ewans,M.C. Hours 1 hour per week Oxford Latin Dictionary (Oarendon, 1982) For (b)(i) Greek Values and Society (Department of Oassics) Examination Final Examination Woodcock, E.C. Adcock, F.E. For (b)(ii) Content Study of a major work A New Latin Syntax (Methuen, 1959) Roman Political Ideas and Practice (Ann Arbor) Materials supplied by the Department. Text Cooper, e.G. Earl, D.C. An Introduction to the Latin Hexameter (Macmillan, 1952) References Sophocles The Moral and Political Tradition of Rome (Thames & For (b)(i) Roseruneyer, T.G. and Ostwald, M. et al Hudson) Electra ed I.H. Kells(Carnbridge U.P.) The Meters ofGreek and Latin Poetry (Bobbs-Merrill 1963) Adkins A.W.H. 300 LEVEL Moral Values and Political Behaviour in Ancient Greece LATIN 200 LEVEL (Chatto & Windus) 100 LEVEL At this level the Department offers three full-year units in Latin. To At this level the Department offers two full-year units in Latin. To complete a major sequence at 300 level, all three must be passed. Hesiod The Department offers TWO Full-Year Courses in Latin at progress to 300 level, students must pass in both units. Hesiod and Theognis (penguin) Level: CLAS361·2 LATIN (111): TEXT AND 20cp (i) CLAS 161 LATIN (I): ELEMENTARY is for students ~l<~261.2 LATIN (II): TEXT & 20cp LANGUAGE 300LEVEL not passed HSC Latin or its equivalent. I"~ LANGUAGE Offered Full-Year At this level the Department offers three full-year units in Ancient (ii) CLAS165 LATIN (I): ADVANCED is for students who Greek. To complete a major sequence at 300 level, all three must be passed HSC Latin or its equivalent. Prerequisites Latin ITA, or CLAS261-262 and 263 passed. 'rrl!retl,ui 46 47 FOUR DESCRIPTIONS CLAS363 LATIN (111): P ALAEOGRAPHY lOcp At the grammatical level, students shall show knowledge of SANSKRIT (11): SPECIAL lOcp Content AND TEXT STUDY commontypesofSanskritnounsan 51 50 SECfION FOUR DRAMA SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR DRAMA SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS Drama Subject Descriptioos Coult, T. & Kershaw, B. (eds) Engineers of the Imagination (Methuen) Recommended Reading Theatrecraft The aim of the Department is to develop a critical Wlderstanding of theelementswhichmakeupdrama-in-performance.Majortheatrical Hartnoll, P. (ed) Berry, C. DRAM254} THEATRECRAFfI 5cp traditions are studied in relation to their texts, staging conditions, Concise History of the Theatre (Thames & Hudson) The Actor and his Text (Harrap) DRAM354} perfonnance conventions, and the composition of their audiences. Hunt,A. Joseph, B. Offered Semester I Acting Shakespeare (Theatre Arts) In addition to lectures and seminars, teaching in the Department is Hopesfor Great Happenings (Methuen) Prerequisite DRAMIOI for DRAM254; or 30cp at DRAM200 conducted through practical, investigative workshops, since a first Styan, J. Saint-Denis, M. level for DRAM3S4 hand experience of the theatre arts is regarded as essential to a Modern Drama in Theory & Practice (C.U.P.) Training for the Theatre (Heinemann) Corequisite lOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM254; lScp at proper Wlderstanding of the theatrical medium. Styan, J. Willett, J. DRAM300 level for DRAM354 The Dramatic Experience (C.u.P) Brecht on Theatre (Methuen) Content DRAMIOI INTRODUCTION TO DRAMA 20cp The theory and practice of stage management. The logistical and Offered Full year Practical Courses Community Drama technical applications used in the organisation of a production with Prerequisites Nil Mter DramlOl, students are required to complete one semester's DRAM252} COMMUNITY DRAMA I 5cp particularreferenceto theproductionprogramwithinthe Department. practical work per Drama unit with exceptions as noted below. You Hours 5 hours per week of class contact involving 2 hours of DRAM352} Recommended Reading lectures and a 3 hour tutorial/practical workshop. may select from the following: Offered Semester I Griffith, T. Examination To be advised Acting Prerequisite DRAMlOl for DRAM252; or 30cp at DRAM200 Stagecraft (Phaidon) Content DRAM2S0} ACTING I 5cp level for DRAM352 Baker,H. The course is designed to introduce students to a close, critical DRAM350} Corequisite lOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM252; 15cp at Stage Management and Stagecraft (Miller) analysis of the dramatic event and to the language of the theatre. The Offered Semester I DRAM300 level for DRAM352 nature and conditions of the event are studied together with plays as DRAM2S5} THEATRECRAFTII Prerequisite DRAMIOl for DRAM25O; or 30 credit points at Content 5cp texts for peIformance. DRAM355} DRAM200 level for DRAM350 An introduction to community drama practice in Australia and Texts Corequisite 10cp at DRAM200 level for DRAM250; elsewhere through video and other material together with an input Offered Semester IT Beckett, S. 15cp at DRAM300 level for DRAM350 by theatre practitioners, local arts officers, etc. Prerequisite DRAM2S4/3S4 Waiting for Godot (Faber) Content Recommended reading Corequisite lOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM255; lScp at Bentley, E. (ed) Consists of an introduction to the actor's craft from an experiential Kelly,O. DRAM300 level for DRAM355 The Theory of the Modern Stage (penguin) point of view. Since all acting is based in self knowledge, this Community, Art and the State (Comedia) Recommended Reading To be advised Boucicault, D. semester length course concentrates on Stanislavskian acting Rowse, T. The Colleen Bawn (Supplied by the Department) techniques and exercises. Weekly three-hour problem solving Arguing the Arts (penguin) DRAM262} THE DRAMATIC SCRIPT 5cp Brecht,B. worlcshops attempt to bring students to anawareness oftheproblems Williams, R. DRAM366} The Caucasian Chalk Circle (Methuen) Wlderlying the actor's art; this is not aconservatory course in acting. Culture (Fontana) Offered Semester IT Gow,M. Recommended reading Prerequisite DRAMlOl for DRAM262; or 30cp at DRAM300 The Kid (Currency) Carey,D. DRAM253} COMMUNITY DRAMA II 5cp level for DRAM366 Heilpem,J. The Actor's Audition Manual (Currency) DRAM353} Corequisite lOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM262; 15cp at The Conference of the Birds, Peter Brook in Africa Moore,S. Offered Semester IT DRAM300 level (for DRAM366) (Methuen) Training an Actor (penguin) Prerequisite DRAM252/352 Content Ibsen, H. Stanislavsky, C. Plays: Two (Methuen) An Actor Prepares (Methuen) Corequisite lOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM253; lScp at A practical investigation of the principles of dramatic writing. DRAM300 level for DRAM3S3 Ionesco,E. Stanislavsky, C. Recommended Reading Three Plays (penguin) Building a Character (Methuen) Content Lawson, J.H. Plater, A. Practical applications of the theoretical and experiential principles Theory and Technique of Playwriting (Hill and Wang) Close the Coalhouse Door (Methuen) DRAM2S1} ACTING II 5cp explored in Community Drama I including a period of secondment Field, S. Shakespeare, W. DRAM351} to a local organisation, theatre company or community drama The Screenwriters' Workbook (Dell) project. Taming of the Shrew (New Penguin) Offered Semester IT Egri, L. Recommended reading Wedekind, F. Prerequisite DRAM250/350 The Art of Dramatic Writing (Simon and Schuster) Spring Awakening (Methuen) Boal, A. Griffith, S. Corequisite 10cp at DRAM200 level for DRAM251; Theatre of the Oppressed (pluto) Recommmded reading 15cp at DRAM300 level for DRAM351 How Plays are Made (Heinemann) Fotheringham, R. (ed) Braun,E. Content The Director and the Stage (Methuen) Community Theatre in Australia (Methuen) Has Acting I as its prerequisite. Acting IT is a semester length course Jellicoe,A. Brook,P. in presentational acting styles: acting in masks, Shakespearian Community Plays (Methuen) The Empty Space (pelican) acting, Brechtian acting. In contrast to Acting I, Acting IT offers the opportunity to explore technique not personality in the actor's craft. 52 53 SEcnONFOUR DRAMA SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR DRAMA SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS Uses of Drama uses ofthe voice forradio. Students will participate in the production Recommended Reading Content of a series of readings to be broadcast on 2NUR-FM. DRAM256} USES OF DRAMA I Scp Braun,E. A study of the styles and forms of European popular drama from its DRAM3S6} The Director and the Stage (Methuen) rootsincamivalandfestivaltocommediadell'arteintheRenaissance. DRAM362 RADIO II Offered Semester I Chinoy, H. & Cole, T. (eds) Texts (Not offered in 1991) Directors on Directing (Crown) Prerequisite DRAMI01 for DRAM256; or 30cp at 300 level for Rolfe,B. Wiles, T. Farces Italian Style (persona) DRAM356 DRAM363 RADIO m The Theatre Event (Chicago) Rolfe,B. Corequisite IOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM256; 15cp at (Not offered in 1991) (persona) DRAM300 level for DRAM356 Commedia dell' arte: a Scene Study Book DRAM26l} A DIRECTOR'S PERSPECTIVE II 5cp DRAM2S9} TELEVISION I Scp References Content DRAM36l} DRAM3S9} Axton, R. Consists of one semester learning to use and apply drama workshop Offered Semester IT techniques-including group dynamics and playbuilding-in non Offered Semester IT European Drama of the Middle Ages (Hutchinson) Prerequisites DRAM 261/361 theatrical situations. This may involve secondment to primary and Prerequisite DRAMlOl for DRAM259; or 30cp at DRAM300 Bakhtin,M. secondary schools in the region level for DRAM359 Corequisites IOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM261; 15cp at Rabelais and H is World (Bloomington) DRAM361 level for DRAM361 Recommended Reading Corequisite IOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM259; 15cp at Burke, P. Bolton,G. DRAM300 level for DRAM359 Content Popular Culture in Early Modern Europe (UNSW) Towards a Theory of Drama in Education (Long mans) Content Directors will investigate the conceptual and developmental stages Caputi, A. ofrealising a dramatic script .This will lead to the rehearsal process Hunt,A. Consistsofa semester's introduction both to thetheoretical study of Buffo (Wayne State) and to a final product which will be performed as part of the Hopesfor Great Happenings (Taplinger) television drama and to its practical production on television Davis,J. Department's performance program in a given year. Redington, C. Students will come into contact with a broad range of examples for Farce (Methuen) Can Theatre Teach? (pergamon) analysis and investigation in order to arrive at an understanding of Duchartre, P. production techniques and values. They will also be expected to 200 LEVEL SUBJECTS The Italian Comedy (Dover) develop some basic skills in the handling of recording equipment. DRAM257} USES OF DRAMA II Scp DRAM201 THE GREEK THEATRE lOcp Kahrl,S. DRAM3S7} Traditions ofMedieval English Drama (Hutchinson) DRAM364 TELEVISION II Scp Offered Semester IT Offered Semester IT Nicoll, A. Offered Semester I Prerequisite DRAMI01 Prerequisite DRAM256/356 or DRAM252/352 Masks, Mimes and Miracles (Cooper Square) Prerequisite DRAM359 Corequisite 1 x DRAM250-262 Corequisite IOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM257; 15cp at Content DRAM300 level for DRAM357 Corequisite 15cp at DRAM300 level DRAM203 THE PUBLIC STAGE OF lOcp The relationship between context, performance space, play text and THE RENAISSANCE Content DRAM365 TELEVISION m Scp performance in the Athenian theatre of the fifth century BC and the Offered Semester IT Uses of Drama 11 allows students to specialise in areas of non influence of the Greek ideal upon subsequent western forms of Offered Semester IT Prerequisite DRAMlOl theatrical drama technique applications: special schools (students drama taking the Dip. Ed of this university and who intend to teach Drama Prerequisite DRAM364 Corequisite 1 x DRAM250-262 Texts are encouraged to take Teaching Practices/Drama instead of Uses Corequisite 15cp at DRAM300 level Content ofDramalI); psychodrama; sociodrama; anddevelopmental drama Aischylos A substantial secondment component is involved in addition to a Content Oresteia (supplied by the Department) A study of the English public theatre of the Renaissance, with an emphasis on the historical and cultural forces which shaped its plays solid theoretical background. AimstoexpandtheunderstandingofthevaluesleamedinTelevision' Aristophanes and styles of staging and performance. Recommended Reading I. As well, students will be introduced to basic considerations of Frogs and other Plays (Penguin) television acting, direction and production management. Texts Hodgson, J. (ed) Eliot, T.S. The Uses of Drama (Methuen) Recommended Reading To be advised Murder in the Cathedral (Faber) Jonson,B. Three Comedies (penguin) Euripides The Electronic Media A Director's Perspective Bacchai Marlowe,C. Complete Plays (penguin) DRAM258} RADIO I Scp DRAM260} A DIRECTOR'S PERSPECTIVE I Scp Sophocles Salgrut>, G. (ed) DRAM3S8} DRAM360} King Oedipus (supplied by the Department) Three Jacobean Tragedies (penguin) Offered Semester I Offered Semester I Recommended Reading To be advised Shakespeare, W. Prerequisites DRAMI0 for DRAM260; or 30cp at DRAM300 Prerequisite DRAMlOl for DRAM258; or 30cp at DRAM300 Henry IV (Part 1) (penguin) level for DRAM 360 DRAM202 THE EMERGENCE OF THE lOcp level for DRAM358 Henry V (penguin) POPULAR THEATRE Corequisite IOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM258; 15cp at Corequisites IOcp at DRAM200 level for DRAM26O; 15cp at King Lear (penguin) DRAM300 level for DRAM358 DRAM300 level for DRAM360 Offered Semester I Twelfth Night (penguin) Content Content Prerequisite DRAMIOI Thomson, P. Shakespeare's Theatre (Routledge) Consistsofasemester'sintroductionto Radio Drama, concentrating Introduces students to the practice ofplay-directing through practical Corequisite 1 x DRAM250-262 on production and script analysis and including practical work on examination of an exemplary text. 54 55 SECfION FOUR DRAMA SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR DRAMA SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS Stanislavsky, K. Texts Moncrieff, W. References An Actor Prepares (Methuen) Ayckboum, A. Van Dieman's Land (supplied by the Department) Cohen,W. Building a Character (Methuen) Three Plays (penguin) (Cornell) Pinero, A.W. My Life in Art (Methuen) Drama of a Nation Chekhov,A. The Schoolmistress (supplied by the Department) Dollimore, J & Sinfie1d, A. (eds) Strasberg, L. (ed) Plays (penguin) Political Shakespeare (Manchester UP) Rowell, G. (ed) The Paradox ofActing; Masks or Faces? Two Classics of Hellman, L Nineteenth Century Plays (O.U.P) the Art ofActing (Hill & Wang) Hattaway, M. The Children's Hour (supplied by the Department) Elizabethan Popular Theatre (Routledge) Reference DRAM212 DIRECTORS & DIRECTIONS lOcp Ibsen,H. Booth, M. Weimann, R. IN THE MODERN THEATRE Plays: Two (Methuen) Shakespeare and the Popular Tradition in the Theatre English Melodrama (Jenkins) Keeffe,B. (John Hopkins) Offered Semester II Craik, T (ed) Gimme Shelter (Methuen) Revels History ofDrama in English, Vols 6 & 7 (Methuen) Prerequisite DRAM101 Marowitz, C. (ed) DRAM204 THEATRE IN THE AGE OF REASON lOcp Corequisite 30cp at DRAM200 level Emeljanow, V. Four American Plays (penguin) Victorian Popular Dramatists (Twayne) Offered Semester II Content Osborne,I. Prerequisite DRAM101 Jackson, R. (ed) The development of the director's role from the mid-19th century Look Back in Anger (Faber) Victorian Theatre (New Mermaid) to the present day. Corequisite 1 x DRAM250-262 Pinter,H. Content Rowell,G. Recommended reading Plays: Two (Methuen) The Victorian Theatre, 2nd ed (C.U.P.) This course looks at peIformance styles, staging conventions and Barton, J. Rattigan, T. dramatic forms in England, France and Germany during the late Smith,J. Playing Shakespeare (Methuen) Plays: One (Methuen) Melodrama (MeJ1uen) seventeenth and eighteenth centuries in order to understand the Braun(ed) effects of classicism and rationalism in those European theatres. Vardac,N. Meyerhold on Theatre (Methuen) DRAM302 DRAMAS OF ALIENATION lScp From Stage to Screen (Blom) Texts Braun, E. AND SURREALISM Bentley, Eric (ed) The Director and the Stage (Methuen) Offered Semester I DRAM210 THE DEVELOPMENT OF lOcp The Classic Theatre Vols II & IV (Doubleday) Brook,P. Prerequisite 30cp at DRAM200 level THE ACTOR'S CRAFT The Conference of the Birds (penguin) FROM GARRICK TO OLIVIER Corequisite 5cp at DRAM300 level Harris, B. (ed) Cole, T. & Chinoy, H. Offered Semester I Content Restoration Plays (Modem Library) Directors on Directing (Bobbs Merrill) Prerequisite DRAM101 A study ofthe Surrealist movement, its antecedents, andits influence Quintana, R. (ed) Grotowski, J. upon post-World War 2dramalists. Eighteenth Century Plays (Modem Library) Corequisite 30cp at DRAM200 level Towards a Poor Theatre (Simon and Schuster) Texts References Content Magarshack, D. Beckett,S. Pre-naturalistic acting styles from the late 17th to the 19th centuries Stanislavsky on the Art of the Stage (Faber) Bruford, W.H. All That Fall (Faber) Theatre, Drama and Audience in Goethe's Germany and the subsequent developments and influence of naturalistic Saint-Denis, M. (Greenwood) acting since Stanislavsky. Training for the Theatre, (Heinemann) Benedict, M. & Wellwarth, G. (eds) Modern French Theatre (Dutton) Craik, T. (ed) Text Styan, J Davies, F. (tr) RevelsHistoryofDramainEnglish, Vols6 & 7, (Methuen) Cole, T. & Chinoy, H. Modern Drama in Theory and Practice Vols 1-3 (c. U.P.) Three Boulevard Farces (penguin) Moore,W.G. Actors on Acting (Crown) Willett, J. Esslin, M. The Classical Drama of France (O.U.P.) Recommended Reading Erwin Piscator (Methuen) Absurd Drama (penguin) Nagler, A.M (ed) Cole, T. (ed) Jarry, A. A Sourcebook in Theatrical History (Dover) Acting, a Handbook ofthe Stanislavsky Method (Bonanza) DRAM211 THE THEATRE CRITICS lOcp The Ubu Plays (Methuen) Coquelin, C. (Not offered in 1991) Moliere DRAM20S PLAYERS & THE PAINTED STAGE lOcp The Art of the Actor (Allen & Unwin) Five Plays (Methuen) Offered Semester I Duerr,J.L. 300 LEVEL SUBJECTS Orton, J. Prerequisite DRAM101 The Length and Depth of Acting (Holt,Rinehart) DRAM301 THE THEATRE OF REALITY lScp Plays (Methuen) Corequisite 1 x DRAM250-262 Gielgud,J. Offered Semester II Pirandello, L Content Stage Directions (Mercury) Three Plays (Methuen) Prerequisite 30cp at DRAM200 level This course looks at peIformance styles, staging conventions and Joseph,B.L Shephard, S. Corequisite 5cp at DRAM300 level dramatic forms from 1800 to the advent of the silent movies. A Tragic Actor, (Routledge) Seven Plays (Faber) Marowitz, C. Content Texts Stoppard, T. Papers on Acting (Taplinger) Developments in the realistic tradition from Ibsen to Barrie Keeffe. Holcroft, T. Travesties (Faber) A Tale ofMystery (supplied by the Department) 57 56 SECTION FOUR DRAMA SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR DRAMA SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS DRAM304 THE EPIC TRADITION lScp Recommended reading Recommended Reading Offered Semester n Dollirnore, I. & Sinfield, A. (eds) Amott, P. Prerequisite 30cp at DRAM200 level Political Shakespeare (Manchester) The Theatre ofJapan (Macmillan) Corequisite 5cp at DRAM300 level Drakakis, I. (ed) Ernst, E. Alternative Shakespeares (Methuen) The Kabuki Theatre (Secker and Warburg) Content Haar, F. Brechtian epic theatre, its IIadition, theoretical bases andinfluences. DRAM313 AUSTRALIAN DRAMA 20cp Iapanese Theatre in Highlight Texts (Not offered in 1991) Hare, T.B. Arden, I. & D'Arcy, M. Zeami's Style (Stanford) The Non-Stop Connolly Show (Methuen) DRAM314 AMERICAN DRAMA & THEATRE 20cp Mason, R & Caiger, I. Willett, I. (ed) Offered Semester n A History ofJapan (Tuttle) Brecht on Theatre (Methuen) Content Roberts, C. Brecht,B. The Japanese Mind (Simon & Schuster) The Messingkauf Dialogues (Methuen) Studies in selected aspects of American drama and theatre. In 1991, The Measures Taken and Other Lehrstikke (Methuen) the course will examine the works of selected dramatists including Sekime,M. Life ofGalileo (Methuen) EugeneO'Neill, Arthur Miller, Tennessee Williams, Edward Albee, Zeami and his Theories ofNoh Drama (Smythe) Mother Courage and her Children (Methuen) Sam Shepard and David Mamet. Watts,A. BUchner,G. Recommended Reading The Way of Zen (pelican) Danton's Death (Methuen) Bigsby, C.W.E. DRAM316 POST-MODERNISM & 20cp Lenz,J.R A Critical Introduction to Twentieth Century American PERFORMANCE The Tutor & The Soldiers (Chicago U.P) Drama (C.U.P) Piscator, E. Bogard, T.(ed) (Not offered in 1991) The Political Theatre (Methuen) The Revels History of Drama in English,vrn, (Methuen) DRAM401 DRAMA HONOURS McGrath,I. Brown, I.R (ed) The Cheviot, the Stag and the Black, Black Oil (Methuen) American Theatre, Stratford-upon-Avon Studies 10, DRAM402 (Arnold) Shakespeare, W. Prerequisites Coriolanus (penguin) Cheney,S. Students will be accepted into Drama Honours at the discretion of The New Movement in Theatre (New York) Weiss,P. the Head of Department. In order to qualify for entry to Drama Discourse on Viet Nam (Calder) Ourrnan,H. Honours a student must normally have passed at least seven Drama The Fervent Years (Hill and Wang) units of which four should be at a 300 level DRAM310 - DRAM315 Cohn,R. Hours As prescribed by the Head of Department New American Dramatists: 1960-1980 (Macmillan) Prerequisites Normally 30cps at 200 level in 1 discipline Examination As prescribed by the Head of Department Downer,A. Content Corequisites MajorinDramaorat discretion of Head of Department Fifty Years ofAmerican Drama: 1900-1950 (Gateway) 1. An essay of 12-14000 words on an approved topic, under the Gorelik, M. guidance of a supervisor. DRAM310 MODERN BRITISH POLITICAL 20cp New Theatresfor Old (Dutton) THEATRE 2. An approved practical project, together with an extensive project Hughes,C. report. (Not offered in 1991) American Playwrights 1945-75 (Pitman) 3. Two theoretical topics (which may include a Directed Reading Kirby,M course) drawn from selected periods in the history of drama and DRAM312 CONTEMPORARY APPROACHES 20cp The New Theatre (NYU) TO SHAKESPEARE theatre together with a special studies progrnrn concerned with Lahr,I. research methodology. Offered Semester I Acting out America (penguin) Texts To be advised. Content Lewis,A. Introduces a range of recent critical and theoretical approaches to American Plays and Playwrights of the Contemporary Shakespearean drama Theatre (Crown) Texts Holderness, G. DRAM315 JAPANESE THEATRE 20cp The Shakespeare Myth (Manchester UP) Offered Semester I Shakespeare, W. Content Henry V (penguin) A study of the major forms oflapanesetheatrefromthe 14th century A Midsummer Night's Dream (penguin) to the present, including Noh, Kabuki and puppet theatre. Othello (penguin) Titus Andronicus (penguin) 58 59 SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Economics Subject Descriptions Dingle, T. Computing: Students have access to the Faculty's microcomputer This sectioncovers some specialised topicsnotcoveredinEconomics Aboriginal Economy (penguin 1988) facilities and are taught the use of spreadsheet and statistical 1. The following subjects are amongst those considered: Theories ECONIOI ECONOMICS 1 20cp software. of production and consumption, Paretian optimality conditions, Jackson, RV. market failure, special aspects of imperfect competition and Lecturers B. Hughes and other Lecturers AustralianEconomic Development in theNineteenth Century Business statistics: Topics covered include descriptive statistics, microeconomic aspects of distribution theory. Prerequisites Nil (A.N.U. Press 1977) probability theory, introductory sampling and sampling distributions, estimation, hypothesis testing, linear correlation and regression (ii) Macroeconomics Hours 3 lecture hours per week, weeldy tutorials and fortnightly Referer.ces analysis, time series analysis and index numbers. Students are Lecturer A. Oakley workshops Blainey, G. expected to use the statistical packages on the micro-computers of Examination Two 1 hour quizzes plus one2-hourexamination each A Land Half Won (Sun Books 1983) the Faculty. The principal part of the course deals with the determination of the level of economic activity in themacroeconomy. This work stresses semester Nicholas, S. (ed) Mathematical techniques: Topics covered include the use of theinterdependentnatureof economic activity ,the linkages between Convict Workers: Interpreting Australia's Past (1989) Content functions in economics, calculus and matrices in economics and the major macroeconomic markets, and the implications of these The course is designed to introduce the student to the principles of Mathematics of Finance. linkages and interdependencies for the effective operation of economics. While emphasis through the course is on the theoretical ECONI03 AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY lOcp Prescribed Texts macroeconomic policy. underpinnings of economics the concepts afford significantinsights Lecturer To be advised Bowen, E.K. & Starr, M.K. Models which seek to explain the determination of aggregate into contemporary problems. The theoretical concepts developed Advisory Corequisite Economics I (ECON101) Basic Statisticsfor Business and Economics (McGraw-Hill economic activity are developed The role of the Government in will be used to address contemporary issues and problems. 1983) influencing aggregate demand for goods in the economy is examined Hours 2 lecture hours and one tutorial per week The first semester will examine the principles of Microeconomics or together with the implications of alternative theories of consumption and their applications. Microeconomics is concerned with the rules Examination End of semester examination and progressive and investment expenditures. Analysis of the determinants of the of rationality for decisions made by individuals who wish to assessment Hamburg,M. supply and demand for money provides an understanding of the Basic Statistics: A ModernApproach (Harcourt Brace 1985) maximise their wellbeing, and theimpact these decisions have upon Content linkages between the real and fmancial sectors of the economy. the allocation of resources throughout an economy or society. Ingalsbe, L. Alternative theories of inflation are examined and the influence of This course is intended to provide students with an understanding Emphasis will be placed on contrasting theoretical conclusions Business Applications Software for the IBM PC: Alternate external factors on the domestic economy considered. of how the Australian economy has evolved over the past century. with real-world praxis. Edition with VP-Planner,dBaseIllIlIlPlus,andWordPerfect A particular focus is on the relatively poor performance of Australia The models of macroeconomic activity provide afoundation for the (Merrill 1988) The second semester is concerned with Macroeconomics. It will as compared to most other affluent economies in this period discussion of macroeconomic policy. Beginning with the theory of involve a study of the relationship between aggregates such as O'Brien, D.I., Lewis, D.E. & Guest, J.F. macroeconomic policy ,thenatureoftheinstrumentsflargets problem Text consumption, investment, employment, exchange rates, inflation Mathematics for Business and Economics (Harcourt Brace is discussed. In the context of the 'Keynesian/Monetarlst' and growth. Basic theoretical analysis will be used to explain policy Dyster, B. & Meredith, D. 1989) controversy, the need for discretionary policy is examined. The making Australia in the International Economy (Cambridge 1990) alternatives and someofthe problemsinvolvedin appropriate References effectiveness of fiscal, monetary and incomes policies in the policy decisions. The course will include a discussion of areas of References Australian institutional environment is considered with specific theoretical controversy and provide some explanation as to why Dowling, E. T. reference made to theBalance ofPayments constraint and exchange Boehm,E.A. economists can advocate incompatible "solutions" to the same Schaum's Outline ofTheory and Problems ofMathematics rate policy. Twentieth Century &onomic Development in Australia 2nd problem. for &onomists (McGraw-Hill 1980) edn (Longman Cheshire 1979) Texts Texts Hamburg,M. Lougheed, A.L. Statistical Analysis for Decision Making (Harcourt Brace (i) Microeconomics Baumol, W.J., Blinder, A.S. et al Australia and the World Economy (McPhee Gribble! 1987) Landsburg, S. E. &onomics: PrinciplesandPolicy: Australianedn (Harcourt Penguin 1988) Price Theory and Applications (Dryden 1989) Brace Jovanovich 1988) James, D.E. and Throsby, C.D. Maddock, R & McLean, I.W. (eds) Introduction to Quantitative Methods in Economics (Wiley Tisdell, C A. References To be advised The Australian Economy in the Long Run (Cambridge 1987) 1973) Microeconomics ofMarkets (Wiley 1982) Sinclair, W.A. ECONI02 ECONOMIC HISTORY A lOcp Kenkel, J.L. (ii) Macroeconomics TheProcessofEconomic Development inAustralia (Cheshire IntroductoryStatisticstoManagement andEconomics (pwS Levacic, R. & Rebman, A. Lecturer J.R Fisher 1976) 1984) Macroeconomics 2nd edn (Macmillan 1989) Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial per week Leonard, D. References Examination End of semester examination and progressive ECONI04 INTRODUCTORY QUANTITATIVE 20cp Mathematical Methods in Accountancy, Economics and assessment METHODS Finance (Prentice-Hall 1980) (i) Microeconomics: Content Lecturers J. Doeleman, M. Gordon, G. Keating Tan,S.T. Tisdell, C.A. Microeconomics ofMarkets (Wiley 1982). Thiscourselooksat the background to modern Australian economic Prerequisites Nil (Mathematics advisory - see Economics and College Mathematics (PWS-Kent 1988) development. Using simple concepts and theory, it examines: Commerce Faculty handbook) Eckert, Ross D. & Leftwich, RH. The Price System and Resource Allocation 10th edn Hours 2 hour lecture and 2 hour laboratory session per week ECON201 ECONOMICS II 20cp (a) economic growth in prehistoric Australia 5000-200 BP (Before (Dryden1988) the Present). Examination One final 3 hour paper and progressive assessment Prerequisite Economics I (ECON101) Maddala, G.S. & Miller, E. (b)the background to, origins and economic development of the Content Hours 3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week Microeconomics: Theory and Applications (McGraw-Hill white settlement in New South Wales 1788-1860 A.D. This course is aimed at giving students a grounding in quantitative Examination Two 3 hour papers 1989) Recommended Reading and Texts methods used in economics, commerce and management and is a Content Pindyck, R.S. & Rubinfeld, D.L prerequisite for other quantitative and computing subjects in the BlaineY,G. (i) Microeconomics Microeconomics (Macmillan 1989) Triumph of the Nomads 2nd edn (Macmillan 1982) Faculty. The course covers three broad areas: computing, business statistics (approximately one semester) and mathematical techniques. Lecturers P. R. Anderson, S. R. Shenoy 60 61 SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Glahe, F.R & Lee, D.R Content ECON205} ASIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY III lOcp Content Microeconomics: Theory andApplications (Harcourt Brace &onomic History of Indonesia ECON305} This course aims at providing afmn basis for systemic description, Jovanovich 1981) The economic history of Indonesia from the prosperous sixteenth Not offered in 1991 classification and analysis. Inter-system comparisons are undertaken, Nicholson, W. century to the current New Order. Topics are trade and uIbanisation, Lecturers H. Dick or S. Shenoy both from theoretical and empirical perspectives, with particular Intermediate Microeconomics and its Applications 4th edn emphasis on market economies, eg, the United States, France, village economy and agriculture, taxation and welfare and Prerequisites For ECON205 Economic History A (ECON102) or (Dryden 1987) Japan, Sweden and West Germany. entrepreneurship and the state. Australian Economic History (ECON103) or Economics I (ii) Macroeconomics References (ECONI01) Texts INDECS Booth, A. Prerequisites For ECON305 20 credit points from Group B Kohler, H. State ofPlay 6 (Allen & Unwin 1990) Comparative Economic Systems (Scott Foresman) Agricultural Development in Indonesia (Allen & Unwin 1988) Economic History Hours 2 hours per week References ECON202} EUROPEAN ECONOMIC HISTORY lOcp Elson, R Bornstein, M. (ed) ECON302} Examination End of semester Javanese Peasants and the Colonial Sugar Industry (Oxford U.P. ComparativeEconomicSystems:ModelsandCases5thedn Lecturer To be advised 1984) Content (R.D. Irwin) Prerequisites For ECON202 Australian Economic History Reid,A. Modern Chinese &onomic History Holesovsky, L. (ECONI03) or Economics (ECONlOl) SoutheastAsia in the Age ofCommerce 1450-1680 (Yale U.P. 1988) A survey of the economic history of China since theMing Dynasty. EconomicSystems:AnalysisandComparison(McGraw-Hill) Prerequisites For ECON302, 20 credit points from Group B Robison, R Majortopics are urbanisation and the spread ofthe market economy, Economic History mobilisation of economic surplus, and entrepreneurship and the ECON209 COMPARATIVE MODELS IOcp Indonesia: The Rise of Capital (Allen & Unwin 1986) state. Hours 2 lecture hours per week and a fortnightly tutorial AND CASES References Lecturer J.C. de Castro Lopo Examination End of semester ECON204} ASIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY II lOcp Content ECON304} Elvin, M. Prerequisites Economics I (ECON101) Economic Growth in Europe Britain and the world economy from Lecturer H. Dick The Pattern ofthe Chinese Past (Methuen 1973) Hours 2 lecture hours per week the end of the medieval period to 1914. Prerequisites For ECON204 Economic History A (ECONI02) or Fairbank, J.K. & Liu, K.C. (eds) Examination Examination and progressive assessment. References Australian Economic History (ECONI03) or Economics I The Cambridge History of China Vol II (Cambridge U.P. 1980) Content (ECON101) Crafts, N.F.R Myers,RH. Systemic description, classification and analysis as well as inter The British Economy in the Industrial Revolution (Oxford Prerequisites For ECON304 20 credit points from Group B The Chinese &onomy, Past and Present (Wadsworth 1980) system comparisons are undertaken, with particular reference to 1985) Economic History socialisteconomies-boththecentralisedanddecentralisedvarieties. Willmott, W.E. (ed) Oay,C.G.A. Hours 2 hours per week Case study material will include the USSR, China, Hungary and Economic Organisation in Chinese Society (Stanford UP. 1972) &onomic Expansion and Social Change: England, 1500 - Examination End of semester Yugoslavia, with an emphasis on the various reformist initiatives 1700 (2 vols) (Cambridge 1984) India which have taken place over the last two decades. Content Davis, R Economic growth from the sixteenth to the twentieth centuries, Text Japanese Economic History The Rise of the Atlantic Economies (London 1973) emphasising the development of specialisation and market change. Kohler,H. The economic development ofJapan from circa 1600 to the postwar Floud, R & McOoskey, D.N. (eds) References Comparative Economic Systems (Scott Foresman) era. Major topics are the Tokugawa heritage, the economic The Economic History of Britain Since 1700 (2 vols) transformation since 1868 and government and business in modem Chaudhuri, K.N. & Dewey, C.J. (eds) References (Cambridge 1981) Japan. Economy and Society: Essays in Indian Economic and Bornstein, M. (ed) Jones, E. L. Social History (Oxford U.P.1979) References Comparative Economic Systems: Models and Cases 5th edn GrowthRecurring (Oxford 1988) Furber,H. (Irwin) Allen,G.C. Pollard, S. RivalEmpireso/Trade in the Orient (Minneapolis U.P. 1976) A Short Economic History ofModern Japan 4th edn (Allen Holesovsky, L. Peaceful Conquest: The Industrialisation ofEurope 1760 - & Unwin 1981) Habib, I. Economic Systems: AnalysisandComparison (McGraw Hill) 1970 (Oxford 1981) TheAgrarianSystemofMughallndia(AsiaPublishingHouse Jansen, M. & Rozman, G. 1963) Japan in Transition: From Tokugawa toMeiji (Princeton U.P. of ECON210 POLITICAL ECONOMICS lOcp ECON203} ASIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY I lOcp 1986) Kumar, D. (ed) Lecturer J.A. Doeleman ECON303} The Cambridge Economic History of India 2 Vols Lockwood, W.W. Prerequisite Economics I (ECON101) Lecturer H. Dick (Cambridge U.P.1981,1983) The&onomicDevelopmentof/apan (Princeton U.P. 1970) Hours 2 lecture hours per week Prerequisites For ECON203 Economic History A (ECON102) or Ohkawa, K. & Rosovsky, H. Australian Economic History (ECON103) or Economics I ECON208 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC lOcp Examination One 3 hour paper Japanese Economic Growth (Stanford U.P. 1973) (ECON101) SYSTEMS A Content Prerequisites For ECON303 20 credit points from Group B Smith, T.e. Lecturer J.C. de Castro Lopo The Agrarian Origins ofModern Japan (Stanford U.P. 1959) The course considers a number of political issues and themes that Economic History Prerequisites Economics I (ECON101) have substantive economic content. The approachtakenis inductive Hours 2 hours per week Hours 2 lecture hours per week rather than deductive. Emphasis is placed on the appreciation of political divisions and the multiplicity of meaningful economic ,~ination End of semester Examination Examination and progressive assessment policies. Furthermore, emphasis is placed on an understanding of the limitations of economic and political control in society. The 62 63 SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECf DESCRll'TIONS SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRll'TIONS course addresses the divisions between the capitalist (market), can be asked where choice is determined by political interaction George, K.D. & Joll, C. References institutionalist and Marxist view of society. Other topics concern Topics include aspects of conflict theory, of game theory, and of Industrial Organisation 3rd edn (Allen & Unwin 1981) Booth, A. & Sundrum, RM. unemployment and economic depression; international monetary voting theory. Martin,S. Labour Absorption in Agriculture (Oxford U.P. 1984) arrangements; the so called industrial-military complex; References Industrial Economics (Macmillan 1988) Gemmell,N. transnational corporations; income distribution within Australia as Boulding, K. Shepherd, W.G. Surveys in Development Economics (Blackwell 1987) well as between rich and poor countries. Conflict and Defense (Harper 1962) The Economics of Industrial Organisation 2nd edn Gillis, M. et al. References Colman, A. (Prentice-Hall 1985) &onomics of Development (Norton 1983) Brandt, W. (Chairman) Game Theory and Experimental Games (Pergamon Press Scherer, F.M. Meier,G.M. (ed) North-South: A Programmefor SUT1Iival (Pan 1983) 1982) Industrial Market Structure and Economic Performance Leading Issues in Economic Development 5th edn (Oxford Freeman, C. & Jahoda, M. (eds) Frey, B.A. 2nd edn (Rand McNally 1980) 1988) World Futures (Martin Robertson 1978) Democratic Economic Policy (Oxford 1983) ECON217 INDUSTRY ECONOMICS B lOcp Frey,B.A. Frohlich, N. & Oppenheimer, IA. ECON230 INTRODUCTORY LABOUR lOcp Democratic Economic Policy (Oxford 1983) Modern Political Economy (Prentice Hall 1978) Lecturer P.J. Stanton ECONOMICS Friedman, M. Mueller, D.C. Prerequisite Industry Economics A (ECON216) Lecturer B.L.J. Gordon Free to Choose (Secker & Warburg 1980) Public Choice (Cambridge 1979) Hours 2 hours per week Prerequisite Economics 1 (ECONI0l) Galbraith, J .K. Olson,M. Examination One 2 hour paper plus seminar This course is not available to students who have passed the old The Age of Uncertainty (Deusch/Hutchinson 1977) The Rise and Decline ofNations (Yale U.P. 1982) Content ECON206. Galbraith, J.K. Schellenberg, J.A. Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester The Nature ofMass Poverty (Harvard University 1979) The following cootent outline is an approximate guide to the course The Science ofConflict (O.U.P. 1982) as taught in 1990 but may be subject to alterations in 1991. Examination One 2 hour paper, plus progressive assessment Hirsch, F. Tullock,G. The course provides a study of the causes and suggested remedies Content Social Limits to Growth (Routledge 1977) Towards a Mathematics ofPolitics (Ann Arbor 1967) for the malaise that has been said to characterise Australian industry The purpose of this course is to offer an introduction to some of the Hollingworth, P. Van den Doel, H. in recent times. The incentives and impediments to stmctural multi-faceted perspectives of the economics of labour. Topics Australians in Poverty (Nelson 1985) Democracy and Welfare Economics (Cambridge 1979) adjustment within the Australian economy will be examined include: alternate approaches to the analysis of labour markets; Jones,B. Weintraub, E.R Students will be introduced to Australian industry data sources. The theories of wage determination; bargaining models; wage Sleepers Awake (O.U.P. 1982) Conflict and Co-operation in Economics (Macmillan 1975) structure and uses of the ASIC will be examined Students will be differentials; human capital theory; and Australian wage Langmore, J. & Peetz, D. (eds) expected to prepare a research paper and present the findings at a determination by industrial tribunals. ECON216 INDUSTRY ECONOMICS A lOcp class seminar. Wealth, Poverty and SUT1Iivai (Allen & Unwin 1983) References Lecturer P J. Stanton References Nelson, RR. & Winter, S.G. Kaufman, B.E. AnEvolutionary Theory of&onomic Change (Harvard 1982) Prerequisite Economics 1 (ECON101) There is no one set text recommended for purchase, but a list of The Economics ofLabor Markets and Labor Relations 2nd references (mainly Industries Assistance Commission and Bureau Schum peter, IA. Hours 2 lecture hours per week edn (Dryden 1989) Capitalism, Socialism and Democracy (Unwin 1954, 1943) of Industry Economics reports and papers) will be provided. Examination One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment by Norris, K. Thurow, L.C. essays, depending on enrolment. The Economics of Australian Labour Markets 2nd edn Dangerous Currents (Oxford U.P. 1983) ~ECON218 PROBLEMS OF DEVELOPING lOcp (Longman Cheshire 1989) Content COUNTRIES Tsoulakis, L. (ed) Whitfield, K. The following content outline and reference list is an approximate The Political Economy ofInternational Money (Sage 1985) Lecturer C. Stahl The Austr:alia~ Labour Market (Harper & Row 1987) guide to the course as taught in 1990 but may be subject to alteration Prerequisite Economics I (ECONI 01) Wheelwright, E.L. & Stilwell, F.J.B. in 1991. Whitfield, K. (ed) Readings in Political Economy Vol I & IT (ANZ Book Co Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Contemporary Issues in Labour Economics (Harper & Row The study of market stmcture, conduct and performance, with 1976) 1989) particular reference to Australian government policies in the area Examination One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment World Commissioo on Fnvironment and Development 1987 The topics include: extensions to the theory of the firm; the role of Content Our Common Future (Oxford U.P.) the large corporation in industry; the importance of growth and ECON240 INTRODUCTQRY ECONOMETRICS lOcp The course commences with a discussion of the concepts of profitability objectives; integration, diversification and merger; development and poverty. Major topics to follow are: growth, Offered Semester I "" ECON211 THEORY OF PUBLIC CHOICE lOcp determinants of market structure (stochastic processes, cost poverty and income distribution; population growth and Lecturer To be advised cooditions advertising, etc); relationships between structure and Lecturer J.A. Doeleman development; rural-uman migration; and, industrial and agricultural market cooduct; reasons for government intervention. Prerequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods (ECON 104) Prerequisites Economics I (ECONI0l) development policies. Throughout the course case study materials References Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 hour tutorial per week Hours 2 lecture hours per week from various Third World countries will be used, with particular Oarke,R. emphasis on South-east Asia Examination One 2 hour examination and progressive assessment. Examination One 3 hour paper Industrial Economics (Blackwell 1985) Text Content Content Oarke, R & McGuiness, T. (ed) Todaro, M.P. The course extends the economic statistics component of This course is analytical in nature and coocerned with ecooomic The Economics of the Firm (Blackwell 1987) Economic Development in the Third World 4th edn Introductory QuantitativeMethodstoinc1ude two-sample hypothesis principles governing political behaviour. The theory of public or (Longman Cheshire 1988) testing (means and proportions) and k-sample hypothesis testing social choice can be viewed as an extension of welfare ecooomics. Devine, P.I et al. An Introduction to Industrial Economics 4th edn (Allen & (analysis-of-variance and Chi-square tests). The simple regression Traditiooally, welfare economics deals with questions of allocation Unwin 1985) model is extended to the multiple regression models and detailed anddistributioointhecontextofmarketinteraction.Relatedquestions 64 65 SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS economic applications are investigated using software packages the DX database. Topics include multicollinearity ,autocorrelation, Searle,S. Ford, W. & Plowman, D. such as SHAZAM, MINITAB and DX. heteroscedasticity, dummy variables, non-parametric testing and Matrix Algebra for Business and Economics (Wiley 1970) Australian Unions 2nd edn (Macmillan 1989) Bayesian decision theory. Text To be advised IR201 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IIA lOcp ECONJOI ECONOMICS m 20cp References Text To be advised Lecturers J. Fisher, D. Macdonald & R. Green Lecturers To be advised Berenson, M.L. & Levine, D.M. References Basic Business Statistics (Prentice-Hall) Brennan, M. & Carroll, T. Prerequisite EconomicsI (ECONI 01 )orEconomic History or Law Prerequisites Economics II (ECON201) Preface toQuantiJativeEconomicsandEconometrics 4th edn subjects to the value of 20 credit points Hamburg Hours 2 lecture hours per week plus 1 seminar hour per fortnight Statistical Analysis for Decision Making 4th edn(Harcourt (South Western 1987) Hours 2 lecture hours per week plus 1 hour tutorial per fortnight Examination 1 examination first semester, 1 examination second Brace Jovanovich) Doran, N.E. & Guise, J.W.B. Examination One 2 hour paper plus assignments semester Single Equation Methods in Econometrics - Applied Joiner, B.L., Ryan, B.F. et al Content Content Regression Analysis (UNE 1984) Minitab Student Handbook (Duxbury 1985) This course aims to provide students with an introduction to This course will cover applied issues in micro and macroeconomics. Kenkel,J.L Doti, J.L & Adibi, E. industrial relations concepts and tools of analysis in both the It is compulsory for BEe students, but optional for others. It is Econometric Analysis (Prentice-Hall) Introductory Statistics for Management and Economics international and Australian contexts. Special emphasis will be intended to round out issues not fully developed in Economics II. (PWS) Grejarati, D. given to the origins andhistorical development ofthe main Australian References To be advised Basic Econometrics 2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1988) Lapin,LL institutions. Statistics for Modem Business Decisions (Harcourt, Brace Hamburg Texts ECON306 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS A lOcp Statistical Analysis for Decision Making 4th edn (Harcourt Jovanovich) Dabscheck, B. & Niland, J. Brace Jovanovich) Lecturer P.J. Stanton Mansfield, E. Industrial Relations in Australia (Allen & Unwin 1981) Prerequisite Economics II (ECON201) Statistics for Business & Economics (Norton) Maddala, G.S. Deery, S. & Plowman, D. Introduction to Econometrics (Macmillan 1988) White, K., HIIlUl, S. & Horsman AustralianlndustrialRelations2ndedn (McGraw-Hill 1985) Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Ramanathan, R. SHAZAM: User's Reference Manual (UBC) Ford, W., Hearn, J. et al Examination 3 hour exam and progressive assessment IntroductoryEconometricswithApplications(HarcourtBrace Australian Labour Relations Readings 4th edn (Macmillan Content Jovanovich 1989) ECON241 ECONOMETRICS I lOcp 1987) The following content outline is an approximate guide to the course White, K.J. & Bui, L T.M. Offered Semester II References as taught in 1990 but may be subject to alteration in 1991. Basic Econometrics: a Computer Handbookusing SHAZAM Lecturers To be advised for use with Grejarati (McGraw-Hill 1988) Ford, W. & Plowman, D. The theory and analysis of international trade and policy. This Prerequisite Introductory Econometrics (ECON240) Australian Unions 2nd edn (Macmillan 1989) covers the role and scope for international specialization, the gains from trade, optimal trade intervention, the effects of trade at the Hours 2 lecture hours ECON243 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS A lOcp Turner, I. & Sandercock, L. In Union is Strength 3rd edn (Nelson 1983) national and international levels and the theory of preferential Examination One 2 hour examination and progressive assessment Offered Semester I trading. Australian illustrations are used wherever possible. Macintyre, S. & Mitchell, R. (eds) Content Lecturers To be advised Foundations ofArbitration (Oxford U.P. 1989) Text To be advised This courseexamines those mathematical and statistical techniques, Prerequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods (ECONI04) or Reference Mathematics 103 (MATHI03) necessary to undertakeadetailed reading of econometrics. Particular IR202 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS lIB lOcp Baldwin, R.E. and Richardson, S.E. (eds) emphasis is given to the derivation of the general linear model in Hours 2 lecture hours Lecturers To be advised International Trade and Finance 3rd edn (Boston, Little matrix form and the least squares estimators, including their Examination: One 2hourexamination and progressive assessment Brown 1986) properties and distributions under the classical assumptions. Prerequisites Industrial Relations ITA (IR201) Content Texts Hours 2 lecture hours per week ECONJ07 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS B lOcp This course is designed primarily to provide an introduction to Hoel,P.G. Examination One 2 hour paper plus progressive assessment Lecturers P. Anderson, P.J. Stanton & S. Shenoy mathematical tools used in economics and econometrics. The Introduction to Mathematical Statistics (Wiley 1984) Content topics dealt with include economic applications of differential and Prerequisite International Economics A (ECON306) Johnston, J. integral calculus, matrix algebra and its application to input/output The first part of this course is intended to provide a thorough Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Econometric Methods (McGraw-Hill 1987) analysis and linear programming. grounding in the legal framework paying particular attention to the relevant statutes and tribunal decisions. The second part of the Examination One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment Texts ECON242 APPLffiD ECONOMETRICS I lOcp course concentrates on providing a basic introduction to the main Content Glaister, S. processes of conflict resolution in Australian Industrial relations Offered Semester II The following content outline is an approximate guide to the course Mathematical Methods for Economists 3rd edn (Basil concentrating on arbitration, conciliation and negotiation. as taught in 1990 but may be subject to alteration in 1991. Lecturers To be advised Blackwell 1984) Texts The course covers theory and policy relating to foreign exchange References Prerequisite Introductory Econometrics (ECON240) Creighton, B. & Stewart, A. markets and exchange rate determination; money, interest rates and Hours 2 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours Brennan, M.J. & Carroll, T.M. Labour Law: An Introduction (Federation 1990) exchange rates; fixed exchange rates and foreign exchange Preface to QuantitativeEconomiesandEconometrics(South Examination One 2 hour examination and progressive assessment Deery, S. & Plowman, D. intervention; the international monetary system and international Western 1987) macroeconomic policy. Content AustralianlndustrialRelations2nd edn (McGraw-Hill 1985) Chiang, A. References Texts To be advised The course is designed to give economics and commerce students Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics aworking knowledge ofthe common econometric tests found in the (McGraw-Hill) Ford, W., Hearn, J. et al journal literature, using the econometric package SHAZAM and Australian Labour Relations: Readings 4th edn (Macmillan 1987) 66 67 SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS ECON308 MACROECONOMIC PLANNING lOcp Richardson, H. ECON311 ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS lOcp ECON313 GROWTH AND FLUCTUATIONS lOcp (May also be taken IL'I Economics IV topic) Urban &onomics (Irwin) Lecturers J.A. Doeleman Lecturer A. Oakley Lecturer J.e. de Castro Lopo Schrieber, Gatons & Clemmer Prerequisites Economics II (ECON201) Prerequisite Economics 11 (ECON201) Prerequisites ECON201 and Introductory Quantitative Methods &onomics of Urban Problems (Houghton-Mifflin) Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Hours 2 lecture hours for one semester (ECONI04) ECON310 REGIONAL ECONOMICS lOcp Examiflillion One 3 hour paper Examiflillion One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment Hours 2 lecture hours per week Lecturer Dr M.T. Gordon Content Content Examiflillion Progressive assessment Prerequisites Economics II (ECON201) Topics covered include: externalities, pollution, cost-benefit The course is devoted to a study of the various dimensions of the Content Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester analysis,conservationoflivingresources,naturalresourceeconomics evolution and 'motion' of the capitalist economic system through lbis course is essentially a critical survey of macroeconomic and the economic growth debate. time. h considers explanations of capital accumulation and stmctural Examiflillion Progressive assessment planning issues, with emphasis on the logic, specification, structure change, real economic growth and fluctuations in growth rates. Text and implementation aspects of planning designs, rather than on Content Specific topics will include expanding reproduction and balanced Pearce, D.W. & Turner, RK. problems of statistical estimation. Modes of planning in market The focus of this course is the region as a sub-unit of the national growth, capital accumulation and income distribution, short-term &onomics of Natural Resources and the Environment systems will be compared with applications of centralist socialist economy. We will be concerned with delineating regional areas and fluctuations, and the role of innovations and technological change (Harvester Wheatsheaf 1990) planning. investigating the determinants of regional growth or decline, and in growth and fluctuations. Texts how these determinants might be altered by policy. Topics included References References are: regional accounts; regional macro models; factor mobility; Bowles, RA & Whynes, D.K. Daly, H.E. (ed) Harris, DJ. regional growth; techniques of regional analysis (e.g. export base Macroeconomic Planning (Allen & Unwin) Economics, &ology, Ethics (Freeman 1980) Capital Accumulation and Income Distribution (Routledge models, shift-share, input-output models, econometric models); Harris, & Taylor, G. 1978) EIlman,M. contemporary patterns of regional change in Australia; policy s. Resource Development and the Future ofAustralian Society Socialist Planning (Cambridge U.P.) issues. Kalecki, M. Soviet Planning Today (Cambridge U.P.) (CRES 1982) Selected Essays on the Dynamics ofthe Capitalist Economy References Johansson, P. (Cambridge U.P. 1971) ECON309 URBAN ECONOMICS lOcp Armstrong, H. & Taylor, J. The Economic Theory and Measurement ofEnvironmental Kregel,J. Regional Economics and Policy (Philip Allan 1987) Benefits (Cambridge U.P. 1987) Lecturer N. Jacobi Rate of Profit, Distribution and Growth. Two Views Beckman,M. Mishan, E.J. (Macmillan 1971) Prerequisites Economics II (ECON201) Location Theory (Random House 1968) The Economic Growth Debate An Assessment (1977) Lowe,A. Hours I-lf21ecture hours per week for one semester Brown, AJ. & Burrows, E.M. Nash, H. (ed) The Path ofEconomic Growth (Cambridge U.P 1976) Assessment To be determined Regional Economic Problems (Allen & Unwin 1977) Progress as ifSurvival Mattered (Friends of the Earth 1981) Oakley, A Schumpeter's Theory of Capitalist Motion (Edward Elgar Content Butler, GJ. & Mandeville, T.o. Seneca, J.J. & Taussig, M.K. 1990) lbis course provides a survey of the economicissues arising within Regional Economics: An Australian Introduction, (U.Q.P. Environmental Economics (Prentice-Hall 1984) Pasinetti, L the particular framework of the urban or metropolitan environment 1981) Simon,J. Growth and Income Distribution (Cambridge U.P. 1974) with emphasis on the major contemporary socio-economic issues: Gore,C. The Ultimate Resource (Martin Robertson 1981) poverty, crime, congestion, sprawl, slum development, and decline Regions in Question: Space, Development Theory and ECON314 TOPICS IN ECONOMIC lOcp in the quality of life. The course also includes discussion of the Regional Policy (Methuen 1984) Tietenbert, T. Environmental &NaturalResourceEconomics2ndedn (Scott DEVELOPMENT following topics: the relation of cities to the national and regional Hoover, E.M. and Giarratani, F. Foresman. 1988) Lecturers e.W. Stahl & H.W. Dick economy; central place theory and location analysis; housing and An Introduction to Regional Economics (Knopf 1984) land use theory; urban economic development and growth; urban U.S. Department of State (Council of Environmental Quality) 1980 Advisory Prerequisite Problems of Developing Countries sociology; urban planning; public policy and welfare. Isard, W. The Global 2000 Report to the President: Entering the Prerequisite Economics II (ECON201) Methods ofRegional Analysis (M.I. T. Press 1960) Twenty-first Century. Washington (Penguin 1982) References Hours 2 lecture hours per week Jensen, RC., Mandeville, T.D. et al World Commission on Environment and Development 1987 Bish, RL. & Nourse, H.O. Regional &onomic Planning (Croom Helm 1979) Our Common Future (Oxford U.P.) Examiflillion One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment UrbanEconomicsandPolicyAnalysis(McGraw-HillI975) McKee, D.L Dean, RD. et al (eds) Content Brown,D.M. Regional Economics (Free Press 1970) ECON312 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS lOcp Introduction to Urban &onomics, (Academic Press 1974) Topics include dual economy models, mobilisation of resources, Nourse, H.O. Lecturer C. Aislabie labour migration, industrialisation strategies in East and Southeast Edel, M. & Rothenburg, J. Regional Economics (McGraw-Hill 1968) II Asia, the Green Revolutionandthe underdevelopment of Australia's Readings in Urban Economics (Macmillan 1974) Prerequisite Economics (ECON201) Richardson, H.W. aboriginal population. H4sch, W.Z. Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Regional Economics (Illinois U.P.I979) References Urban &onomic Analysis (McGraw-Hill 1973) Examiflillion One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment Richardson, H.W. Ariff, M. & Hill, H. Leahy, W.H., McKee, D.L & Dean, R.D. Content Regional Growth Theory (Macmillan 1973) Export-Oriented Industrialisation: The ASEAN Experience Urban &onomics (Free Press 1970) The content of the course can be gauged from a perusal of the (Allen & Unwin 1985) Neutze,M. textbook. The application of statistical methods in a managerial Booth,A. Australian Urban Policy (Allen & Unwin 1978) context should be particularly noted. AgriculturalDevelopment in Indonesia (Allen & Unwin 1988) Perloff, H.S. & Wingo, L Text Gillis, M., Perkins, D. et al Issues in Urban Economics (Johns Hopkins U.P.) Peppers, LC. & Bails, D.G. Economics Of Development (Norton 1983) Managerial Economics (Prentice Hall 1987) 68 69 SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Hughes,H. References Available from lecturer ontheonehand, IIld thestatics ofWalras, Marshall,andthe marginalists ECON322 MONETARY THEORY lOcp Achieving Industrialisation in East Asia (Cambridge U.P. on the oIher. Lecturers P. Anderson & M.A. Hossain 1988) ECON317 ECONOMIC DOCTRINES lOcp References Prerequisite Economics II (ECON201) Meier, G.M. (ed) AND METHODS A Black, RD.C. et al (cds) Hours 2 lecture hours per week Leading Issues in Economic Development 5th edn (Oxford Lecturer B.LJ. Gordon The Marginal Revolution in Economics (Duke U.P. 1973) U.P.1988) Examination One 3 hour paper Prerequisites Economics II (ECON201) Blaug,M. Todaro, M.P. Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester &onomic Theory in Retrospect 4th edn (Cambridge U.P. Content Economic Development in the Third World 4th edn This coursebegins withanexaminationofthecontroversy concerning Examination One 2 hour paper, plus progressive assessment 1985) (Longman Cheshire 1988) the definition of money and proceeds to a bried overview of the Howard, M.C. & King, lE Content fmancial system. The classical, Keynesian and Monetarist theories The Political Economy ofMarx (Longman) ECON315 PUBLIC FINANCE lOcp The course deals with some of the schools and streams of ideas of the role of money in the economy are examined and compared, Lecturer C. Aislabie which stand behind modem Economics. Study of pre-modem Oakley,A. and their policy implications are analysed. Topics such as the Schumpeter's Theory of Capitalist Motion (Edward Elgar supply and demand for money and the relationship of the real and Prerequisites Economics II (ECON201) economic thought has a number of rationales including increased awareness of the ways in which major economists integrated their 1990) monetary sectors of the economy are considered in depth. Theories Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester ideas, and the opportunity to judge the present scope and Schumpeter, lA. of interest rates, such as the loanable funds approach and the Examination One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment preoccupations ofprofessional Economics from the perspectives of History ofEconomic Analysis (Oxford U.P. ) liquidity preference theory are studies, and alternative theories of the term structure of interest rates are examined. The Availability Content its former dimensions. Spiegel, H.W. Doctrine, a theory of interest rate policy, is analysed, and debt In the course we are concerned mainly with the classical political The Growth of &onomic Thought 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall The effects of govemmentintervention in the economy through the management policy is reviewed. The Monetarist, Keynesian and economy of the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries. 1971) budget and inter-governmental fiscal relationships are examined New Oassical views on inflation and unemployment are also Major emphasis is on the ideas of: Adam Smith; Thomas Malthus; At the microeconomiclevel, there is an analysis of the effects of tax David Ricardo and his followers; and, John Stuart Mill. Also, ECON319 ECONOMIC DOCTRINES lOcp examined and expenditure policies on, in particular, community welfare and attention is given to the types of economic analysis which preceded AND METHODS C Text To be advised incentives. At the macroeconomic level, aggregative models are the emergence of classical economics. This involves examination Lecturer To be advised References used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economic of Mercantilism; Physiocracy; and earlier ethical-legal systems. policies for stability and growth. Prerequisite Economics IT (ECON201) Corden, W. Texts Inflation, Exchange Rates, and the World Economy References Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Blaug,M. (OarendonI985) Brown, C.V. & Jackson, P.M. Examination One 2 hour paper, plus progressive assessment Economic Theory in Retrospect 4th edn (Cambridge U.P. Davis, K. & Lewis, M. (eds) Public Sector &onomics (Martin Robertson) Content 1985) Australian Monetary Economics (Longman Cheshire 1981) Buchanan, J.M. & Flowers, M.R The major topics in this course are the development of the thought Spiegel, H.W. Dornbusch, R & Fischer, S. The Public Finances (Irwin) of John Maynard Keynes, and the evolution of the Austrian school The Growth ofEconomic Though! 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall) Macroeconomics 4th edn (McGraw-Hill 1988) Groenewegen, P.D. (ed) of Economics. Keynes' ideas are followed through from early Hollander, S. Frenkel, J. & Johnson, H. (eds) Australian Taxation Policy (Longman Cheshire) works, The Economic Consequences of the Peace, and The Classical Economics (Basil Blackwell 1987) Economic Consequences ofMr Churchill, to the General Theory Monetary Approach to the Balance of Payments (Toronto Groenewegen, P.D. References and its aftermath. The treatment of the Austrians involves U.P.l976) Public Finance inAustralia: TheoryandPractice (Prentice consideration of the major works of the first generation - Menger, Hall) Gordon,B. Gordon, R. (ed) Economic Analysis Before AcUvn Smith (Macmillan 1975) von Wieser, and Bohm-Bawerk plus some of the leading ideas of Milton Friedman's Monetary Framework: A Debate with Houghton, R W. (ed) their successors including Mises and Hayek. his Critics (Chicago U.P. 1974) Public Finance (Penguin 1970) O'Brien, D.P. The Classical Economists (Oxford U.P.) References Laidler, D. Johansen, L The Demand for Money: Theories and Evidence (Dun Lowry, S. Todd (ed) Backhouse, RA. Public &onomics (North Holland 1965) Donnelley 1985) Pre-Classical Economic Though! (Kluwer) A History ofModem Economic Analysis (Basil Blackwell) Mishan, EJ. Blaug,M. Nichols, L. & Smith E. Cost-Benefit Analysis (Allen & Unwin 1982) ECON318 ECONOMIC DOCTRINES lOcp &onomic Theory in Retrospect 4th edn (Cambridge U.P. Money and Banking (Nelson 1989) Musgrave, RA. & P.B. AND METHODS B 1985) Ritter, S. & Silber, W.L Public Finance in Theory andPractice (McGraw-Hill 1984) Lecturer To be advised Fitzgibbons, A. PrinciplesofMoney,Ban/cingandFinancialMarkets3rdedn (Basic Books 1980) Shoup,C.S. Prerequisites Economics IT (ECON201) Keynes's Vision (Clarendon 1988) Public Finance (Weidenfeld & Nicolson) Stein,J. Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Reekie, W. D. Markets, Entrepreneurs and Liberty: an Austrian View of Monetarist, KeynesianandNew Classical Economics (Basil ECON316 AUSTRALIAN PUBLIC FINANCE lOcp Examination One 2 hour paper, plus progressive assessment Capitalism (Whea1sheaf 1984) Blackwell 1982) Lecturer C. Aislabie Content Spiegel, H.W. ECON323 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS lOcp Prerequisite Public Finance (ECON315) The topics in this courseofferanirtroWction to a variety of contrasting The Growth ofEconomic Though! 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall) AND POLICY Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester approaches to ecooomic analysis. Those topics inc1ude: theecooomics Shackle, G.L.S. ofKadMarx; thedevelopmentofbusiresscycle theory; the matginalist Lecturer P. Anderson Examination One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment The Years ofHigh Theory (Cambridge U.P. 1967) revolution; Walrasilll general equilibrium; and, Marshallian partial Prerequisite Monetary Theory (ECON322) Content equilibrium. Amongthe conIIasts the mostfundamemJ. is thal between Hours 2 lecture hours per week As Public Finance, with more explicit Australian content. the dysfunctional, dynamic em{ilases of MalX and the cycle theorists, Examination One 3 hour paper 70 71 SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS Content References ECON331 LABOUR ECONOMICS II lOcp ECON341 ECONOMETRICS III lOcp This course examines the Australian flnancial system in detail, Brny, M. & Taylor, V. Lecturers B. Hughes and W.F. Mitchell Offered Semester II considering themainflnancialinstitutions and malkets. Thechanging Managing Labour? (McGrnw-Hill1986) Prerequisites Labour Economics I (ECON330) Lecturers To be advised structure and operation of the fmancial system are considered Deery, S. & Plowman, D. Particular attention is given to recent report on the Australian Hours 2 one hour lectures per week and a fortnightly tutorial. Prerequisite Econometrics II (ECON340) Australian Industrial Relations (McGraw-Hill 1985) flnancial system - such as the Campbell Report, and the Martin Examination End of semester examination and progressive Hours 2 lecture hours Review, andrecentdevelopmentinfmancing. A secondmaintheme ECON326 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS I1IB lOcp assessment. Examinations One2 hour examination plus progressive assessment is the review of Australian monetary, and broader financial, policy Content in the post World War II period. Lecturer D. Macdonald, R. Green and J. Fisher Content A modem and comprehensive analysis of major topics in wage Texts To be advised Prerequisite Industrial Relations lIlA (ECON325) Single equation econometric models are extended to systems of determination, inflation, employment theory, poverty and equations, including recessive systems, Zellner's SURE systems References Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester underprivilege, income distribution and work-place organisation. and simultaneous econometric models. Estimation and forecasting Hicks, J.R. & Wheller, D. (eds.) Examination One 2 hour paper plus assignments The treatment will emphasise the theoretical, empirical and policy of simultaneous econometric models and dynamic time series Money and Capital Markets in Australia (Harcourt Brnce Content perspectives of each topic. Especial attention will be given to the models is investigated Jovanovich 1990) natural rate hypothesis and hysteresis, worker compensation Most of this course will take a comparative perspective to the study arrnngements (proflt sharing versus wage payments), the role of Texts As for Econometrics II (ECON340) Davis, K. & Lewis, M. (eds) ofindustrial relations. Australianindustrialrelations will be critically education in earnings determination, discrimination and job Australian Monetary Economics (Longman Cheshire 1981) examined against the backdrop of the institutions and processes that instability, trnde unions and productivity, and rndical and orthodox ECON342 APPLIED ECONOMETRICS II lOcp Moore, D. et al predominate in anumberof other countries including Great Britain, theories of the evolution of structural labour markets. Offered Semester II Financial Institutions and Markets (Serendip 1988) the United States and Japan. Text Lecturers To be advised Rowan, D.C. Texts King, I.E. Prerequisite Applied Econometrics L(ECON242), Econometrics AustralianMonetary Policy 1950-75 (Allen & Unwin 1980) Dufty, N.F. & Fells, R.E. Labour Economics: An Australian Perspective (Macmillan I (ECON241), Applied Decision Anaylsis (ECON212), Advanced Warner, B. DynamicsoflndustrialRelalions in Australia (Prentice Hall 1990) Statistical Analysis (ECON215) or Applied Econometrics Australia's Financial Markets: An Introduction (Allen & 1989) References (ECON213). Unwin 1989) References A list of references will be distributed in the first lecture. Hours 2 lecture hours, one tutorial hour A.G.P.S. Ford, G.w. et al (eds) Examination One 2 hour examination and progressive assessment The Australian Financial System Inquiry Interim and Australian Labour Relalions: Readings 4th edn (Macmillan Final Reports (Government Printer 1980,1981) 1987) ECON340 ECONOMETRICS II IOcp Content A.G.P.S. Bamber, G. & Lansbury, R. (eds) Offered Semester I Furthertesting of applied econometric models is covered, including The Australian Financial System Report of the Review International and Comparative Industrial Relations (Allen Lecturers To be advised distributed lags, diagnostic checking model selection and Group (Government Printer 1983) & Unwin 1987) Prerequisite Econometrics I (ECON241), Applied Econometrics speciflcation, econometric forecasting, time series analysis and (ECON213) or Advanced Statistical Analysis (ECON215) simultaneous equation models (with special reference to Australian ECON325 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IlIA lOcp models). Extensive use is made of 'SHAZAM' and the 'dx' data ECON330 LABOUR ECONOMICS I lOcp Hours 2 lecture hours Lecturer To be advised base. Lecturers B. Hughes and W.F. Mitchell Examination One 2 hour examination plus progressive assessment Prerequisite Industrial Relations lIB (lR202) Text To be advised Prerequisites Introductory Labour Economics (ECON230) and Content References As for Applied Econometrics I (ECON242) Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Economics II (ECON201). This course is also available to students This is a course in econometric theory which investigates the Examination One 2 hour paper plus assignments who have passed the old ECON206 or ECON207. consequences of violating the classical assumptions of the General ECON343 MATHEMATICALECONOMICSB lOcp Content Hours 2 one hour lectures per week and a fortnightly tutorial. Linear Model. Topics include non-spherical disturbances, Offered Semester I This course builds on the material presented in Industrial Relations Examination End of semester examination and progressive multicollinearity, dummy variable maximum likelihood estimation, II and takes a more theoretical perspective. Lectures and tutorials assessment. time series models, cointergration, models of expectations, errors in Lecturers To be advised will be devoted to topics including consensus and conflict models Content variables, qualitative dependent variables. Prerequisite Mathematical Economics A (ECON243) of industrial relations, theories of trade unionism, managerialism, Texts Issues relating to the supply of work (participation rates, overtime Hours 2 lecture hours alienation and industrial conflict. premia, hidden unemployment), the demand for labour (short-term Judge, G., Carter-Hill, R et al Examination One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment Attention is devoted to workplace industrial relations after which employment functions, on costs and quasi-fixed costs) and the Introduction to the Theory and Practice of Econometrics Content the focus shifts to comparative issues such as industrial democracy, matching process (search theory and unemployment benefits, stocks (Wiley 1988) occupational health and safety and the role of women. and flows in the labour market, Beveridge curves). Johnston, J. This course is designed to extend the application of mathematical tools used in economics and econometrics. The topics dealt with Texts Text &onometric MetJuxis 3rd edn (McGrnw-Hill1987) include the solution of ftrst and second order difference and Dufty, N. & Fells, R. King, I.E. References differential equations and their economic applications, game theory, DynamicsoflndustrialRelalions in Australia (Prentice Hall Labour Economics: An Australian Perspective (Macmillan Maddala, G.S. revision of linear programming and introduction to non-linear 1989) 1990) Introduction to Econometrics (Macmillan 1988) programming and an introduction to network analysis and maIi<:ov Ford, G.W. et al (eds) References Pindyck, R.S. & Rubinfeld, D.L chains. Australian Labour Relalions: Readings 4th edn (Macmillan A list of references will be distributed in the first lecture. Econometric Models and Economic Forecasts (McGrnw Text To be advised 1987) Hill) Plowman, D. & Ford, G.W. Australian Trade Unions 2nd edn (Macmillan 1989) 72 73 SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS PRINCIPAL DATES 1991 References Subjects Archibald, G.C. & lipsey, RG. Students may choose from subjects and topics currently offered at An Introduction to a Mathematical Treatment ofEconomics the third and fourth year level by the Department of Economics. (Weidenfeld & Nicholson) Topics offered at the fourth year level include: Beale, E. Econometrics N Mathematical Programming in Practice Macroeconomic Analysis Bressler, B. Microeconomic Analysis A Unified Introduction to MathematicalEconomics (Harper Labour Economics ill & Row) Issues in Australian Economic History Casson,M. Additionally, up to 2 semester units from suitable programmes Introduction to Mathematical Economics (Nelson) offered by other Departments may be taken, subject to approval Chiang, A. from the Head of Department of Economics. Fundamental Methods of Mathematical Economics (McGraw-Hill) ECON404 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IV 40cp Gandolfo, G. ECON405 40cp Mathematical Methods and Models in Economic Dynamics Full-time candidates will enrol in ECON404 and ECON405. GENERAL INFORMATION (North Holland) Part-time candidates will enrol in ECON404 in the first year and Glaister, S. ECON405 in the second year. Mathematical Methods for Economists (Basil Blackwell) Prerequisites As listed in Schedule Principal Dates 1991 September (See separate entry for Faculty of Medicine) 30 Monday Mid Semester recess begins Gordon, G. & Pressman, I. Content 30 Monday Closing date for UAC applications for enrolment in 1992 Quantitative Decision Making for Business (Prentice-Hall) January For students enrolled in BEc: (Undergraduate courses other than Medicine) Hadley,G. Tuesday Public Holiday - New Year's Day (a) Industrial Relations and Policy; and October Non-Linear and Dynamic Programming 4 Friday Last day for return of &!roIment Application 7 Monday Public Holiday - Labour Day Haeussler, E.F. & Paul, RS. (b) Either Macroeconomic Analysis or Microcconomic Analysis; Fonns - Continuing Students and 14 Monday Lectures resurne Introductory Mathematical Analysis (Prentice Hall) February November (c) Two of the following: 8 Friday New students accept UAC main round offer Intriligator, M.D. 1 Friday Second Semester concludes Mathematical Optimisation and Economic Theory Labour Economics ill 6 Wednesday Re-enrolment Approval Sessions for re-enrolling students 4 Monday Annual Examinations begin TO Advanced Employment Law Takayama, A. 14 Thursday 22 Friday Annual Examinations end Mathematical Economics Contemporary Issues in Industtial Relations 25 Monday First Semester begins 1991 February Weber,J.A. Workplace Industtial Relations Mathematical Analysis March 24 Monday First Tenn begins' Any Economics N topic 31 Friday Last day for a) variation of program in relation to HECS liability for Semester I, b) addition of Semester I and full year DATES FOR THE 1991 ACADEMIC YEAR FOR TIlE BACHELOR OF Topics offered by the Departments of History ,Management l\IEDICINE PROGRAM ECON401 ECONOMICS IV 40cp subjects, and c) withdrawal without academic penalty from Semester I or Sociology and approved by the Head of the Department Subjects. ECON402 40cp Year I of Economics; and 29 Friday Good Friday - Easter Recess commences Semester 1 commences Monday 25 February, 1991 Full-time candidates will enrol in ECON401 and ECON402. recess Friday 29 March, 1991 (d) A research thesis of approximately 20,000 words April Part-time candidates will enrol in ECON401 in the first year and to For students enrolled in BCom: 8 Monday Lectures resurne Friday 5 April, 1991 ECON402 in the second year. resumes Monday 8 April, 1991 (a) Industrial Relations and Policy; and 25 Thursday Public Holiday - Anzac Day Prerequisite As listed in Schedule concludes Friday 28 June, 1991 June (b) Three of the following: Monday 15 July, 1991 Content Semester 2 commences 7 Friday First Semester concludes recess Monday 30 Sept, 1991 Labour Economics ill Students may choose from one of the following programmes: 10 Monday Public Holiday - Queen's Birthday to Friday 11 October, 1991 Advanced Employment Law 11 Tuesday Examinations begin Programme I (Honours by coursework): Under this programme resumes Monday 14 October, 1991 the student would be required to take 8 semester subjects. Contemporary Issues in Industrial Relations 28 Friday Examinations end concludes Friday 1 November, 1991 Programme II (Honours by coursework and research essay): Workplace Industtial Relations July Examinations commence Monday 4 November, 1991 Under this programme the student would be required to take 6 1 Closing date for applications for selection to the Bachelor of Medicine in conclude Friday 15 November, 1991 Any economics N topic Monday 18 November, 1991 semester topics and submit a research essay not to exceed 10,000 1992. Mini-Elective commences Topics offered by the Departments of History ,Management concludes Friday 29 November, 1991 words. 15 Monday Second Semester begins or Sociology and approved by the I-lead of the Department Programme ill (Honours by coursework and thesis): Under this of Economics; and August programme the student would be required to take 4 semester topics 31 Last day for a) variation of program in relation to IIECS liability for NOTE: (c) A research thesis of approximately 20,000 words and submit a thesis not to exceed 20,000 words. Semester II, b) addition of Semester II subjects, and c) withdrawal without Semester One consists of Block One (10 weeks) and 7 weeks ofBlock Two. academic penalty from Semester II and full year subjects. Semester Two consi,1s of the remaining 3 weeks of Block Two and all of Each student's programme must have the approval of the Head of Block Three (10 weeks). Department upon recommendation by the Departmental Board. , Date yet to be jifltllised 74 ADVICE AND INFORMATION ADVICE AND INFORMATION Vear Two Elective Sept 30 - Nov 22 Sweeks STUDENTS WITH SPECIAL NEEDS Enrolment Approval The University of Newcastle has a policy to provide equal opportunity All re-enrolling students are required to attend at the Great Hall on a Semester One commences Monday 25 February, 1991 Final Assessment Nov 25 - Nov 29 1 week recess Friday 29 March, 1991 to students with Special Needs. specific date and time during the period 6 to 14 February 1991. to Advice and Information If you have a disability of any fonn and feel you need some additional Enrolment Approval dates are on posters on University Noticeboards Friday 5 April, 1991 assistance, please do not hesitate to contact one of the following: and are included in the enrolment kits issued to students in October. resumes Monday 8 April, 1991 Advice and infonnation on matters concerning the Faculties of the When attending fOl" Enrolment Approval students will collect their 1991 AcademIc AdvIsers concludes Friday 28 June, 1991 University can be obtained from a number of people. confirmation of program and student card. Any variations to the proposed Semester Two Administration and Technology Mr Peter Summons commences Monday 15 July, 1991 program require approval. Enrolments in tutorial 01" laboratory sessions Architecture Mr Arthur Kingsland recess Monday 30 Sept, 1991 Faculty/School Secretaries may be arranged. and Staff from academic Departments will be available Arts Ass/Prof Don Barthofer to For general enquiries about University regulations, Faculty/School rules to answer enquiries. Friday 11 October, 1991 Economics & Commerce Ms Jo Bentley-Cooper and policies, studies within the University and so on, students may Payment of Charges resumes Monday 14 October, 1991 consult: Faculty of Education Dr Bill Warren concludes Friday 1 November, 1991 School of Education Ms Margaret Davies The re-enrolment kit issued to re-enrolling students includes a Fees and Faculty Examinations commence Monday 4 November, 1991 Engineering Dr David Wood Charges Notice. The 1991 General Service Charges must be paid at any Architecture conclude Friday 10 November, 1991 Ms Jill Norburn Health Ms Patricia Jacobs Westpac Bank branch using the Fees and Charges Notice. The Westpac Mini-Elective commences Monday 18 November, 1991 Arts Mr David Donnelly Medicine Dr David Powis Bank will only accept payments up until and including 8 March 1991. concludes Friday 29 November, 1991 Economics & Mrs Linda Harrigan Science & Mathematics Ass/ProfWarren Brisley All charges listed On the Fees and Charges Notice (including any debts Commerce NOTE: Ms Nat8Jie Downing Visual and Performing Arts Mr John Prescott outstanding to the University) must be paid. The Bank will not accept Student DIvIsIon Semester One consists of Block Four (10 weeks) and 7 weeks of Block Five. Education Mr Peter Day Mrs Sandra Box part payment. Auchmuty LIbrary Semester Two consists of the remaining 3 weeks ofBlock Five and all of Engineering Mr Geoff Gordon Ms Alicia Hardy Block Six (10 weeks). Ms Jiii Norburn Ms Anne Robinson LATE PAYMENT Student Representative Council Ms Ruth Garde Medicine Mr Brian Kelleher The Final date for payment of the General Service Charge is S March Vear Three UnIversIty Computing Services Mr John Lambert Science & Ms Helen Hotchkiss 1991, payments made after this date mustbe made direct to the University Block 7 Feb 11 - May3 12 weeks: 11 week term Mathematics Cashier and will incur a $50 late fee. 1 week A VCC/Easter ENROLMENT OF NEW UNDERGRADUATE STUDENTS Music Mr Chris Palmer Thereafter enrolment will be cancelled if charges remain Vacation 29/3-5/4 Persons offered enrolment are required to attend in person at the Great BlockS May 6 unpaid by 31 March. June2S Sweeks School Hall in February to enrol. Detailed instructions are given in the Offer of Vacation July 1 July 12 2 weeks (AVCC common Administration Susan EadeIJennie Gow Enrolment booklet which is sent out with the UAC offer. week) STUDENT CARDS and Technology Block 9 July 15 Sept 13 9 weeks: S week term Health Ms Jenny Hughes TRANSFER OF COURSE When attending fOl" Enrolment Approval, students will be given their 1 week review 9/9-13/9 Mr Maurice Chalmers Students currently enrolled in an undergraduate course who wish to Confirmation of Program and Student Card. The Student Card should be Stuvac Sept 16 - Sept 20 1 week Education Mr Chandra Murti transfer to a different undergraduate course (excluding Medicine) must carried by students when at the University as evidence ofenrolment. The Assessment Sept23 - Oct 11 3 weeks Ms Katrina Booth-Kittel complete an Application for Course Transfer form and lodge it with their Student Card has machine readable lettering for use when borrowing Vacation Oct 14 Oct IS 1 week Ms Irene Blyth enrolment form to the Admissions and Enrolment Branch of the Student books from the University Library, and contains the student's interim Elective Oct 21 Dec 13 8 weeks Visual and Sheila Proust/Glenda Hadley Division by 19 December 1990. password for access to facilities of the Computing Centre. Please note Vear Four Performing Arts Ms Vicki Drewe that the Student Card will not be activated until the General Service If a studen t' s request to tran sfer to another course is successful, the Clinical Attachment 1a Feb 4 Mar 15 Charge has been paid. 6 weeks student must complete a separate Higher Education Contribution Scheme Clinical Attachment 1b Mar IS For enquiries regarding particular studies within a faculty, school or May 3 6 week term plus (HECS) Payment Option fonn for the new course. Students are urged to take good care of their Student Card. If the card is 1 week A VCC/Easter department Sub-deans, Deans, Course Coordinators or Departmental lost or destroyed, there is a service charge of $5 payable befOl"e the card Vacation 29/3-5/4 Heads (see staff section) should be contacted. RE·ENROLMENT BY CONTINUING STUDENTS will be replaced. Vacation May 6 - May 10 1 week A student who withdraws completely from studies should return the Clinical Attachment 2a May 13- June 21 Accommodation Officer Mrs Kath Dacey There are four steps involved for re-enrolment by continuing students: 6 weeks Student Card to the Student Division Office. Clinical Attachment 2b June 24 - Aug 2 6 weeks located in the temporary buildings opposite Mathematics. • collection of the re-enrolment kit • lodging the Enrolment Application form with details of Vacation Aug 5 - Aug 16 2 weeks Careers and Student Employment Office RE·ADMISSION AFTER ABSENCE your proposed program Clinical Attachment 3a Aug 19 - Sept 27 6 weeks Ms Helen Parker • attendance at the Great Hall for enrolment approval, and A person wishing to resume an undergraduate degree course who has Clinical Attachment 3b Sept30 - Nov S 6 weeks Ms Kate Gemmell • payment of the General Service Charge at any Westpac Bank by been enrolled previously at the University of Newcastle, but not enrolled GP Period Nov 11 - located in the temporary buildings opposite Mathematics. Nov 20 One and a half weeks 8 March 1991. in1990, is required to apply for admission again through the Universities (inclusive) Counselling Service Admissions Centre, Locked Bag 500 Lidcombe 2141. Application Stuvac Nov 21 (Students who are in research higher degree programs or external studies Nov 29 One and a half weeks located on the courtyard level Library building forms may be obtained from the UAC or from the Student Division located in the Hunter Building programs re-enrol by mail). Assessmenl Dec 2 Dec 6 1 week Office and close with the UAC on 28 September each year. There is a $50 Re·Enrolment KIts Health Service Shortland UnIon fee for late applications. Not.: Years3,4 & 5 do not conform with the University ofNewcastle·sSemester located in the basement of the Union Building. Re-enrolment kits for 1991 will be available for collection in October. dates. The re-enrolment kit contains the student's Enrolment Application Health Service Hunter UnIon ATTENDANCE STATUS Year Five located in Student Services, Hunter Building. form, the 1991 Class Timetable, the Fees and Charges Notice for 1991, A candidate for any qualification other than a postgraduate qualification Clinical Attachment 1 Feb 4 Mar 22 7 weeks Student Loans Statistics form and re-enrolment instructions. who is enrolled in three quarters or more of a normal full-time program LodgIng Enrolment Appllcatlon Forms Clinical Attachment 2 Mar 25 May 10 7 weeks located in the temporary buildings opposite Mathematics. shall be deemed to be a full-time student whereas a candidate enrolled The Enrolment Application form must be completed carefully and (Easter 29/3-2/4) in either a part-time course or less than three-quarters of a full-time lodged at the Student Division Office by 4 January 1991. Students Assessment May 13- May 17 1 week program shall be deemed to be a part-time student. should know their examination results before completing the re-enrolment Vacation May 20 - May 24 1 week form ..There is no late charge payable if the fonn is late, but it is very A candidate for a postgraduate qualification shall enrol as either a full Clinical Attachment 3 May27 - July 12 7 weeks important that the Enrolment Application fonn is lodged by 4 January time or a part-time student as determined by the Faculty Board. Clinical Attachment 4 July 15 - 30 Aug 7 weeks 1991 as late lodgement will mean that enrolment approval may not be Stuvac Sept 2 - Sept 6 1 week available at the re-enrolment approval sessions. Assessment Sept 9 - Sept 20 2 weeks 2nd Assessment Sept23 - Sept 27 1 week ii iii ADVICE AND INFORMATION EXAMINATIONS CHANGE OF ADDRESS LEAVE OF ABSENCE EXAMINATIONS (d) no candidate shall leave the examination room during the frrst Students are responsible for notifying the Student Division Office in A student who does not wish to re-enrol may write to the Academic thirty minutes or the last ten minutes of the examination; Tests and assessments may be held in any subject from time to time. In writing ofany change in their address. A Change ofAddress form should Registrar and ask for leave of absence. Leave of absence is normally the assessment ofastudent' s progress in a university course, consideration (e) no candidate shall re-enter the examination room after leaving it be used and is available from the Student Division Office. granted only to those students who are in good standing. Applications will be given to laboratory work, tutorials and assignments and to any unless during the full period of that absence the candidate has been should be submitted before the end of the first week of first semester. Failure to notify changes could lead to important correspondence or term or other tests conducted throughout the year. The results of such under approved supervision; Leave of absence will not be granted for more than one year and will not course information notreaching the studenl The University cannot accept assessments and class work may be incorporated with those of formal (f) a candidate shall not bring into the examination room any bag, be granted retrospectively. responsibility if official communications fail to reach a student who has written examinations. paper, book, written material, device or aid whatsoever, other than not notified the Student Division Office of a change of address. In the case of the B.Med. degree the following applies: such as may be specified for the particular examination; EXAMINATION PERIODS CHANGE OF NAME at the completion of an academic year, a candidate whose (g) a candidate shall not by any means obtain or endeavour to obtain performance is deemed by the Faculty Board to be satisfactory Formal written examinations take place on prescribed dates within the improper assistance with work, give or endeavour to give assistance Students who change their name should advise the Student Division may be granted leave of absence under such conditions as the following periods, Saturdays may be included: to any other candidate, or commit any breach of good order; Office. A marriage or deed poll certificate should be presented for Faculty Board may determine. Such leave will not normally be Mid Year: 10 to 28 June, 1991 (h) a candidate shall not take from the examination room any sighting in order that the change can be noted on University records. granted for more than one year. examination answer book, graph paper, drawing paper or other End of Year: 4 to 22 November, 1991 In the case of degree and diploma courses offered by the Faculty of CHANGE OF PROGRAM material issued for use during the examination; Music,the following applies: Timetables showing the time and place at which individual examinations (i) no candidate may smoke in the examination room. Approval must be sought for any changes to the program for which a will beheld will be posted on the examinations notice board near Lecture leave of absence is granted to a student once and then only for a student has enrolled. This includes adding or withdrawing subjects. Theatre B (opposite the Great Hall). Consideration is currently being Any infringement of these rules constitutes an offence against discipline. maximum of one year. The rationale behind this rule is to ensure that given to location of other official noticeboards on the campus. All proposed changes should be entered on the Program Variation students maintain their music skills at a high standard during their EXAMINATION RESULTS section on thereversesideofyour Program Com/irmation form. Reasons course of study. Extended periods ofleave (greater than 12 months) Misreading of the timetable will not under any circumstances be for changes and where appropriate documentary evidence in the form of may mean a student may require remedial tuition before returning to accepted as an excuse for failure to attend an examination. End of year examination results will be mailed out by mid December. medical or other appropriate certificates must be submitted. full-time study. Leave of absence is given only in exceptional Examination results for Semester I subjects will be mailed out by the circumstances. SITTING FOR EXAMINATIONS Friday before Semester II begins. WITIIDRA WAL Application for re-admission to undergraduate degree courses after Formal examinations, where prescribed, are compulsory. Students should No results will be given by telephone. Application to withdraw from a subject should be made on the Program leave of absence must be made direct to the University. consult the fmal timetable in advance to find out the date, time and place After the release of both Semester I and end of year examination results Variation section on the reverse side of your Program Conjirlr.Jltion of their examinations and should allow themselves plenty of time to get a student may apply to have a result reviewed. There is a charge per form and lodged at the Student Division Office or mailed to the ATTENDANCE AT CLASSES to the examination room so that they can take advantage of the 10 subject, which is refundable in the event of an error being discovered. Academic Registrar. minutes reading time that is allowed before the examination commences. However, it should be noted that examination results are released only Where a student's attendance or progress has not been satisfactory, Normally entry into the examination room will be permitted from 15 Applications received by the appropriate date listed below will be after careful assessment of students' performances and that, amongst action may be taken under the Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory minutes before the actual commencement of the examination writing approved for withdrawal without a failure being recorded against the Progress. other things, marginal failures are reviewed before results are released. subject or subjects in question. time. This is to allow the candidate time to locate the allocated seat and In the case of illness or absence for some other unavoidable cause, a complete the necessary attendance slip and any related necessary SPECIAL CONSIDERATION Withdrawal Dates student may be excused for non attendance at classes. registration details before the commencement of reading time. During reading time no writing will be permitted. The seat allocation list for All applications for special coosideration should be made on the First Semester Second Semester/FuU Year All applications for exemption from attendance at classes must be made examinations will be placed on the Noticeboard of the Department Application for Special Consideration form. Relevant evidence should Subjects Subjects in writing to the Head of the Departmentoffering the subject. Where tests running the subject, and on a noticeboard outside the examination room. be attached to the application (see Regulation 12(2) of the Examination 31 March 1991 31 August 1991 or term examinations have been missed, this fact should be noted in the A complete day seat listing will also be displayed in the GreatHall Foyer. Regulations, Calendar Volume 1). Also refer to Faculty Policy. application. Withdrawal after the above dales will "ormally lead to a failure being Students can take into any examination any writing instrument, drawing Application forms for Special Consideration are available from recorded against the subject or subjects u"less the Dea" ofthe Faculty The granting of an exemption from attendance at classes does not carry instrument or eraser. Logarithmic tables may not be taken in: !hey will Admissions and Enrolments Office, Examinations and Services foyer grants permissio"for the student to withdraw without a failure being with it any waiver of the General Services Charge. be available from the supervisor if needed. Calculators are only allowed and the University Health Service. Before a student's application for recorded. if specified as a permitted aid. They must be hand held, battery operated special consideration will be considered on the ground of personal If a student believes that a failure should not be recorded because of the GENERAL CONDUCT and non-programmable7 and students should note that no concession illness it will be necessary for a medical certificate to be furnished in the circumstances leading to his or her withdrawal, it is important that full In accepting membership of the University, students undertake to will be granted: form set out on the Application. details of these circumstances be provided with the application to observe the by-laws and other requirements of the University. (a) to a student who is prevented from bringing into a room a If a student is affected by illness during an examination and wishes to ask withdraw. Students are expected to conduct themselves at all times in a seemly programmable calculator; for special consideration, he or she must report to the supervisor in fashion. Smoking is not permitted during lectures, in examination rooms (b) to a student who uses a calculator incorrectly; or charge of the examination and then make written application to the ENROLMENT CONFIRMATION or in the University Library. Gambling is forbidden. Academic Registrarwithin three days ofthe examination (see Regulation (c) because of battery failure. 12(3) of !he Examination Regulations, Calendar Volume I). Also refer Students should ensure that all details on their Program C on/irmation Members of the academic staff of the University, senior administrative to Faculty Policy. form are correcl Failure tocheck this information could create problems officers, and other persons authorised for the purpose have authority to RULES FOR FORMAL EXAMINATIONS at examination time. Please note that it is the student's responsibility to report on disorderly or improper conduct occurring in the University. Applicants for special consideration should note that as the University Regulation 15 of the Examination Regulations sets down the rules for ensure that all enrolment details are correct doesnothaveaformal special examination period, any further assessment formal examinations, as follows: NOTICES required will be determined and organised by the Department offering (a) candidates shall comply with any instructions given by a supervisor the subject concerned. The evidence presented should state the reason FAILURE TO PAY OVERDUE DEBTS Official University notices are displayed on the notice boards and relating to the conduct of the examination; why the applicant was unable to attend an examination or how preparation students are expected to be acquainted with the contents of those Any student who is indebted to the University by reason ofnon-payment for an examination was disrupted. If the evidence is in the form of a of any fee or charge, non-payment of any fine imposed, or who has failed announcements which concern them. (b) before the examination begins candidates shall not read the medical certificate the Doctor should state the nature of the disability and to pay any overdue debts shall not be permitted to: examination paper until granted permission by the supervisor A notice board on the wall opposite the entrance to Lecture Theatre B is which shall be given ten minutes before the stariofthe examination; specify that the applicant was unfit to attend an examination on a • complete enrolment in a following year; used for the specific purpose of displaying examination time-tables and particular day or could attend but that the performance of the applicant • receive a transcript of academic record; other notices about examinations. (c) no candidate shall enter the examination room after thirty minutes would be affected by the disability. If the period of disability extends • graduate or be awarded a Diploma; or from the time the examination has begun; beyond one day the period should be stated. • receive a replacement Student ID Card until such debts are paid. 7 A programmable calculator may be permilled ifprescribed, provided Students are requested to pay any debts incurred without delay. that program cards and devices are not taken into the examination room and the Head of Department approves. iv v UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS CHARGES TRANSCRIPTS OF ACADEMIC RECORD (4) A student whose enrolment in a subject is terminated under this (2) The Committee shall not make any decision pursuant toregulation (c) Replacement of Re-enrohnent kit $10 Regulation shall be deemed to have failed the subject If you wish to be issued with a transcript of your academic record, you 6 (I) (b) or (c) of these Regulations unless it has first given to the (d) Replacement of Student Card $5 must complete the appropriate application form and lodge it with the student the opportunity to be heard in person by the Committee. University Cashier along with the appropriate fee. The transcript will be 3.(1) A Faculty Board may review the academic performance of a (e) Statement of Matriculation Status (3) A student may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor against any decision mailed out as soon as it becomes available, to the nominated address. student who does not maintain a rate of progress considered for non-member of the University $10 made by the Admissions Committee under this Regulation. Applicants should allow adequate time for this to occur. Computer satisfactory by the Faculty Board and may determine: (0 (i) Academic Transcripts, minimum 2 copies $10 produced transcripts can normally be mailed within a week. Transcripts (ii) Each additional copy $1 (a) that the student be permitted to continue the course; 7. Where there is an appeal against any decision of the Admissions involving pre 1979 records might be expected to take longer to produce. (b) that the student be permitted to continue the course subject Committee made under Regulation 6 of these Regulations, the Vice Note: Indebted applicants must clear their debt before transcripts can be to such conditions as the Faculty Board may decide; Chancellor may refer the matter back to the Admissions Committee with issued. (i) Graduands will be providcd with two copies of their transcript a recommendation or shall arrange for the appeal to be heard by the (c) that the student be excluded from further enrohnent: free upon notification of eligibility to graduate. Council. The Council may confirm the decision of the Admissions UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS (i) in the course; or (ii) Transcripts will be issued free to other institutions or employ Committee or may substitute for it any other decision which the (ii) in the course and any other course offered in the The University has adopted Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory Admissions Committee is empowered to make pursuant to these ers nominated by the student. Faculty; or Progress which are set out below. 4. Indebted Students (iii) in the Faculty; or RegUlations. All charges, including debts outstanding to the University, must be paid Students who become liable for action under the Regulations will be (d) if the Faculty Board considers its powers to deal with the before or upon enrolment - part payment of total amount due will not informed accordingly by mail after the release of the End of Year 8.(1) A student who has been excluded from further enrohnent in a case are inadequate, that the case be referred to the Admissions examination results and will be informed of the procedure to be followed Faculty may enrol in a course in another Faculty only with the be accepted. Committee together with arecommendation for such action as if they wish to 'show cause'. permission of the Faculty Board of that Faculty and on such the Faculty Board considers appropriate. conditions as it may determine after considering any advice from METHOD OF PAYMENT Appeals against exclusion must be lodged together with Enrohnent (2) Before a decision is made under regulation 3 (I) (b) (c) or (d) of the Dean of the Faculty from which the student was excluded. Students are requested to pay charges due at any Westpac Bank up to and Application forms by Friday 4 January 1991. these Regulations the student shall be given an opportunity to (2) A student who has been excluded from further enrohnent in any including 8 March 1991. After 8 March 1991 payment of charges will The Faculty's progress requirements are set out elsewhere in this make representations with respect to the matter either in person or course, Faculty or from the University under these Regulations incur a $50 late fee and should be paid direct to the University Cashier. volume. in writing or both. may apply for permission to enrol therein again provided that in The Cashier's Office is located on 1st Floor McMullin Building and on (3) A student may appeal against any decision made under regulation no case shall such re-enrolment commence before the expiration A Level, Hunter Building. Regulations Governing Unsatisfactory Progress 3 (I) (b) or ( c) of these Regulations to the Admissions Committee of two academic years from the date of the exclusion. A decision 1.(1) These Regulations are made in accordance with the powers vested which shall determine the matter. on such application shall be made: IDGHER EDUCA nON CONTRIBUTION SCHEME (HECS) in the Council under By-law 5.1.2. (a) by the Faculty Board, where the student has been The Higher Education Contribution Scheme (HECS) was introduced in 4. Where the progress of a student who is enrolled in a combined course (2) These Regulations shall apply to all students of the University excluded from a single course or a single Faculty; or 1989 by the Federal Government to supplement the funding of higher or who has previously been excluded from enrolment in another course education in Auslralia. It requires conlributions to be made by students except those who are candidates for a degree of Master or Doctor. (b) by the Admissions Committee, in any other case. or Faculty is considered by the Faculty Board to be unsatisfactory, the towards the cost of their higher education undertaken from the start of (3) In these Regulations, unless thecontextor subject matter otherwise Faculty Board shall refer the matter to the Admissions Committee 1989. 9.(1) A student whose application to enrol pursuant to Regulation 8 (I) indicates or requires: together with a recommendation for such action as the Faculty Board or 8 (2) (a) of these Regulations is rejected by a Faculty Board may All students, apart from some exceptions, enrolled in institutions of "Admissions Committee" means the Admissions Committee of considers appropriate. appeal to the Admissions Committee. higher education from 1989 are liable under the HECS. the Senate constituted under By-law 2.3.5; Exemption from payment of the Higher Education Contribution (HEC) 5.(1) An appeal made by a student to the Admissions Committee (2) A student whose application to enrol pursuant to Regulation 8 (2) "Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty in which a student is applies to: pursuant to Regulation 3 (3) of these Regulations shall be in such (b) of these Regulations is rejected by the Admissions Committee enrolled. a fee-paying student in a "fees-approved postgraduate award may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor. form as may be prescribed by the Admissions Committee and course" ''Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of a Faculty in which shall be made within fourteen (14) days from the date of posting a student in a "basic nurse education course" a student is enrolled. to the student of the notification of the decision or such further CHARGES a "full-fee-paying overseas student" period as the Admissions Committee may accept. a "student who has paid the Overseas Student Charge" 2.(1) A student's enrolment in a subject may be terminated by the Head The General Services Charge (details below) is payable by all students. (2) In hearing an appeal the Admissions Committee may take into of the Department offering that subject if that student does not New undergraduate students are required to pay all charges when they a "fully sponsored overseas student" consideration any circumstances whatsoever including matters maintain a rate of progress considered satisfactory by the Head of attend to enrol. a student in an "enabling course" not previously raised and may seek such information as it thinks a student in a "non-award" course Department. In determining whether a student is failing tomaintain Re-enrolling students receive in October each year, as part of their re fitconceming the academic record of the appellant and the making a student who has been awarded "a HECS postgraduate satisfactory progress the Head of Department may take into enrohnent kit, a Fees and Charges Notice. Students are expected to pay of the determination by the Faculty Board. Neither the Dean nor scholarship" consideration such factors as: charges in advance of re-enrolment at any Westpac Bank. The last date the Sub-Dean shall act as amemberoftheAdmissions Committee The amount each student contributes depends upon the subjects for payment of charges with the Westpac Bank is 8 March 1991. (a) unsatisfactory attendance at lectures, tutorials, seminars, on the hearing of any such appeal. undertaken each semester and is payable whether the subjects are passed laboratory classes or field work; or failed. The total liability depends on the proportion of a standard full (3) The appellant and the Dean or the Dean's nominee shall have the Per Annum 1. General Services Charge time load in which the student is enrolled on the semester census dates, (b) failure to complete laboratory work; right to be heard in person by the Admissions Committee. $243 (a) Students Proceeding to a Degree or Diploma ie March 31 in Semester I and August 31 in Semester 2. If a student (c) failure to complete written work or other assignments; and (4) The Admissions Committee may confirm the decision made by a Plus Students joining Newcastle University withdraws from a subject after one of the above dates, the liabilty for that Faculty Board ormay substitute for it any other decision which the Union for the first time $35 (d) failure to complete field work. subject will stand for that semester. Faculty Board is empowered tomake pursuant to these Regulations. (2) The enrohnent of a student in a subject shall not be terminated (b) Non-Degree Students In 1990 the HEC charge for a standard full time program was $1,882 Newcastle University Union Charge $35 pursuant to regulation 2 (I) of these Regulations unless that 6.(1) The Admissions Committee shall consider any case referred to it for the year or $941 for a semester. This amount will be indexed each student has been given prior written notice of the intention to by a Faculty Board and may: (c) External Students $37 year in accordance with the consumer price index. consider the matter with brief particulars of the grounds for so The exact amount must be paid in full by the prescribed date. HECS is administered as part of the enrohnent process. Students must doing and has also been given a reasonable opportunity to make (a) make any decision which the Faculty Board itself could select one of three sections on the HECS Payment Options form. representations either in person or in writing or both. have made pursuant to regulation 3 (I) (a), (b) or (c) of these 2. Late Charges Regulations; or Where the Fees and Charges Notice is lodged On enrolment students must do one of the following: (3) A student whose enrohnent in a subject is terminated under with all charges payable after the 8 March 1991 $50 (a) Electtopayup-front which would require paymentof85% of the regulation 2 (I) of these regulations may appeal to the Faculty (b) exclude the student from enrohnent in such other subjects, contriubtion for the semester, with the balance to be paid by the Board which shall determine the matter. courses, or Faculties as it thinks fit; or 3. Other Charges $15 Commonwealth. Students electing to pay up-front for Semester (c) exclude the student from the University. (a) Examination under special supervision per paper 2 will be asked to do so at the commencement of Semester 2; or vi (b) Review of examination results, per subject $25 vii CAMPUS TRAFAC AND PARKmG STUDENT SERVICES (b) Defer their HEC and elect to pay through the taxation system, The range of fines which may be imposed in respect of various categories CASHIER First two weeks of semester 8.30am - 7.00prn in which case they must either provide a tax file number or of breach inc\ude:- There are two cashiers' offices on-campus. An agency is located in the Hunter Union. apply for a tax file number as part of their enrohnent. Institutions A student failing to notify the registered are required to ensure that the information given by students on i) Located on First Floor, McMullin Building. Hours ojOpening number of a vehicle brought on to the campus $10 Hours ojOpening their tax file number application is the same as that on their (a) During Semester Parking in areas not set aside for parking. $10 enrohnent form. (a) During Semester 10.00am - 4.00pm Monday to Thursday 10.00am - 3.00pm Parking in special designated parking areas Students electing to defer their HEC and pay through the (Open during lunch break) without a parking permit for that area $15 (b) During Teacher Training taxation system are not required to make a payment towards (b) Vacation Period 1O.00am - 12.30pm Monday to Thursday 1O.00am - 2.00prn their contribution until their taxable income reaches aminimum Driving offences - including speeding and 2.00prn - 4.00prn dangerous driving $30 First two weeks of semester 9.00am - 5.00prn threshold level. For the 1990-91 income year the minimum ii) Located inside entrance of Hunter Building. threshold is $25,469. Thisarnount will be increased in line with Failing to stop when signalled to do so by an Hours ojOpening the consumer price index each year; or Attendant (patrol) $30 All year except for one week during Christmas break. LOST PROPERTY (c) Provide evidence of exemption from the HECS and be enrolled Refusing to give information to an Attendant 9.00am - l1.00am 1.3Oprn - 3.30pm Lost property may be collected from, or deposited at two locations on with details of their exempt status being recorded by the (patrol) $30 campus: institution for subsequent reporting to the Department of Failing to obey the directions of an Attendant Employment, Education and Training. (patrol) $30 CHAPLAINCY SERVICE (a) Patrol Office, Great Hall between 9.00am - 4.00prn All enrolling studen ts must complete a Payment Options form selecting The Traffic and Parking Regulations are stated in full in the Calendar, The Chaplain's offices are located in the demountable buildings at the (b) Property Services, Cll 0, between 9.00am - 4.00prn one ofthe above three options. Re-enrolling students will automatically Volume 1. rear of the Mathematics Building on the former University side, and in (Hunter Building) maintain their elected payment option. Students must complete a new The University Conservatorium ofMusic, located at the corner ofGibson C69 in the Hunter Building. It is suggested that you telephone in advance. Payment Options form if they change courses or wish to change their and Auckland Streets in the centre of Newcastle, has no parking facilities, payment option. Pastoral care is available at both the University and the Conservatorium however, there is a Council car-park in Gibson Street. of Music from the following denominations:- NOTICEBOARDS Anglican Catholic SCHOLARSHIP HOLDERS AND SPONSORED STUDENTS Students wishing to post notices within the glass-fronted locked· BANKING Baptist Presbyterian Students holding scholarships or receiving other forms of financial noticeboards should contact Mr D. Heggart, Property Services in the assistance must lodge with the Cashier their Fees and Charges Notice I) Commonwealth Bank Uniting Church Assembly of God Hunter Building. together with a warrant or other written evidence that charges will be The University of Newcastle branch of the Commonwealth Bank is Hours ojOpening/or both Centres paid by the sponsor. Sponsors must provide a separate voucher warrant located adjacent to the McMullin Building. An automatic teller machine Monday to Friday 8.30am - 5.00prn POST OFFICE or letter for each student sponsored. is located outside. Offers all normal postal services EXCEPT interviews for passports. Hours ojOpening: LOANS COMMUNITY PROGRAMMES Hours ojOpening Monday to Thursday 9.30am - 4.00prn Students who do not have sufficient funds to pay charges should seek Friday 9.30am - 5.0Oprn The Department of Community Programmes offers bridging courses for Monday to Friday 9.00am - 5.00pm a loan from their bank, building society, credit union or other financial students in its Summer programme (January and February), as well as institution. Applications for a loan from the Student Loan Fund should An agency of this branch is located adjacent to the Union Bar on the courses for people who do not have to be formally accepted as University be made to Ms Anne Lang, Student Services. Arrangements should be former Institute side of the campus. students. PUBLIC TRANSPORT made well in advance to avoid the risk of a late charge. II) Westpac Banking Corporation Students interested in bridging courses should call at the Department's The State Transit Authority provides a comprehensive bus service to the office in Room V31, Ground Floor of the Mathematics building. University from the following locations: REFUND OF CHAR.GES An agency of the Hamilton Branch of Westpac is located outside the Students Union. It offers normal banking facilities and services. Courses, workshops and seminars for the public can be in virtually any Newcastle (parnell Place), Newcastle Regional Museum, The Junction, A refund of the General Services Charge paid on enrohnent or part subject area, and those interested should telephone for further details. Tighes Hill, Broadmeadow, Adamstown, Lambton Park, Mayfield, Hours 0/ Opening thereof will be made when the student notifies the Student Division of Waratah, Jesmond, Wallsend, Rankin Park, Cardiff, Charlestown, a complete withdrawal from studies by the following dates (yet to be Monday to Thursday 10.00am - 11.30am Belmont. determined). 12.3Opm - 3.0Oprn CONVOCATION Bus Timetables are available from the enquiry counter at Students Friday 10.00am - 11.30am All students of the University of Newcastle become members of A refund cheque will be mailed to a student or if applicable a sponsor. Services. Any change of address must be advised. 12.3Opm - 4.00prn Convocation upon graduating. Convocation is the graduate body of the Closed over the Christmas period. University of Newcastle and, under the provisions of the University of A refund will not be made before 31 March 1991. Newcastle Act, is one ofthe constituent parts of the University. By virtue STUDENT INSURANCE COVER Above hours extend through mid-semester break. of the Act and the University By-Laws, Convocation has a voice in the Studentplan Insurance is an accident policy which is administered by the III) Credit Union CAMPUS TRAFFIC AND PARKING government of the University through its right to elect members of Sports Union on behalf of American Insurance Underwriters (A.I.U.). Council and the Standing Committee's right to direct communication Persons wishing to bring motor vehicles (including motor cycles) on The main branch of the Universities Credit Union is located with This policy provides benefits for death, disability, hospitalization, loss with the Council and the Senate. Through its membership of the to the campus are required to complete a parking registration form for the Student Union on the former University side of the campus. of wages and medical expenses (these are restricted to injuries sustained Australian University Graduate Conference, Convocation also co each vehicle. Completed forms may be lodged either with the Attendant whilst engaged in campus activities). The injury must be the result of a Hours a/Opening operates with its counterparts in other universities to give effective (Patrol) Office located in the foyer of the Great Hall or with the 'fortuitous act' (i.e. due to chance). It does not cover disability arising Monday to Friday 9.00am - 4.00prn expression of opinion on matters of concern to graduates. Property Services Office located in the Hunter Building. All persons from sickness or disease. There is a $20.00 excess applying to each must comply with the University's Traffic and Parking Regulations An agency is located in the Hunter Union Building. accident, not each claim. This excess is deducted from the first part claim only. including parking in approved parking areas, complying with road /lours 0/ opening CO-OP BOOKSHOP signs and not exceeding 35 k.p.h. on the campus. There are two branches of the Co-op Bookshop on the one campus. Both Studentplan can cover: (a) Pay week Tuesday to Thursday 1O.30am - 2.00pm* If the Director (property Services), after affording the person a period offer discounts to Co-op members. i) Students who are members of the Sports Union (this does not (b) Off-pay week Tuesday & Thursday 10.30am - 2.00pm* of fourteen days in which to submit a written statement is satisfied that The main branch is located within the Student Union. It stocks textbooks, include students who have deferred study); any person is in breach of Regulations, he may: Liable 10 alteration be/ore end 1990 * general publications, computer discs and other software, audio-visual ii) Active life and active associate members of the Insured (a) warn the person against committing any further breach; or cassettes. organisation; (b) impose a fine; or Hours a/Opening iii) Staff of the Sports Union and staff of the University. (c) refer the matter to the Vice-Chancellor. Monday, Wednesday and Friday 9.00am - 5.00pm For further information, please telephone the Sports Union office during Tuesday and Thursday 9.00am - 6.00pm business hours. viii ix UNIVERSITY COMPUTING SERVICES UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES UNIVERSITY COMPUTING SERVICES You may use only those facilities which have been authorised for your UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES Disabled Persons use. If access is protected by a password, you are not to make this The University of Newcastle has made use of computers in research and Both Auchmuty and Huxley Libraries cater for the needs of physically password available to others. You may not use any account set up for Entitlements teaching and for administrative purposes since the first computer was disabled and visually impaired library users. Toilet facilities for another user, nor may you attempt to find out the password of another The facilities of the University Libraries are available to members of the installed in October 1963. handicapped persons are located near the entrances to Reading Rooms user. Council, members of staff, and students of the University. The facilities 2 and 4 of the Auchmuty Library, whilst similar facilities exist in the All students will become familiar with the University Libraries' use of of the University Library are available to such persons who may be You may only use authorised facilities for authorised purposes. For foyer areas outside the Huxley Library. computers in providing the On-line Public Access Catalogue (Alleycat) approved by the University Librarian. Students who are not students of example, facilities made available for teaching may not be used for and in managing the circulation system. the University of Newcastle must apply to the University Librarian for private gain. The Auchmuty Library Computers are widely used in teaching wherever this is appropriate. permission to use the Library. You must be aware of the law of copyright as it affects computer Located adjacent to Shortland Union, this Library supports the teaching Some of these are managed by the teaching departments while others are As a member of the University of Newcaslte, you are entitled to use the software. Software must not be copied except with the express permission and research requirements in the faculties of Architecture, Arts, maintained and supported by University Computing Services in publicly Auchmuty and Huxley Libraries as well as the Libraries of the teaching of the copyright owner. Economics and Commerce, Education, Engineering, Medicine, Science available locations. hospitals. Library services are currently being developed at the Central You may not attempt to copy information belonging to other users and Mathematics. IthoIds an extensive range ofgovernment publications The central computers and many others are connected to the campus Coast campus at Ourimbah. (whether they be staff, students or other users) without their express and a Rare Book Collection. Specialist services in Biomedicine, Local Area Network (LAN) which in turn is connected to the Australian Only students and staff of the Conservatorium ofMusic can borrow from permission. Government Publications and Law are provided. Academic and Research Network (AARNet) and to the worldwide its Library. This includes full-time and part-time Music Education Internet. You may not attempt to interfere with the operation of computing stUdents. They are entitled to have three books for one week and seven The Biomedical Library facilities. scores for a term. Access to the collection by other categories ofusers can University Computing Services provides and supports computing services Houses monographs, serials, pamphlets and reference material in You may not attempt to subvert the security of any of the University'S be arranged by contacting Colleen shipman, the Conservatorium of for all activities of the university: for academic departments, for Biological Sciences and Medicine; i.e. within the classification ranges computing facilities. Music Librarian (phone 29 4133). administrative divisions and for service units such as the University 016.57-016.619 and 570-619. Collections ofresources are also maintained Libraries. Services are provided through central computers, through a You may not use the University's computing facilities to send obscene, BorrowinglIdentification Cards in six country centre hospitals, Taree, Tamworth, Gosford, Maitland, campus network with external links, and through assistance to users of offensive or harassing messages. You cannot borrow without an identification card. Student cards are Orange and Lismore for the use of students in clinical learning stages. both the central computers and distributed desk-top computers. The purchase or lease of computer software normally provides a licence issued to students upon payment of fees. Borrower Cards are issued to There is a formal agreement between the University and the Area Health There are more than 800 terminal connections directly to the campus to use the software, together with a copy of the software and associated staff upon application at the Loan Enquiries Desk in the Auchmuty Board on the operation of the Gardiner Library Service based at the network, allowing connection to various computers, both in University documentation. The title to the software remains with the copyright Library and the Circulation Desk in the Huxley Library. Royal NewcastleHospital, under which registered users ofthe Auchmuty Computing Services (McMullin and Hunter buildings) and in University owner, who is entitled, subject to the Copyright Act, to place conditions and Gardiner Libraries enjoy complete reciprocity. Please remember to carry your card with you at all times if you wish to departments. A number of School and Departmental computers and upon the use of the software. borrow. If books are borrowed on your card by anyone else, you are Borrowers may have access to the Short Loan Collection for restricted networks are also connected to the campus network. Members of the University are personally responsible for complying responsible for them. Report any lost card to the Loans Desk staff periods. Students are given access to central VAXNMS computers and centrally with the Commonwealth Copyright Act relating to the copying of immediately to prevent unauthorised use. Replacement cards are available Further information and assistance can be obtained at the Auchmuty located microcomputers (Apple Macintosh and IBM PCs or 'clones') computer software and to the terms and conditions of the particular for $5.00 from Student Division Office in the McMullin Building. Library Reference Desk or at the following service points: and to departmental and special purpose computers as appropriate to contract or software licence relating to leased or purchased software. their course of study. Many packages are available such as the NAG Books must be returned to the Library from which they were borrowed. Archives Inter-Library Services The Copyright Act makes specific provision for the making of a backup numerical library, statistical programs such as Minitab, SAS, SPSS-X You cannot return Auchmuty Library books at the Huxley Library. NY Services Online Searching copy of either or both the original or an adaptation of a computer and BMDP and word-processing. All students are free to use the Borrowing rights are withdrawn if you fail to return material by or on the Biomedical Library Reference Desk program. Thus the University can only make backup copies of programs electronic News and Mail services. date due. They are reinstated when the material is returned. Also, a fine Loans Short Loan Collection for which it has purchased a licence. If a program is on loan or has been of $2.00 per item is levied when material is two days overdue. The fine Students enrolling in a subject for which a computer connect-time quota Government Publications hired, the rightto make copies will have to be expressly authorised by the will increase by 50 cents per day per item until the material is returned. has been established are automatically given accounts on the central copyright owner. In addition, the reproduction may only be made for the If library material is lost or damaged, the replacement cost plus a Borrowing Rights computers. Research students (Research Masters and PhD) are not purpose of being used in lieu of the original copy in the event that the processing fee will be charged. limited on connect-time and are allocated disk quotas appropriate to their original copy is lost, destroyed or rendered unusable. Such a backup The following loan conditions apply at the Auchmuty and Huxley work. copy cannot be made from an infringing copy of the computer program Inter-Library Resources Libraries: The computers normally operate continuously, with terminal rooms or where the owner of the copyright in the program has given an express Material not held in the University of Newcastle Libraries may be Undergraduates 12 books overall for 2 weeks open from 08:00 to 21:00 on weekdays (and in the Computing and direction to the contrary. obtained from other libraries within Australia or overseas. This service Graduate DlplomaIPostgraduate Diploma (pass or Honours) Information Sciences Building from 09:00 to 17:00 at weekends for Copying of computer software to hard disk should only occur if the is available to academic staff, higher degree and honours/fmal year 12 books overall for 2 weeks most of the academic year). computer software licence specifically allows it for other than normal students. Books and serials readily available within Australia should Postgraduate QualllYlngfBachelors HonourslMasters by backup purposes. The use of the hard disk copy mu st not be used by more arrive within two weeks. Photocopied articles are normally sent to your University Computing Services aims to provide a high quality modern Coursework computing environment for students. Use of this together with their than one person at a time unless the agreement states otherwise, or in the Department for collection. 12 books overall for 2 weeks experience in using School and Departmental computers, will ensure absence of an agreement, it is used on the hard disk by no more than one Information Access Resources 2 journals for 1 week* graduates have acquired broad and valuable computing experience. person at a time. Staff/and Higher DoctoratelPhD and Masters by research Hard disk copies of software used in a network environment to allow Library facilities include the computerised catalogue, Alleycat, which Students are encouraged to seek guidance in computer use from their provides direct access to information about materials held in the simultaneous access by more than one user can only be provided if 50 books overall for 12 weeks lecturers, but the UCS Help Desk also offers assistance to all users. Auchmuty, Huxley and Gardiner Libraries; specially permitted in the contract or software licence; or a copy of the CD-ROM Databases and 6 journals for 1 week* Conditions of Use Audio-Visual materials. Both Huxley and Auchmuty Libraries provide software has been purchased for every simultaneous user of the hard disk * Some heavy demand material will be available on 3 day loans onlyfor typing facilities. The University accepts no responsibility for any damage to or loss of copy. all staff and students. data arising directly or indirectly from use of these facilities or for any Copying of software for classroom use isnot permitted unless specifically Photocopying Hours of Opening (Auchmuty Library Only) consequential loss or damage. The University makes no warranty, permitted under the contract or software licence for the leased or Photocopying facilities are available in the Auchmuty and Huxley express or implied regarding the computing services offered, or their purchased product. Libraries but not the Conservatorium of Music Library. The machines i) Term Hours fitness for any particular purpose. are operated by magnetic-strip cards which can be purchased with $2 Monday to Thursday Friday Sa!urday & Sundo.y The University's liability in the event of any loss or damage shall be coins and $5 notes. Users must observe the relevant Copyright Act 8.30am to 10.0Oprn 8.30am to 7.00pm 1.00pm to S.OOpm limited to the fees and charges paid to the University for the use of the provisions which are on display near the photocopiers. ii) Semester Breaks computing facilities which resulted in the loss or damage. Monday to Friday Saturday &Sunday 8.30am to 7.00pm l.00pm to 5.00pm x xi UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES SECTION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS iii) Long Vacation The Newcastle Conservatorium of Music Library Economics IV Topics References Monday to Friday 8.30am to 5.00pm This Library is located on the second floor of the oIC\,section of the ECONOMETRICS IV Dornbusch, R iv) Library Closed Newcastle Conservatoriwn of Music, comer of Gibson and Auckland Open Economy Macroeconomics (Basic Books 1980) Australia Day, Easter except Easter Monday, Christmas to New Lecturer G. Keating Streets. Limited on-street parking is available. Off-street parking is Hillier, B. Year available in the King Street Council Car Park, and Conservatorium Prerequisites Requiremerts for Honours degree and EcooometricsIII Macroeconomics: Models, Debates, and Developments v) Library Open students may obtain parking concessions from the Information Centre, Hours 2 lecture hours per week (Blackwell 1986) Easter Monday, Anzac Day, Queen's Birthday, Show Day, Labour Shortland Union Building. Examination Two 2 hour papers Day. Borrowing Rights Maddock, R. & Carter, M. Content Rational Expectations (Macmillan 1985) Gardiner Library Students and staff of the Conservatorium of Music can borrow from its i) March to November Library. This includes full-time and part-time Music Education students. Basically a continuation of Econometrics T, with its prime interest Maddison, A. GrowthandSlowdown inAdvancedCapitalist Economies (J. Monday to Thursday Friday Sunday They are entitled to have three books for one week and seven scores for being on the problems involved in econometric model building and a tenn. Music recordings are not available for loan. However, compact Economic Literature, June 1987) 8.30am to 8.00pm 9.00am to 5.00pm 1.00pm to 5.00pm simultaneous estimation. An introduction is also given to Box disc, record and cassette players are available for use within the Library. ii) December to February Jenkins Time series and Spectral Analysis andBayesian Estimation Okun,A. Access to the collection by other categories of users can be arranged by Techniques. Each student will be expected to complete a piece of Monday to Thursday Friday Weekends contacting the Librarian on 29 4133. PricesandQuantities:AMacroeconomicAnalysis(Blackweli applied econometric research. 1981) 8.30am to 6.00pm 9.00am to 5.00pm Closed Limited facilities for disabled persons can be arranged if prior Mater Hospital Library arrangements are made. References OECD Bridge, J.L. Economic Surveys: Australia (Paris 1987) i) Monday to Friday Weekends Hours of Opening Applied Econometrics (North-Holland 1971) Perkins, J.O.N. 9.00am to 5.00pm Closed i) Monday to Friday Australian Macroeconomic Policy, 1974-1985 (Melbourne 9.00am to 1.00pm Challen, D.w. & Hagger, AJ. Huxley Library V.P.1987) 2.00pm to 5.00pm Macroeconometric Systems - Construction, Validation and Applications (Macmillan 1983) Stem, J.L. Located in the Hunter Building, this Library supports the teaching and Closed for four weeks over Christmas/New Year vacation period. research requirements of the Schools of Health and Administration and Dhrymes,P. Monetarist, Keynesian and New Classical Economics Technology, Education and Hwnanities, Visual and Perfonning Arts. It Econometrics, Statistical Foundations and Applications (Blackwell 1982) also receives all Department of Education publications including the (Harper & Row 1970) primary and secondary school syllabuses as well as the Higher School Schott, K. Certificate examination papers. They are housed in the Audio-Visual Fishman, G.S. Policy, Power and Order: The Persisteru:e of Economic section. Spectral Metluxis in Econometrics (H3IVard V.P.1969) Problems in Capitalist States (Yale U.P. 1984) Borrowers may have access to the Short Loan Collection for restricted Hood, W.C. & Koopmans, T.e. MTCROECONOMIC ANALYSIS periods. Studies in Econometric Method (Wiley) Lecturer e. Aislabie Further information and assistance can be obtained at the Huxley Library lntriligator, M.D. Reference Desk or at the following service points: Econometric Models, Techniques and Applications (North Prerequisites Requirements for Honours degree AN Services Loans Holland) Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Short Loan Reference Desk Judge, G. Griffiths, Hill,W. et al Examination One 2 hour paper plus assignments Online Searching Inter-Library Services The Theory and Practice ofEconometrics (Wiley) External Studies Librarian Content Klein, L.R et al. Microeconomic theory is developed with policy applications in Borrowing Rights Econometric Gaming ( Macmillan) mind Topics include: recent advances in demand and production Refer to borrowing rights for Auchmuty Library. Maddala, G.S. theory, equilibrium theories of markets and the correspondence Hours of Opening Econometrics (McGraw-Hill 1977) principle, Paretian optimality, market failure including decreasing i) Term Hours Malinvaud, E. costs, uncertainty, second-best solutions, recent developments in Monday to Thursday Friday Saturday & Sunday Statistical Methods OfEconometrics (North-Holland 1970) oligopoly theory, an examination of variations in the qUality of 8.30am to 9.00pm 8.30am to 5.00pm 1.00pm to 5.00pm products and in product differentiation with market structure, Pindyck, RS. & Rubinfeld, D.L. ii) resources allocation over time, implications of uncertainty and Semester Breaks Econometric ModelsandEconomicForecasts(McGraw-Hill learning for economic behaviour and planning, and various topics Wednesday Other Nigh/s Weekends 1976) 9.00am to 9.00pm 9.00am to 5.00pm Closed in cost-benefit analysis. Theil, H. iii) Long Vacation References Principles ofEconometrics (North-Holland) Monday to Friday No single text is suitable and a full reading list will be supplied 9.00am to 5.00pm MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS Background texts of relevance include: iv) Library Closed Lecturer To be advised Becker,G. All public holidays Economic Theory (Knopf 1971) Prerequisite Economics III (ECON301) Ferguson, e.E. Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester Microeconomic Theory (Irwin 1972) Examination One 3 hour paper Henderson, J.M. & Quandt, RE. Content Microeconomic Theory 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill 1980) The course surveys contemporary issues in macroeconomic theory and policy. xii 75 SECfION FOUR ECONOMICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR EDUCATION SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS Horowitz, I. LABOUR ECONOMICS ill Decision Making and Theory Ofthe Firm (Holt, Rinehart & Education Subject Descriptions Holt, I. Lecturers B. Hughes, B.lL. Gordon and W.P. Mitchell Winston 1970) General How Children Learn Intriligator, MD. Prerequisites Requirements for Honours Degree How Children Fail The study of Education within the Faculty of Arts provides an MalhematicalOptimizationandEconomic Theory (Prentice Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester opportunity to examine a broad range of developments from the lllich, I. Hall 1971) Examination One 3 hour paper point of view ofboth the individual and society. The undergraduate Deschooling Society Katzner,D. References To be advised courses in Education approach that subject from the perspective of Russell, B. Walrasian&onomics(Addison-Wesley 1988) its history, philosophy, theory, individual and social impact, On Education Ng, Y.K. comparative manifestations, and research styles and techniques. INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS THEORY AND POLICY Reimer, E. Welfare &onomics (Macmillan 1979) This is a general or academic approach as distinct from an School is Dead Prerequisite Industrial Relations IlIB (at Credit level) immediately vocational one. Malinvaud, E. Penguin Hours 2 hours per week The Department offers subjects at the 200 level (Education II), 300 Lectures on Microeconomic Theory (North-Holland 1972) Macquarie Dictionary ofAustralian Education level (Individual and Social Development, Research Methodology Koutsoyiannis, A. Examination One 2 hour paper plus essay and assignments in Education, Philosophy of Education and History of Western Content Non-Price Decisions (Macmillan 1982) Education) and 400 level (Honours) for the B. A. degree. There is EDUCI02 EDUCATION I - PART 2 lOcp Samuelson, P.A. This course will analyse the principal theoretical perspectives on no specific subject prerequisite for EducationIIbutbeforeadrnission Offered Semester II Foundations OfEconomic Analysis (HaIVard U.P. 1947) theemploymentrelationship, on tradeunionism and on management to this subject a student must have obtained at least 50 credit points. Prerequisites Nil Tisdell, C. and will relate them to policy prescriptions at both the macro and In special circumstances this requirement may be reduced on the micro levels. Coordinator R. Mackie Microeconomics: The TheoryofEconomicAliocalion(Wiley recommendation of the Head of the Department. 1972) Text To be advised Education I (EDUC101 & 102) will be introduced in 1991 at Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week Varian, A. Central Coast Campus only. Examination Essay, tutorial, 2 hour examination Microeconomic Analysis (Norton 1984) Acceptance as a candidate for Honours will depend on meritorious Content performance in Education 200 and 300 and supporting subjects. This unit can be undertaken subsequent to EDUC101 or ISSUES IN AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY Intending Honours students should note the wide range of study independently of it. In a further exploration of the question "What areas made available by the staff, and should discuss their proposed Lecturers I.R Rsher & H.W. Dick is education?", the course will concentrate on class and gender in programme with the Head of Department. education; the history, role and function of public, private and Prerequisites Requirements for Honours degree Within the Farulty of Arts postgraduate studies may be undertaken altemativeeducation, and examine policy and politics in Australian Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester for the degrees of Master of Arts and Doctor of Philosophy. education with particular reference to the Education Reform Bill Exmnination No examination Postgraduate studies in Education are also offered within the in NSW (1990). Content Faculty of Education leading to the Diploma in Education and the References degrees of Bachelor of Educational Studies, Master of Educational The nature and problems of the contemporary Australian economy Barcan, A. Studies, Master of Education, Master of Special Education, Doctor Two Centuries of Australian Education can only be understood through the study of its historical of Education and Doctorof Philosophy . Details of these programmes development. Accordingly this course provides an overview of are given in the Handbook of the Faculty of Education. Byrne,E. Australian economic growth during the past century with particular Women and Education The content and staffing of courses listed below may vary slightly emphasis on the patternofbooms and slumps, structural adjustment depending on staff aVailability. Connell, R.W. and the changing role of government in the economy. Ruling Class, Ruling Culture Text EDUCIOI EDUCATION I - PART 1 lOcp Making the Difference Maddock, R & McLean,I.W. (eds) Offered Semester I Neill, A.S. The Australian &onomy in the Long Run (Cambridge U.P. Summerhill 1987) Prerequisites Nil References Coordinator R. Mackie EDUC201 EDUCATION II 30cp Butlin, N.G. Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week Prerequisites 60cp at 100 level Investment in Australian Economic D~elopment 1861- Examination Essay, tutorial, 2 hour examination Hours 3 lecture hours per week and 1 tutorial, full year 1900 (Australian National U.P.1972) Content Examination Progressive assessment and examinations Butlin, N.G., Barnard, A. & Pincus, I.I. This unit will introduce the student to the study of Education as Students will complete all topics offered. Government and Capitalism (Allen & Unwin 1982) an organized body of knowledge. In exploring the question what Chapman, B. (ed) is education, the course will concentrate on five themes - (a) Educational Psychology Australian &onomic Growth (Macmillan 1989) childhood, adolescence, schools, learning and curriculum. The This component surveys educational psychology. It describes both Duncan, T. & Fogarty, I. approach will be themaic and interdisciplinary, looking at the selected themes from the standpoint of disciplines that contribute theory and specific classroom applications. Major topics covered AustraliaandArgentina: OnParallelPaths (Melbourne U.P. include learning, memory andcognitioninthe classroom motivation, 1984) to education. This preliminary unit will seek to emphasis the breadh of scholarship in Education and its practical effects. intelligence and creativity, human development, exceptional learners, Forster C. (ed) and evaluation. The course includes a practical component on References Australian&onomic Development in the TwentiethCentury psychological and educational testing. The major principles of (Allen & Unwin 1970) Aries, P. testing are discussed and some practical experience with important 76 Centuries of Childhood tests used in schools is given. \ 77 SECfION FOUR SECfION FOUR EUDCATION SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS EUDCA TION SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Texts To be advised EDUC304 RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 20cp Harris, K. IN EDUCATION KnowledgeandEducation: The Structural Misrepresentation ofReality ( Routledge 1979) (b) History of Australian Education Prerequisites Education IT (EDUC201) Harris, K. 1hls component provides the student with an historical s\lIVey of Corequisites One of EDUC303, 305, 306 the development of Education in Australia from the beginnings of Teachers and Classes (Routledge 1981) European settlement on the continent. An attempt will be made to Hours 2 hours per week for full year 20cp explain how and why the current forms of education came to exist Examination 3 assignments plus seminar presentations EDUC306 HISTORY OF WESTERN EDUCATION Prerequisites Education IT (EDUC201) in Australia today. The three main themes are: education in a Content nineteenth century pioneering society; education in Australian Corequisites One of EDUC3 03 , 304, 305 society during the twentieth century; and education for the 1hls component consists of an introduction to the nature and Hours 2 hours per week for full year underprivileged. practice of educational research, including experimental, quasi experimental, S\lIVey ,historical, andethnographicresearch. Students Examination To be advised Texts To be advised will be assisted to identify educational problems and issues in Content research terms, to review the literature discussing a specific (c) Modem Educational Theories educational problem orissue, to evaluate and design simple research A general s\lIVey ofthe history of education from Greekand Roman 1hls component seeks acriticalexamination ofanumberoftheories projects, to discuss and select appropriate measures of educational times through the medieval period up to the present. Attention will programs and to undertake the analysis and reporting of the results and theorists central to an understanding of the contemporary be pai~ to.a ~~e of aspects, including educational theory, educationalmstitUIlOns, the changing curriculum, teaching methods educational situation Modem in this context refers to theories of a research project. and the influence of ideology and of society on education. Selected developed from 1750 to the present day. Theories to be discussed Text themes will be pursued in depth. will include those that focus on society and education, as well as Wiersma, W. Texts To be advised those that forus on mind, behaviour and intelligence. Criteria for Research Methods in Education: An Introduction. 4th edn evaluating theories will also be discussed. (Allyn and Bacon Inc. 1986, distributed in Australia by Texts Prentice-Hall). EDUC491 EDUCATION HONOURS Thereisno set textforthis course, but students could profitably read Prerequisites Meritorious performance in Education II, Education Bowen, 1. and Hobson, C., Theories ofEducation. EDUC305 PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCATION 20cp llIA or llIB and supporting subjects References To be supplied Lecturer Dr W.G. Warren Hours The equivalent of six hours per week Prerequisites Education IT (EDUC201) Examination To be advised EDUC303 INDIVIDUAUSOCIAL 20cp Corequisites One of EDUC303, 304, 306 Content DEVELOPMENT Hours 2 hours per week for full year (a) A thesis to be prepared from acceptable primary or secondary Prerequisite Education IT (EDUC201) Examination To be advised sources. Corequisites One ofEDUC304, 305,306 Content (b) A programme to be arranged, in consultation with the Head Hours 2 hours per week for full year While this unit assumes no prior study in philosophy, a background of Department, from some of the units listed below. These Examination Progressive Assessment in Philosophy or in Sociology or History of Education would be an will be selected to meet the needs and interests of individual Content advantage. The course focuses on philosophical and theoretical students. Oass-time should amount to the equivalent of six hours per week. 1hlscomponentintroducesaspectsofindividual/socialdevelopment problems in education including theories of knowledge, of social and political organisation, of morality; and considers such questions within the framework of the home, school and wider culture. The (i) Appropriate units in Education llIA or llIB or post first semester focuses predominantly on the physical and as authority, freedom, discipline and indoctrination in education, the nature of the University, and some problems in educational graduate Education courses not previously taken by the psychological development of the individual whilst the second candidate (each unit 2 hours per week) semesterconcentratesonsocialdevelopment.Specifictopicsinclude: research. (a) physical and cognitive developmentt; Texts Nil (ii) Historiogmphy and Methodology in the History of Education References (b) language development; A detailed reference list will be provided. The following is a (iii) Modem Educational Theories (c) attachment and social-emotional development; selection of formal and informal work that will illustrate the (iv)Australian Education - Sociological and Historical (d) socialisation; approach of the course. Perspectives (e) attitudes and values; Brent, A. (f) cultural aspects of development, stemming from the values Philosophy and Educational Foundations (Allen & Unwin (v) Progressive Education in Australia and organisation of the individual's society. 1983) (vi) Studies in Educational Psychology and Research Text To be advised Dewey, 1. Methodology Democracy and Education are required to participate in the postgraduate research Feinberg, W. Stu~ents semmar programme. Reason and Rhetoric (Wiley 1975) Texts To be advised Tesconi, C. & Morris, Van Oeve TheAnti-ManCulture:Bureau-technocracyandtheSchools (Uni. oflliinois 1972) 78 79 SECTION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Texts Content Coleridge English Subject Descriptions The Portable Coleridge (penguin) SEMESTER I: SEMESTER I: 17th Century Literature The Fnglish Department offers a wide range of subjects in Fnglish Austen (a) Introduction to the Study of the Novel Lecturer Professor D.L. Frost and related literature, film, expository writing (FNGL21O), and Persuasion (Oxford) creative writing (FNGL220). Students who wish to complete aBA Conrad SEMESTER II: 18th Century Literature Pass withaMAJORin&iglishmust,inordertomeet therequirements Keats Heart ofDarkness (penguin) Lecturer Dr. D.M. Osland of the Faculty of Arts, attain at least 90 credit points in English The Complete Poems (penguin) Defoe subjects. These points can be attained by the following combination Texts Bronte Moll Flanders (Oxford) of core subjects and optional subjects: 17th Century Literature Wuthering Heights (Oxford) Bronte (a) EN'GLlOl (2Ocp) Gardner, H. (ed) Browning Jane Eyre (Penguin) (b) EN'GL201 (2Ocp) and one 200 level optional subject (1 Ocp) The Metaphysical Poets (penguin) Selected Poems (Penguin) Fowles Shakespeare Dickens (c) EN'GL301 (2Ocp) and two 300 level optional subjects (20cp) French Lieutenant's Woman (panther) Hamlet ed H. Jenkins (Methuen) Great Expectations (Penguin) TheDepartmentstressesthattheserequirementsareabareminimum (b) Introduction to the Study of Poetry and encourages students to build on thismajorsequenceby studying Shakespeare Eliot Alexander W. Allison (et al, ed) Middlemarch (penguin) other optional subjects that will broaden their knowledge of the The Tempest ed F. Kermode (Methuen) TheNortonAnthologyofPoetry shorterrcvisededn (Norton) discipline. It is especially emphasised that students who wish to Milton Late 19th and Early 20th Century Literature Larkin proceed to postgraduate work at Honours, Masters or Doctoral level Paradise Lost in Milton's Poems (Everyman) Tennyson The Whitsun Weddings (Faber) should complete more than the minimum requirements of the major Note: Students who are also enrolled in ENGL213/313 Selected Poetry (Modem Library) sequence. Murray Shakespearean Tragedy are advised to use The Complete Signet James The Vernacular Republic: Poems 1961-83 (Angus & Those students not majoring in Fnglish may include any English I Shakespeare (Harcourt, Brace). Portrait of a Lady (Oxford) 200 level optional subjects in their courses, provided they have Robertson) I 18th Century Literature Conrad passed EN'GLlOl. SEMESTER II: Defoe Lord Jim (Oxford) Students who wish to study at postgraduate level may do so either (c) Shakespeare I Moll Flanders (Oxford) through coursework programmes (BA Hons and MA) or through a I Woolf New Penguin Shakespeare editions research thesis (MA, PhD). In order to qualify for entry into theBA ), Pope To the Lighthouse (panther) A Midsummer Night's Dream Hons programme (FNGL401) a student must have completedaBA Selected Poetry Price (ed) (Meridian) Yeats Hamlet pass at the University ofNew castleor another recognised institution, Richardson Selected Poems (Macmillan) King Lear with at least an Fnglish major and a credit in EN'GL301, but entry Pamela (Everyman) Coriolanus is finally at the discretion of the Head of Department. Students must The Winter's Tale I Fielding ENGLISH OPTIONS AT 200 AND JOO LEVEL complete the BA Hons programme before applying to enrol in the Joseph Andrews & Shamela (Oxford) MA by coursework or the MA and PhD by thesis. d) Dickens ENGL202} RENAISSANCE DRAMA IOcp Oliver Twist (penguin) I Austen ENGL302} Hard Times (Penguin) Pride and Prejudice (Oxford) for EN'GL202 is ENGLlOland for ENGL302 is ENGLlOI ENGLISH I 20cp Prerequisite Great Expectations (penguin) I Emma (Oxford) EN'GL201 Offered Semesters I & II Bleak House (penguin) Not offered in 1991 Prerequisite Nil Recommended Reading ENGL301 ENGLISH ill (CORE) 20cp (19TH & EARLY 20TH Lecturer Dr. D.H. Craig Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week The following are not set texts, and will not be lectured on, but are CENTURY LITERATURE) Hours 2 hours per week ExamiMlion 50% progressive assessment 50% examinations (end recommended for reference Students enrolled in an Fnglish major must add at least two options ExamiMlion 100% progressive assessment of year) Abrams at 300 level. Content A Glossary ofLiterary Terms 4th edn (Rinehart) Content Offered Semesters I & II Semester I: Bernard The course will trcaloftbrce majorflguresin the Fnglish Renaissance, A Short Guide to Traditional Grammar (Sydney U.P.) Prerequisite EN'GL201 Marlowe, Shakespeare and Jonson, with special emphasis on the (a) Introduction to the Study of the Novel variety of their work in terms of dramatic form, the conception of Talbot Hours 1 lecture a week, 1 tutorial hour perfortnight Lecturer Dr. D.V. Boyd dramatic character, the nature of the dramatic illusion, and relations A Glossary ofPoetic Terms (Univ. Newcastle) ExamiMlion 500/0 progressive assessment 50% examination (end with the world outside the theatre. (b) Introduction to the Study of Poetry of year) Lecturer Dr. c.P. Pollnitz ENGL201 ENGLISH II (CORE:) 20cp Content ENGL204} GENDER AND WRITING IOcp (17TH & 18TH CENTURY LITERATURE) SEMESTER II: Semester I: Romantic and Victorian Literature ENGL304} (Students enrolled in an Fnglish major must add at least one option (c) Shakespeare Lecturer Associate Professor N.C. Talbot Offered Semester II at 200 level) Lecturer Dr P.J. Holbrook Semester II: Late 19th and Early 20th Century Literature Prerequisite For ENGL204 is EN'GLlO1 and for ENGL304 is Offered Semesters I & II EN'GL201 (d) Dickens Lecturer Dr_ RP. Jolly Prerequisite ENGLlOl Lecturer Dr. 1M. Mitchell Lecturer Dr. I.L. Salusinszky Texts Hours 1 lecture hour per week and 1 tutorial hour per fortnight. Hours 2 hours per week Romantic and Victorian Literature ExamiMlion 50% progressive assessment 50% examinations (en<' ExamiMlion 100% progressive assessment of year) Blake The Portable Blake (Penguin) 80 81 SECTION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Content Content ENGL211} ROMANCE AND REALISM IN IOcp ENGL213} SHAKESPEAREAN TRAGEDY IOcp & This course will explore the topics of gender and sexuality in a A survey of the development of American narrative film from its ENGL311} 18TH 19TH CENTURY FICTION ENGL313} selection of English, American and Australian novels of the origins to the present, with particular attention to the work of twelve Offered Semester I Offered Semester II major directors. Films to be studied will include: nineteenth and twentieth centuries. It will discuss therepresentation Prerequisite For ENGL211 is ENGLl 01 and for ENGL311 is Prerequisite for ENGL213 is ENGLl01, and for ENGL313 is of men and women in different historical, social and geographical Griffith ENGL201 ENGL201 locations, examining different formulations of male and female The Birth of a Nation Lecturer Dr. R.P. Jolly behaviour and sexuality and asking how far such behaviour is seen Lecturer Professor D.L. Frost as 'natural' or 'inherent', and how far it is presented as socially Keaton Hours 2 hours per week Hours 2 hours per week The General constructed Is there a difference between male and female writing? Examination 100% progressive assessment Examination 100% progressive assessment The course will begin with a lecture to outline the major issues, and Chaplin Texts Texts will then continue in seminar format. Modern Times Defoe Romeo and Juliet Texts to be drawn from: Hawks Hamlet His Girl Friday Robinson Crusoe (penguin) Bronte, Emily King Lear Fielding Wulhering Heights (penguin) Huston Macbeth Joseph Andrews (penguin) The Maltese Falcon Othello Hardy Austen Jude The Obscure (penguin) Welles Antony and Cleopatra Sense and Sensibility (penguin) Citizen Kane Coriolanus in The Complete Signet Shakespeare (Harcourt, Prichard Bronte Brace) Coonardoo (Angus & Robertson) Capra Villette (penguin) It's A Wonderful Life Baynton Dickens ENGL214} 18TH CENTURY FICTION IOcp Bush Studies (Angus & Robertson) Hitchcock Hard Times (penguin) ENGL314} Strangers on a Train Forster James Offered Semester I Maurice (Penguin) Ford The American (penguin) The Searchers Prerequisite for ENGL214 is ENGLlO1, and for ENGL314 is Lawrence Schreiner ENGL201 Lady Chatterley's Lover (Penguin) Kubrick The Story of an African Farm (Penguin) Dr Strange love Lecturer Dr. D.M. Osland Chopin Stevenson Hours 2 hours per week The Awakening (penguin) Penn ''The Ebb-Tide" in Dr Jekyll and Mr Hyde and Other Stories Bonnie and Clyde Examination 100% progressive assessment Walker (Penguin) The Color Purple (Virago) Allen Content Development of the English novel in the 18th Century The Purple Rose of Cairo Rhys ENGL212} OLD AND MEDIEVAL ENGLISH IOcp Texts The Wide Sargasso Sea (Penguin) ENGL312} LITERATURE Swift ENGL210 WRITING 20cp Gilman Offered Semester II The Writings ofJonathan Swift (Norton) The Yellow Wallpaper (Penguin) Offered Semesters I & II Prerequisite For ENGL212 is ENGLl01 and for ENGL312 is Defoe McEwan Prerequisite 60 credit points in Group A subjects, with at least one ENGL201 Robinson Crusoe (penguin) The Cement Garden (Picador) subject passed at credit level or better. (For a list of Group A Lecturer Dr. J.M. Mitchell Richardson subjects, see section three of this Handbook) Potter Clarissa (Riverside) Hours 2 hours per week Blackeyes (Faber & Faber) Hours 3 workshop hours per week Fielding Examination 100% progressive assessment Mills (ed) Examination 100% progressive assessment Tom Jones (penguin) Content Feminist Readings/Feminists Reading (Harvester) Content Smollett The course will examine major works of the old and medieval Ruthven This is a course in expository writing: that is, in writing that explains Roderick Random (Oxford) Fnglish period, focusing on the issues of identity, and the role that Feminist Literary Studies (Cambridge UP) or informs through description, narration, analysis, or argument. It Joimson narratives p1ayedina "pre-literary" culture. What are the differences is designed to improve the quality and extend the range of writing Rasselas (penguin) between oral and literary cultures, and how are these differences ENGL208} THE AMERICAN CINEMA IOcp skills of students who have already acquired a basic competence. evident in the texts being studied? Beowulf, Dream ofthe Rood, and Lennox ENGL308} Recommended Reading The Book ofMargery Kempe will be read in modernized English. The Female Quixote (Oxford) Offered Semester II There are no set texts for this course, though the following is Texts To be selected from the following: Sterne Prerequisite for ENGL208 is ENGLl01 and for ENGL308 is recommended for reference: Beowulf(edition to be announced) Tristram Shandy (Oxford) ENGL201 Kane Dream ofthe Rood (edition to be announced) Burney Lecturer Dr. D.V. Boyd The Oxford Guide to Writing Chaucer Evelina (Oxford) Hours 2 hours per week (plus film screenings) Troilus and Criseyde and The Wife of Bath's Tale in The Riverside Chaucer (Oxford) Examination 100% progressive assessment Cawley & Anderson (eds) Pearl and Sir Gawain and the Green Knight The BookofMargery Kempe (penguin) 82 83 SEcrION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS SEcrION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJEcr DESCRIPTIONS ENGL215} ROMANTICISM IOcp Morris ENGL230} SPECIAL TOPIC IOcp Shakespeare ENGL315} The Wood Beyond the World (Dover) ENGL330} The CompleJe Signet Shakespeare (Harcourt, Brace) Offered Semester I Wilde Offered Semester I OR II Jonson The Picture ofDorian Gray (Oxford) Prerequisite for ENGL215 is ENGLl01, and for ENGL315 is Prerequisite For ENGL230 is ENGLlO1 and for ENGL330 is Three Comedies ed M Jamieson (penguin) ENGL201 Talbot (ed) ENGL201 Webster Weaving the Heterocosm (English Dept.) Lecturer Dr. C.P. Pollnitz Lecturer To be announced Three Plays ed D.C. Gunby (penguin) Hours 2 hours per week Hours 2 hours per week Middleton ENGL217} EARLY 20TH CENTURY IOcp Selected Plays (Cambridge UP) Examination 100% progressive assessment ENGL317} LITERATURE Examination 100% progressive assessment Content The Arden (Methuen) editions of individual Shakespeare plays are Offered Semester I Content recommended for detailed study, as are the Revels (Manchester Two great and very different narrative poems, The Prelude and Don Prerequisite For ENGL217 is ENGLl01, and for ENGL317 is Por details please consult the English Department's Yearbook for University Press) editions of other Renaissance plays. Juan. are central to this course, which surveys narrative continuities ENGL201 ENGL200/300. and developments in the work of six Romantic poets. Lecturer Dr. C.W.F. McKenna (C) THE ROMANTIC IMAGINATION Texts ENGIAOI ENGLISH HONOURS Hours 2 hours per week Lecturers Associate Professor N.C. Talbot, Dr. c.P. Pollnitz Crabbe Offered Semesters I & II A Selection ed J. Lucas (Long mans) Examination 100% progressive assessment This course studies the theories of poetry, perception, imagination Duration One year full-time or two years part-time and the role of the poet in English Romanticism, and traces the re Coleridge Texts Prerequisite See English Subject Descriptions p.79 emergence of these theories in the work onater 19th and early 20th The Portable Coleridge (Penguin) James century poets. Students will be asked to select works for study from Content Wordsworth The Ambas~ors (Oxford) the wide historical rnnge of texts. (i) three of the following seminar courses and The Oxford Authors: William Wordsworth (Oxford) Joyce Texts Dubliners (panther) (ii) an extended literary essay on a topic chosen by the student and Byron Bums A Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man (Panther) approved by the Director of Graduate Studies. A supervisor will be Don Juan (Penguin) A Choice ofPoems and Songs (Faber) appointed, and the essay must be submitted by a date in Semester Shelley Eliot Selected Poems (Faber) II to be announced. Blake Poetry and Prose (Norton) The Complete Poems (Penguin) Georgian Poetry (penguin) Oare (A) LITERARY THEORY Wordsworth The Shepherd's Calendar (Oxford) The Penguin Book ofFirst World War Poetry (Penguin) Lecturers Dr. I.L. Salusinszky, Dr. J.M. Mitchell The Oxford Authors: William Wordsworth (Oxford) Turner An introduction to contemporary literary theory, from the New Coleridge ENGL216} 19TH CENTURY NARRATIVE IOcp J.W. Turner: Selected Poems (NSW University) ENGL316} TRADmONS Criticism to the present, with special consideration of structuralism, The Portable Coleridge (penguin) post-structuralism, Marxism, feminism, deconstruction, Offered Semester II Byron ENGL220} CREATIVE WRITING·PROSE, 20cp psychoanalysis,andreader-responsecriticism.Amongtheconcems Don Juan (Penguin) Prequisite For ENGL216 is ENGLlOl, and for ENGL316 is ENGL320} DRAMATIC DIALOGUE AND POETRY of the seminar will be questions of authorial intention, literary and Shelley ENGL201 historical contexts for interpretation, and "canonicity" (the nature Offered Semesters I & II Poetry and Prose (Norton) and function ofliterary traditions). A folio of essential readings will Lecturer Associate Professor N.C. Talbot Prerequisite for ENGL220 is ENGLl01 and for ENGL320 is be prepared especially for the course and will be available from the Keats Hours 2 hours per week ENGL201 English Department Office. The Complete Poems (penguin) Examination 100% progressive assessment Corequisite At least one other 200/300 eourse in English Literature Browning Texts Lecturer Dr. P.L. Kavanagh (B) COURT CULTURE: POETRY AND Browning: A Selection (penguin) Shelley, Mary Hours 3 workshop hours per week DRAMA OF THE HIGH RENAISSANCE Whitman Frankenstein (Oxford) Examination 100% progressive assessment Lecturer Professor D.L. Frost Leaves ofGrass and Selected Prose (Modem Library) Bronte, Charlotte Content Texts Dickinson Jane Eyre (penguin) Selected Poems and Letters (Doubleday) This is a course in imaginative writing. Students will be required to Sidney Tennyson study and practice the skills involved in writing prose, dramatic Selected Writings ed R. Dutton (Carcanet) Hardy The Idylls of the King (Signet) dialogue and poetry, with opportunity to specialise in one or more Spenser PoemsoJThomas Hardy ed T.R.M. Creighton (Macmillan) Dickens of these modes. It will involve the analysis, discussion and Poetical Works ed IC. Smith (Oxford) Stevens A Christmas Carol in Christmas Books (Oxford) employment of a variety of styles, forms, techniques and aesthetic Shakespeare Selected Poems (Faber) Collins approaches. Sonnets ed J. Kerrigan (penguin) Cummings The Moonstone (Oxford) Students will be required to write and edit their work in weekly Dome 100 Selected Poems (Grove) three-hour sessions. "Lewis Carroll" Complete English Poems ed C.A. Patrides (Dent) Alice's Adventures in Wonderland/Through the Looking Assessment will be based on a portfolio of work demonstrating a Marlowe Glass (Oxford) range of writing skills. Complete Plays ed J.B. Steane (Penguin) Hardy Recommended Reading The Return ofthe Native (penguin) Grenville The Writing Book (Allen & Unwin) 84 85 SECfION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS (D) 18TH AND 19TH CENTURY FICTION Ie Guin, Ursula K. Ford Wilding, M. (ed) Lecturers Dr. D.M. Osland, Dr RP. Jolly The EartMea Trilogy (penguin) Stagecoach The Portable Marcus Clarke (UQP) The Left Hand ofDarkness (Ace) Semester I: Young Mr Lincoln Gelder, K. & Salzman, P. (eds) The Dispossessed (Avon) She Wore a Yellow Ribbon Defoe The New Diversity (penguin) Threshold (Granada) The Searchers Roxana (Oxford) Always Coming Home (Bantam Spectra) Hergenhan, L. (ed) Capra . Richardson New Literary History ofAustralia (penguin) Tolkien, J.RR. It Happened One Night Clarissa (Riverside) The Lord ofthe Rings (Unwin) Mr Deeds Goes to Town Lohrey,A. Fielding The Hobbit (penguin) Mr Smith Goes to Washington The Morality of Gentlemen (Hale & lremonger) Amelia (penguin) Lessing, Doris It's A Wonderful Life Farmer,B. Short Stories (penguin) Sterne The Marriages Between Zones Three, Four, and Five Hitchcock Tristram Shandy (Oxford) (Panther/Collins) Rear Window Matthews, B. Semester II: Hoban, Russell Vertigo Louisa (penguin) North by Northwest Scott Riddley Walker (Picador) Carey, P. The Mouse and His Child (penguin) Psycho Heart ofMidlothian (Oxford) Illywhacker (penguin) Bronte Kay, Guy Gavriel Gamer,H. The Summer Tree (Unwin) (H) AUSTRALIAN STUDIES Jane Eyre (penguin) Postcards From Surfers (penguin) The Wandering Fire (Unwin) Lecturers Dr. P.L. Kavanagh, Dr J.M. Mitchell Hardy, Frank Eliot The Darkest Road (Unwin) Daniel Deronda (Oxford) Content Outcasts of F oolgarah Semester II: Contemporary Commonwealth Literature James Semester I: Contemporary Poetry Moorhouse, Frank Naipaul, V.S. The Golden Bowl (Oxford) Murray Morgan, Gail In a Free Stale (Penguin) The Vernacular Republic: Poems 1961-1983 (A & R) Noonuccal, O. Narayan, RK. (E) TWO MODERNIST AUTHORS: Porter The Vendor of Sweets (penguin) Davis, I. JOYCE & LAWRENCE Possible Worlds (Oxford) Ondaatje, Michael Lecturers Dr. C.P. Pollnitz, Dr. C.W.F. McKenna Zwicky Running in the Family (Picador) ENGLSOl ENGLISH MA BY COURSEWORK JamesJoyceandD. H. Lawrencerepresent the Modemist movement Ask Me (UQP) Hospital, Janette Turner Offered Semesters I & II atitsheight,yettheirwoIkshavebeentakentorepresentdiametrically Tranter Borderline (Virago) opposed writing practices. Drawing on their short fiction, major Selected Poems (Hale & Iremonger) Duration One year full-time or two years part-time novels and poetry, as well as their later, arguably postmodemist Hulme,Keri Dawe Prerequisite See English Subject Descriptions, p.gO and the writing,thiscourseexaminesthetechniquesandscopeofmodemism. Bone People (Picador) Sometimes Gladness (Longman Cheshire) Postgraduate Degree Regulations - Schedule 2 - Master of It replaces the old question "Joyce or Lawrence?" with a new Achebe,Chinua Arts, on p.155 Hampton & Uewellyn (eds) . critical emphasis: "Joyce and Lawrence". Anthills ofthe Savannah (Picador) The Penguin Book ofAustralian Women Poets (pengum) Content Texts Carey, Peter Pollnitz (ed) (i) three ofthe following courses, except that one may be replaced Joyce Oscar and Lucinda (Faber) An Inflection ofSilence (Univ. Newcastle) by a Supervised Reading Course approved by the Head of Dubliners (Panther) Department. Portrait of the Artist as a Young Man (panther) Kavanagh (ed) (G) AMERICAN NARRATIVE: Note: Students cannot choose courses which substantially Ulysses ed. H.W. Gabler (Penguin) Properties of the Poet (Univ. Newcastle) FICTION AND FILM repeat material studied in ENGL401. Selections from Finnegans Wake (English Dept.) Pollnitz (ed) Lecturer Dr. D.V. Boyd The International Terminal (Univ. Newcastle) (ii) a research report of approximately 20,000 words in length in The Cambridge Companion toJames Joyce ed. D. Attridge an area of study approved by the Head of Department. (Cambridge UP) This course explores a distinctively American tradition of romantic Kavanagh (ed) narrative through a study of three major novelists and three major Pictures from an Exhibition (Univ. Newcastle) The following courses will be available in 1991: Lawrence fllmmakers. Selected Short Stories. ed B.Finney (penguin) Semester II: Australian literary identity and challenges to it (a) literary Theory Texts The Rainbow. ed. J. Worthen (Penguin) This course will begin with the emergence of an Australian Lecturers Dr I.L. Salusinszky, Dr. I.M. Mitchell Women in Love. ed. C.L Ross (Penguin) Hawthorne literary identity in the nineteenth century and then go on to (b) Court Culture: Poetry and Drama of the High Renaissance The Portable Hawthorne (penguin) Kangaroo (Collins Imprint) examine the ways in which that identity has been affected by The House of the Seven Gables (penguin) Lecturer Professor D.L. Frost Poems ed. K. Sagar (penguin) different kinds of writers (migrant, aboriginal, female) and Twain different kinds of writing (naturalistic, expressionistic, (c) The Romantic Imagination (F) CONTEMPORARY FICTION Huckleberry Finn (Penguin) experimental). Once the basic parameters have been established, Lecturers Associate Professor N.C. Talbot, Dr. C.P. Pollnitz Life on the Mississippi (penguin) Lecturers Associate Professor N.C. Talbot, Dr. R.P. Jolly the focus will be on contemporary fiction. (d) 18th and 19th Century Fiction Pwkl nhead Wilson (Penguin) Semester I: Contemporary Romance and Fantasy Fiction Texts and writers may be drawn from the following: Lecturers Dr. D.M. Osland, Dr. R.P. Jolly Faulkner Cantrell, L. (ed) Thispartofthecoursewillemphasisethenarrativeandheterocosmic Absalom, Absalom! (penguin) conventions available to contempomry fantasy writers, with special 1 The 1890s: Stories, Verse and Essays (UQP) Light in August (penguin) I reference to audience expectations and their subversion. The Sound and the Fury (penguin) i 86 87 SECfION FOUR ENGLISH SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS (e) Two Modernist Authors: Joyce & Lawrence Geography Subject Descriptions Major in Physical Geography Year 1 Lecturers Dr. C.P. Pollnitz, Dr. C.W.F. McKenna Geography is the study of the Earth and its people, giving emphasis (f) Contemporary Fiction totheinteractionsamongthephysical,economicand social elements GEOG101 and GEOG102 ofthe environment. Modern Geography may bedividedinto studies Lecturers Associate Professor N.C. Talbot, Dr. R.P. Jolly Choose six other subjects from Levell 00. BIOLl 01, BIOLl 02, in Human Geography (Program A) and Physical Geography GEOLl 01, GEOLl 02, PHYS 101 and PHYS 102 recommended. (g) American Narrative: Fiction/Film (Program B), but students may advantageously combine units from Year 2 Lecturer Dr. D.V. Boyd Human and Physical Geography (Program C). GEOGZ01, GEOGZ03 and GEOGZ04 (h) Australian Studies Human Geography (Program A) analyses the factors and processes that govern the distribution of people and their economic and Choose five other subjects from Level 200. Lecturers Dr. P.L. Kavanagh, Dr. J.M. Mitchell. social activities. Changes in distribution patterns and activities Year 3 Further details can be found in the ENGIAOl entry. through time require study of past processes and prediction for GEOG301, GEOG304, GEOG305 and GE0G307 the future from analysis of present trends and patterns. A wide range of opportunity is available for graduates in private business Choose four other subjects from Level 300. and public service departments especially in areas that involve Year 4 planning, social and economic analysis. ECON101, ECON103, GEOG40l and GEOG402. HlSTlOl, HlSTl02, PH1L101 , SOC101 and SOC102 are useful complementary 100 level subjects. Physical Geography (Program B) analyses the factors and Major in Geography processes that influence the distributions of phenomena in the Year 1 physical environment. Emphasis is placed on study ofthe processes GEOG101 and GEOG102 that develop landforms and soils, on the meteorological processes that cause variations in climate, and on the factors that influence Choose six other subjects from Level 100. variations in vegetation communities and animal distributions. Year 2 Employment opportunities are good both in the private and ChooseTHREEsubjectsfromGEOG201,GEOG202,GEOG203, public sector which are currently demanding graduates with a GEOG204, GEOG205, GEOG206. good understanding of environmental issues and their management. BIOLI01, BIOLI02, GEOLI01, GEOLI02, Choose five other subjects from Level ZOO. PHYS101 and PHYS102. are useful complementary 100 level Year 3* subjects. ChooseFOURsubjectsfromGE0G301,GEOG302,GE0G303, Geography (Program C) combines units from Human Geography GEOG304, GEOG305, GEOG306, GEOG307, GEOG309. and Physical Geography at the 200 and 300 levels with other Choose four other subjects from Level 300. subjects from the Faculties of Arts, Economics, Education and Science and Mathematics. This program can be taken to Major level Year 4 without selecting the Methods courses GEOG201, GEOG202, GEOG401 and GEOG402. GEOG301 and GEOG302, but for Honours a Methods stream *Prerequisites will restrict some choice according to Year 2 (GEOGZ01 plus GEOG301 or GEOG202 plus GEOG302 is subjects chosen. necessary). Employment opportunities aregoodbutdiverse. Suitable complementary subjects at the 100 level should be chosen from Arts, Economics and Science according to your second year unit GEOGIOI INTRODUCTION TO PHYSICAL lOcp preferences in Geography (see Programs A and B). GEOGRAPHY Offered Semester I Major in Human Geography Prerequisites Nil. Students should note that GEOG10l and Year 1 GEOG 102 are prerequisites for the Geography Major in Arts and GEOGI01 and GEOG102 Science, and for Geography Honours GEOG401 and GEOG402 Choose six other subjects from Level 100. ECON101, ECON102, Hours 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practical work per week. HISTlOl,HISTl02,PHIL10l,SOC101andSOC102recommended. A one-day excursion. Year 2 Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hourpaper at the end of the semester GEOGZ02, GEOGZ05 and GEOG206 Lecturers Professor E.A. Colhoun, Associate Professor R.I. Choose five other subjects from Level 200. Loughran, Dr G.N. McIntyre and Ms S.J. Curtis Year 3 Content GEOG302, GEOG303, GEOG306, and GEOG309 An introduction to physical geography including meteorology Choose four other subjects from Level 300. and climate; the influence of geomorphic processes on landforms; Year 4 weathering, rivers, ice, frost, wind and the sea; the physical, chemical and biological characteristics of the soil and the GEOG401 and GEOG402. 88 89 SEcrION FOUR GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SEcrION FOUR GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS de1{elopmentof soil profiles; environmental and historical factors GEOG202 METHODS IN HUMAN 10cp Content Lecturers Physical geography staff. that influence plant distribution. GEOGRAPHY Rocks and their weathering, structural landforms, soils, slope Content Practical work includes an introduction to the study of climatic Offered Semester I development and mass movements, fluvial, aeolian and coastal Includes a five day field trip on aspects of climatology, data and maps, and the use of topographic maps and aerial PrerequisiJe GEOGI02 processes and landforms, glacial and periglacial processes and geomorphology, and biogeography where field methods are photographs for landform analysis. landforms. Hours 4 hours per week emphasised. Twelve hours of advanced statistics are included as Texts Texts None support to field measurements. The field trip will be scheduled Examination Progressive assessment Briggs, D. & Smithson, P. between semesters or in the second semester break. Fundamentals of Physical Geography (Hutchinson Lecturers To be advised GEOG205 CONTEMPORARY AUSTRALIA lOcp Texts None paperback, 1985) Content & EAST ASIA Introductory methods appropriate to Human Geography: Offered Semester I GEOG302 ADVANCED METHODS IN lOcp descriptive and inferential statistics will be emphasised and there GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO HUMAN 10cp Prerequisite GEOG102 HUMAN GEOGRAPHY GEOGRAPHY will be an introduction to computer aided mapping and geographic Offered Semester I information systems. Hours 4 hours per week; 2 days field work. Offered Semester II Prerequisites GEOG102 & GEOG202 Texts None Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hourpaper at the Prerequisites Students should note that GEOG 101 and GEOG end of the semester. Hours Four hours per week 102 are prerequisites for the Geography Major in Arts and Science, and for Geography Honours GEOG401 and GEOG402. GEOG203 BIOGEOGRAPHY AND 10cp Lecturers Mr K.W. Lee and Mr. K. Scott Examination Progressive assessment Hours 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practical work per week. CLIMATOLOGY Content Lecturers Dr W.J. Jonas, and Associate Professor D.N. Parkes A one-day excursion. Offered Semester I Since the Second World War, there have been rapid changes in Content Australia's economy, society and political life: this course will Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hour paper at the Prerequisite GEOG101 Advanced methods appropriate to Human Geography. Methods end of the semester. consider some geographical aspects of these changes, emphasising include survey design, questionnaire construction, social analysis, Hours 4 hours per week; 2 days field work. the interaction of people and environment. The influence of Lecturers Associate Professor J.e.R. Camm, Dr W.A. Jonas, & multivariate techniques, computer aided mapping and geographic Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hour paper at the geographical location on living conditions (current and future) information systems. MrK.W.Lee end of the semester. will be examined. Texts None Content Lecturers Dr H.A. Bridgman, Dr J.C. Turner, Dr G.N. McIntyre The contemporary economic and social geography of East Asia, An introduction to human geography including cultural, Content concentrating on China and Japan. While population, agricultural, population, economic, development and urban geography. industrial and political changes since World War II are studied GEOG303 GEOGRAPHY OF ABORIGINAL 10cp An introduction to biogeography. Definition and scope of the AUSTRALIA Practical work includes an introduction to elementary statistical there is a special focus on Japan since the oil shocks of the 1970s subject is examined and its interdisciplinary nature emphasised. and on China since the death of Mao Zedong. The contribution of Offered Semester I data and its presentation by thematic maps in human geography. Ways of describing and analysing the ranges of organisms in geography to an explanation of events occurring during the Prerequisite GEOG102 Text space and time are explored. Some emphasis is placed onrainforest course is a special focus. for the illustration of principles and for the gaining of field Hours 4 hours per week; 2 days field work. Haggett, P. Texts None Geography: a modern synthesis 3rd edn paperback experience. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hourpaper at the (Harper & Row) An introduction to climatology on a synoptic and meso-scale end of the semester. GEOG206 SOCIO-ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY 10cp including radiation and heat budgets; precipitation processes; Lecturers Dr W.J.A. Jonas general circulation; agricultural climatology; applied climatology. Offered Semester II GEOG201 METHODS IN PHYSICAL lOcp Content GEOGRAPHY Texts Prerequisite GEOG102 This course examines Aboriginal environments from the Hours 4 hours per week; up to 4 days field work. Offered Semester II Attenborough, D. prehistoric evidence for settlement through two hundred years of Life on Earth (Fontana/Collins 1981) Prerequisites GEOGI01 Examination Progressive assessment and one2-hour paper at the European settlement to the present, and stresses issues such as end of the semester. Hours 4 hours per week Pears,N. basic Aboriginal needs and land rights. Basic Biogeography 2nd edn (Longman 1985) Lecturers Dr W J Jonas, Mr K.W. Lee Examination Progressive assessment Texts None Linacre, E. & Hobbs, J. Content Lecturers Drs J.C. Turner, H.A. Bridgman, Associate Professor The Australian Climatic Environment (Wiley 1983) GEOG 304 THE BIOSPHERE AND 10cp R.I. LoughIan and Professor E.A. Colhoun , paperback. .~ Anintroductory course in socio-economic geography with specific ;1 reference to issues in agricultural, industrial location and CONSERVATION Content ~ development geography. Offered Semester I An introduction to statistics and computing for Physical GEOG204 GEOMORPHOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA 10cp • Texts None Prerequisite GEOG 203 Geography. Study of cartographic, photographic and aerial Offered Semester II i photographic methods in geography. l Hours 4 hours per week; 4 days fieldwork. Prerequisite GEOG101 t GEOG301 ADVANCED METHODS IN Texts None 10cp Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hourpaper at the Hours 4 hours per week; 2 days field work. f PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY end of the semester. Examination Progressive assessment and one two-hour paper at Offered Semester II i Lecturers Dr J.e. Turner, Associate Professor R.I. Loughran the end of the semester. f' PrerequisiJes GEOG101 & GEOG201 Content Lecturers Associate Professor R.I. Loughran and Professor E.A. 1 Hours 4 hours per week. This course contains a 5 day field Biogeography: Emphasis on plant geography, with examination Colhoun eXcursion (i.e. 40 hours of the 56 hour course). of both the ecological and historical aspects of the subject. A Examination Progressive assessment 90 91 SECfION FOUR GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS I I SECfION FOUR GEOGRAPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS seminar presentation and a smallhemarium collection are required before 1900; migration to the New World; popUlation of Australia ~ of each student. 1788-1981; urbanisation in Australia; agricultural land use 1788 i Content to 1914. i A thesis embodying the results of an original investigation on a Biological Conservation: Anintroduction to the subject, in which topic approved by the Head of Department and coursework as the importance of an ecologically-based approach is emphasised. Text None 1 Methods for the evaluation of plant and animal species populations ! prescribed. ~ Note: A candidate who wishes to proceed to Honours should and for environmental assessment are described and analysed. GEOGJ07 THE HYDROSPHERE lOcp notify the Head of the Department by 1 October in the Third Year Soils: Processes of soil erosion, soil conservation issues and I Offered Semester I lI' and must confirm this as soon as final results for the year are methods. Prerequisite GEOG101 '! known. Candidates are expected to commence work on their Texts theses after completion of their third year's work. Hours 4 hours per week; 2 days fieldwork. i Kellman, M.C. Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hour paper at the Plant Geography, 2nd edn. (Methuen 1980) THE DEGREE OF end of the semester. Mowat, F. MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES Lecturers Professor E.A. Colhoun, Associate Professor R.I. Woman in the mists: the story of Dian Fossey arul the The postgraduate Environmental Studies degrees are inter-faculty Loughran, Drs G.N. McIntyre & I.e. Turner Mountain Gorillas ofAfrica. (Futura 1989) I course-work degrees housed in the Department of Geography Morgan, R.P.e. Content within the Faculty of Arts. Soil Erosion arul Conservation (Longman 1986) The course examines the distribution of water in the environment. The course introduces graduate students from various After brief consideration of snow, ice and the oceans, most undergraduate disciplines to a wide variety of decision-making GEOGJOS CLIMATIC PROBLEMS lOcp attention will be given to atmospheric moisture, the hydrologic and management approaches to minimising conflicts between cycle, catchments, runoff, sediment and solute transport and soil environment and development. The course is divided into three Offered Semester II water. sections: Prerequisites GEOG203 or permission of Head of Department Text (a) core course and seminar series, consisting of PHIL391 and Hours 4 hours per week; one day fieldwork. Ward,R.C. PHIlA91, plus seminars on current environmental problems; Examination Progressive assessment and one 2-hourpaper at the Principles of Hydrology 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill Sydney students participate actively; end of the semester. 1989) (b) supporting courses outside one's undergraduate major; Lecturers Dr H.A. Bridgman, Professor E.A. Colhoun (c) a project, applying knowledge gained to an environmental GEOG309 A SUBJECT IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY lOcp problem. Content (Title to be advised) Introduces methods of establishing paleoclimates in the Offered Semester II Pleistocene and Holocene, and the reasons behind climate changes over those periods. Describes anthropogenic impacts on climate, Prerequisite GEOG 102 through airpollution, on local, regional and global scales. Evaluates Details to be advised - Appointment pending. near-future possible climate variations over the next century. Text GEOG401 GEOGRAPHY HONOURS (Scm I) 40cp Bridgman, H.A. GEOG402 GEOGRAPHY HONOURS (Scm II) 40cp Global Air: Pollution Problems for the 1990s (Belhaven Prerequisites GEOGI01 & GEOG102 plus eitherGEOG201 & Press, London, paperback, 1990) GEOG301 or GEOG202 & GEOG302 Recommeruled Reading To qualify for admission to Geography Honours, a student must Bradley, R.S. normally have completed sufficient training in geographical Quaternary Paleoclimatology (Allen & Unwin 1985) methods (i.e. GEOG201 and GEOG301 for Physical Geography; GEOG202 and GEOG302 for Human Geography), have completed a Major in Geography that includes GEOG101 , GEOG306 GEOGRAPHY OF AUSTRALIA - lOcp GEOG 102, 30 credit points from level 200 courses and 40 credit AN HISTORIC PERSPECTIVE points from level 300 courses). To proceed to Honours Geography Offered Semester II a student should have obtained an average of credit in the 300 Prerequisite GEOG102 level courses taken for the major plus at least 20 other points at credit level in their university courses. The student must also Hours 4 hours per week; 2 days field work. satisfy the Head of the Department of her/his ability in the area Examination Progressive assessment and one2-hour paper at the of study within which the proposed research topic lies. end of the semester. Hours 48 hours per week for two semesters Lecturer Associate Professor I.e.R. Camm Examination External and internal examination of a research Content thesis, and internal assessment of the coursework. Selected aspects of the population, settlement and land use patterns of Australia. Topics to be studied include; exploratory images, image-makers and distorters, and visions of Australia 92 93 SECTION FOUR HISTORY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR HISTORY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS History SUbject Descriptions focusing on the nature of the discipline of History and the practice Level 100 Subjects Preliminary reading of historians. It is strongly recommended that intending Honours Rickard,J. Because thl; requirements and point-score value of many of ihe students take this course. msrlOl THE FOUNDATIONS OF lOcp History subjects listed below have changedfrom the subjects ofthe AUSTRALIAN SOCIETY Australia - A Cultural History (Longmans 1988) The normal prerequisite for 200 level subjects is the completion of same name in 1990, it is necessary to give the 1991 subjects a new White,R 20 credit points at 100 level. The normal prerequisite for 300 level Offered Semester I; day only code designation. The subjects with changed point-score value are Inventing Australia (Allen & Unwin 1981) therefore labelled HISY rather than HIST. These subjects still subjects is the completion of 30 credit points at 200 level. Any Lecturer Dr. J. Turner Recommended reading appear in the 1991 timetable with the code HIST. For example request for waiving of prerequisites must be made to the Head of Prerequisites Nil Department. A set of required readings will be available for purchase from the HISY204 in the handbook is exactly equivalent to HIST204 in the Hours 2 lectures per week and 1 tutorial per fortnight plus weekly Department at the beginning of term. timetable, and similarly for other HISY subjects. All subjects may be modified according to staff aVailability. videos and films. The study of History is concerned with knowing and interpreting the When the same subject is offered at both 200 and 300 level,l Examinations By course worlc and examination if required. societies and cultures, the people and events, of the past. It involves assessment of the 300 level work may be varied as staff consider HISTl03} EAST ASIAN CIVILIZATIONS lOcp both the awakening and expansion of the historical imagination and appropriate and will in any case be at a higher standard. t Content IEACI01} J This subject surveys the development of the Australian Colonies in adiscip1ined, critical use ofevidence. Through studies mainly ofthe The books listed in the subject entries are for introductory purposes. 'W Offered Semester I; evenings only "mainstream"areasofHistory-asseenfromanAust.ra1ianperspective theNineteenth Century from their Britishantecedents, concentrating Full lists will be available at the beginning of semester. ; Lecturer Mr. H.D.M. Chan -the Department offers a basis by which students can appraise both ontheexploIation and settlement of the continent, the impact of the their own cultural tradition and ways in which neighbouring societies It is the Department's practice to offersomeofits subjects during the 1 frontier, the effects of convictism, the alienation of land, the Prerequisites and corequisites Nil day and some in the evening. In 1991 the British group of subjectstj and cultures have evolved. Believing that precision of thought and struggle for self government, the treatment of Aborigines and the Hours 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week, plus weekly mms. language are essential in the Humanities, the Department requires andHlSY319(AustralianHistory)willbeofferedintheeveningand i emergence of independent colonial societies. Students will be Examination By progressive assessment and examination as that students develop writing skills during their course of studies. European, Pacific, East Asian and American subjects by day. The J introduced to different interpretations of Australian experience and required. HistoryandSocietycoursewillbeofferedat5.00p.m.HlSTlOland ~ trained in historical analysis through reading, discussion and essay Infrrst-yearthe main daytime subjects areHISTlOI andHISTlO2, HlSTl 02 will be offered in the day, HlSTl03 and HISTl 04 in the t writing. Content two semesters which focus on the evolution of Australian society, evening. from its British foundations. Alternatively, in evening hours, two Preliminary reading ThissubjectintroducesstudentstothehiskryofChinesecivilizationand I itsJaparese varian:upto thebeginnings oftheirmoderninteraction with semesterunits,HISTl03andHISTI04,introducetheessentialideas Clark, C.M.H. Subjects from other disciplines: European civilization in the nineteenth century. In particularthe course and institutions of Eastern Civilizations and Western Civilizations I A Short History ofAustralia (penguin) respectively. Satisfactory completion of eitherpairfulfils the normal From time to time the History Department will recognise specified considers thedevelopments of Chinese ideas andvalues that makeup a requirement for the fust year of the History major. HlSTl 03 is also units taught in other Departments as counting towards the History Molony,J. cultura1 tradition that is shared by the major economic powers in Asia listed as an inter-disciplinary subject for students, including History major or as adequate prerequisites for upper-level History subjects. ThePenguinBicentennialHistoryofAustralia (Penguin 1988) today,Japan,K 94 95 SECfION FOUR mSTORY SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SECI'ION FOUR mSTORY SUBJECI' DESCRIPTIONS After a study ofthe causes of the First World War and the war itself, AMERICAN HISTORY Confucius EUROPEAN HISTORY it turns to theriseofFascism, not only inItaly and Gennany but also HISY207} AMERICAN HISTORY lScp The Analects (Penguin 1984) HISY204} THE FRENCH REVOLUTION lScp inotherEuropeancountries. Itthenlooks at the policy ofappeasement HISY307} TO THE CIVIL WAR Mencius HISY304} AND ITS AFTERMATH and the Second World War, appraises the efforts of both the League Offered Semester I; day only in 1991 Mencius (penguin 1970) of Nations and the United Nations to mitigate war, and ends with a Offered Semester I; day only in 1991 reconsideration of the Cold War and its aftennath. Note: This subject will be accepted as sufficient prerequisite for Lecturers Associate Professor D.I. Wright HISY208} AMERICAN HISTORY lScp non-History students wishing to take mSTIlO{31 0 and InSTIll! Recommended reading Prerequisites For204, either 20 credit pointsinHistory at l00level, HISY308} AFTER THE CIVIL WAR 311. Other students wishing to enter 200 level History subjects, or earster, F. or History I or Oass. Civ. I and IlA. For 304 either 30 credit points Offered Semester 11; day only in 1991 to take the History major, will need 20 credit points at 100 level. The Rise ofFascism (Methuen 1967) at 200 level or one Part 11 History subject. 1 ~ Lecturer Associate Professor L Fredman Hours 2 lectures per week and 6 tutorials during the semester. Craig,G.A. HISTI04 FOUNDATIONS OF WESTERN lOcp Europe Since 1815 (Holt 1974) Prerequisites For 207/307 either 20 credit points in History at 100 CULTURE A Examination One long essay, tutorial work and a 1 hour test. level or History I or Oass. Civ. I and IlA. For 208/308 either 30 Rock,R. credit points at 200 level or one Part IT History subject. Offered Semester I at Central Coast Campus, day only; and Content British Appeasement in the 1930s (Arnold 1977) Semester 11 at Newcastle Campus, evening only The subject covers European history from 1789 to 1815. Associate t It is recommended but not obligatory that 207 and 208 or 307 and i Shapiro, J.S. Professor Wright deals in detail with the great French Revolution 1 308 be taken together and in that sequence. Lecturers Professor A Ward, Associate Professors Andrews and J Liberalism, Its Meaning and History (Anvil 1958) Rutherford from the crisis of the Ancien Regime to the coming of Napoleon to\ Hours 2 lectures per week and a fortnightly tutorial. power. The settlement of 1815 will also be considered f Weiss,J. Prerequisites and corequisites Nil Conservatism in Europe, 1770-1945 (Thames and Hudson Examination An essay, a tutorial paper presented orally, a short Recommendedfor Purchase essay and an end-of-semester examination in each subject. Hours 2 lectures and 1 tutorial per week I 1977) Doyle, W. i Content Examination By essays, tests and seminar papers. The Oxford History ofthe French Revolution (OUP 1990) J SOCIALISM AND THE lOcp American History to the Civil War deals with founding, framing Contexl RecommendedReading RUSSIAN REVOLUTION and expanding the Republic, the crisis of Federalism to 1877, and This subject introduces students to core ideas and institutions Doyle,W. i Offered Semester IT; day only in 1990 some themes including Slavery, the Frontier and an introduction to shaping Western civilization and making it distinctive. Ratherthan Origins ofthe French Revolution (Oxford new edn) Lecturer Associate Professor E. Andrews American History. survey the whole of Western History, the subject will focus on key American History after the Civil War deals with the response to issues such as the individual and the group, the nature of property Cobban, A. Pre- or Co-requisites Fither mST204/304 or mST205/305 industrialism, reform and reaction and the shape ofmodem America rights, early capitalism, absolutism versus the rule oflaw, religious History ofModern France Vol 1 (pelican) Hours Average of 1-1/2 hours oflectures and tutorials perweekfor and some themes including exceptionalism, comparative toleration, the rise of universities, humanism and the scientific Furet, F. and Richet, D. the semester. government, ethnicity and the arts. revolution. It is intended thereby to provide students with a basis for French Revolution (Macmillan 1970) Examination One tutorial paper and one 2 hour test. Recommended reading better appraising the strengths and limitations of their own cultural Hampson,N. heritage and for pursuing further studies in Western civilization. A Social History ofthe FrenchRevolution (Routledge 1966) Content Brogan,H. This supplementary unit looks at European socialism after Marx, Pelican History ofthe United States (penguin ph 1986) Recommended reading Lefebvre, G. and the development ofcommunism as aresult of the long-standing Lerner, Meachan & Bums The Coming ofthe French Revolution (Routledge 1966) or situation in Russia, the First WorldWarand the Russian Revolution. Western Civilizations, Voll and II CW. W. Norton 1984) Wright, D.I. The causes and events of that revolution are studied in depth, as well Garraty, J.A. The French Revolution: Introductory Documents (U.Q.P. as the impact of Lenin on communist theory and practice, and the A Short History of the American Nation 4th edn (Harper & HISTI05 FOUNDATIONS OF WESTERN lOcp 1974/80) rule of Stalin The course ends by considering the light this throws Rowpb1985) CULTUREB ontotalitarianism and the current situation in the communist world. and Offered Semester II, Central Coast Campus only; details to be HISY205} NATIONALISM, FASCISM AND THE lScp Required reading Hofstadter, R. advised through Central Coast office. HISY305} SEARCH FOR PEACE Bender, F.L (ed) The American Political Tradition (Vintage pb) Offered Semester 11; day only in 1991 IVlrl Marx: the Communist Manifesto (Norton 1988) Schlesinger, A Upper Level Subjects Lecturer Associate Professor E. Andrews Recommended reading The Cycles ofAmerican History (penguin ph) INDIAN HISTORY Prerequisites Fither 20 credit points in History at 100 level, or Adams,AE. HISY201} HISTORY OF INDIA A lScp History I or Oass. Civ. I and IlA. The Russian Revolution and Bolshevik Victory: why and HIST309 AMERICAN HISTORY, lOcp DIRECTED READING HISY301} For 305 either 30 credit points at 200 level or one Part IT History how? (Heath 1960) Not offered in 1991 subject It is recommended that students should have completed Halperin, F. W. Offered Fortnightly throughout the year, day only in 1991 mSTI04/304 in the fIrst semester. The Russian Revolutions of1917 (Anvil 1989) Lecturer Associate Professor L Fredman HISY202} HISTORY OF INDIA B lScp Hours 2 lectures per week and 6 tutorials during the semester. Wood,A. Co-requisites InSY307 and/or mSY308 HISY302} Examination One long essay, tutorial mark and one 2 hour test. The Russian Revolution (Longman 1979) Hours One 1 to 1-1/2 hour tutorial fortnightly. Not offered in 1991 Content Examination One long essay. There may be an examination at the The subject is designed to continueand complement the study begun lecturer's discretion HISY303 INDIAN HISTORY: in mSY204/304 and covers European history from 1870 to 1960, Content SELECT DOCUMENTS from the creation ofthe ThirdFrenchRepublicto the end ofthe Cold A substantial primary source or sources on American History will Not offered 1991 War. It looks at nationalism in Europe, the creation of a united Italy in be agreed with the class at the beginning of semester and studied in and Gennany and their effect on the European balance of power. detail. 97 96 SECfION FOUR HISTORY SUBJECfDESCRIPTIONS ~CfIONFOUR HISTORY SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS forms of Chinese socialism to the present-day debate concerning EAST ASIAN HISTORY scarr, D. Wrightson, K. HISY211 FROM MEUI TO SHOWA "socialism with Chinese characteristics". In particular the course The History ofthe Pacific: KingdomsandReefs(Macmillan English Society, 1580-1660 (Hutchinson 1982) Not offered in 1991 will consider Chinese anarchism, the reception of Marx-Leninism 1990) and its transformation into Marx-Leninism-MaoZedong thought, and the recent challenging of the Maoist orthodoxy by Chinese Campbell,I.C. HISY217} THE GREAT TRANSFORMATION? IScp HISY317} HISY311 A SPECIAL TOPIC IN JAPANESE socialists reflecting upon Marxism and attempting to develop a A History ofthePacificlslands (U.Q.P. 1990) ENGLISH SOCIETY IN THE 18TH HISTORY: JAPAN IN THE 1930s 'socialism with a human face'. AND EARLY 19TH CENTURIES AND THE ROAD TO WAR Recommended Reading HlST314 SELECT DOCUMENTS ON IOcp Offered Semester 11; evening only in 1991 Not offered in 1991 PACIFIC HISTORY Dirlik, Arif Lecturer Dr. D. Lemmings Offered Day only in 1991; fortnightly throughout the year The Origins of Chinese Communism (OUP 1989 pb) i~ Prerequisites For 217, 20 credit points in History at 100 level. HISY210 REFORM, REVOLUTION AND IScp 1 Lecturers Dr. P. Hempenstall, Professor A. Ward For 317, 30 credit points in History at 200 level MARXISM IN MODERN CHINA Schram, Stuart " The Thought ofMao Tse-tung (Cambridge University Press J Co-requisites Students must be concurrently enrolled in HIST312 Hours One 2 hour workshop (comprising lectures and seminar Offered Semester I; day only in 1991 1989 pb) I andHlST313 discussions of primary sources) per week and one hourly tutorial Lecturer Mr H.D.M. Chan Dirlik, Arif & Meisner, Maurice (eds) , Examinmion Essay totalling 3,000 words per fortnight. Prerequisites Either 20 credit points in History at 100 level or Marxism and the Chinese Experiences (M.E. Sharpe 1989 t Reading A set of required readings will be available for purchase Content History L orQass. CivI andllA. Fornon-history students, satisfactory pb) ~ from the Department at the beginning of the year. 1hls course is about people and change. It examines the ways in completion of HISTl 03 or IEAC101 is sufficient prerequisite. which English men and women - the rich, the "middling sort" and Hours 2-1/2 hours per weekoflectures and/or seminars. PACIFIC HISTORY BRITISH HISTORY the poor - lived, loved, worked and played during a period which Examinmion One seminar paper, one essay and an optional HISY212} COLONISATION AND CULTURE IScp HlSY216} ENGLAND FROM IScp some historians have dubbed as the age of the great transformation examination. HISY312} CHANGE:L THE SOUTH PACIFIC HISY316} REFORMATION TO REVOLUTION Due weight will be given to the broad pattern of changeduringthese years in the areas of industrial and urban development, population Content Offered Semester I; day only in 1991 Offered Semester I; evening only in 1991 growth, and the restructuring of society. But the lectures, seminars 1hls subject examines the natureofChina's nineteenth and twentieth Lecturer Dr. D. Lemmings and tutorials which comprise the programme will be designed to centurycrisisandthereformist,revolutionaryandMarxistapproaches HISY213} IMPERIALISM AND INDEPENDENCE: Prerequisites For 216, 20 credit points in History at 100 level. For bring the past to life by introducing us to its inhabitants: real people to the management of that crisis. HISY313} THE SOUTH PACIFIC IScp 316,30 credit points in History at 200 level who left their traces in words, pictures and material objects. And the Recommended Reading Offered Semester 11; day only in 1991 story will unravel as a mystery tour rather than a journey with a Hours One 2 hour workshop (comprising lectures and seminar known destination, since we will have to discover the route for Gray,Jack Lecturers Dr P. Hempenstall, Professor A. Ward discussion of primary sources) per week and one hourly tutorial per ourselves, using those traces as signposts. Students who complete Rebellions and Revolutions: China from the 1800s to the Prerequisites For 212 and 213 either 20 credit points in History at fortnight. the course will therefore develop their "detective skills", in addition 1980s (OUP 1990 pb) 100 level, or History I, or Qass. Civ. I and I1A. For 312 and 313, Examination Two essays and a weekly journal. to locating part of the Australian cultural inheritance. Eastman, Lloyd E. either 30 credit points at 200 level or one Part 11 History SUbject. It Content Recommended reading Family, Fields and Ancestors (OUP 1988 pb) is recommended that HIST212/312 and HIST213/313 be taken ThesubjectbeginswiththeestablishmentofTudorlegitimacybyHenry Qark, IC.D. Dirlik, Arif together and in that sequence. VII at the end of the fifteenth century and then explores the relationship English Society 1688-1832 (Cambridge 1985) Origins of Chinese Communism (OUP 1989 pb) Corequisites For students taking subject at 300 level, HIST314. between the FngJish Reformation and the growth ofthemodern nation Evans,E.J. Schram, Stuart Hours 2 hours of lectures per week and a 1-1/2 hour seminar per stateunder Henry VIIl.By thetime 98 99 SECTION FOUR HISTORY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR HISTORY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS AUSTRALIAN HISTORY Carr, E.H. THE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF HISTORY Recommended reading HISY319 ISSUES IN AUSTRALIAN HISTORY 15cp What is History This core component is divided into two streams - The best introductory reading would be: Offered Semester II; evening only in 1991 or (i) Theory of History Fuller, J.F.C. The Conduct ofWar, 1789-1961 Lecturers Dr. J. Turner, convenor; and other History staff Marwick,A. ;li Ten seminars and workshops examining European theories of The Nature ofHistory history since the Renaissance and evaluating the contemporary Blainey,G. Prerequisites 30 credit points in History at 200 level debate on the nature of historical understanding and the practice of The Causes ofWar Hours 1 lecture and seminar totalling 2 to 3 hours per week. HIST401 HISTORY HONOURS historians. Assessment Based upon two seminar papers and contributing to the Prerequisites Recommended reading THE NATURE OF BIOGRAPHY seminar series. In order to qualify for admission to History Honours, a student must Collingwood. R.G. This course traces the development of biography as a form of Content satisfy the Head of Department that his/her overall performance in The Idea of History (Oxford 1986) historical and literary discourse from the middle ages to the present Intended to allow senior students to study in depth some of the key History subjects makes him/her a suitable candidate. A satisfactory stanford, M. day. It examines various theories about the individual in history and issues in Australian History, this course will be based mainly on performance will normally include an overall credit average in The Nature ofHistorical Knowledge (Blackwell 1986) the way to approach the writing of individual lives. The course will periodical articles and related documents: it will be an ideal previous History subjects, including Part ill or 300 level SUbjects. • proceed via a reading of specific biographies and discussions of Atkinson. R.F. theory and method on a wider canvas. preparation for honours and post-graduate research. After a HIST401 is a single year full-time course; it is available as a part Knowledge and Explanation in History (Macmillan 1986) preparatory lecture to open up the topic, the seminar will be used to time course over 2 years only for students at least 50% in paid Assessment will be by essay work during the semester and a short examine controversial interpretations of Australia's past. In 1991, employment. White,H. test at the end. Metahistory (John Hopkins University Press 1985) topics will include the Mutiny on the Bounty, Health issues at Examinations Recommended preliminary reading Botany Bay, the Cato Street Conspirators, Rebellion at Eureka, the White,H. New Australian experiment,Breaker Morant and British-Australian By written examination and progressive assessment. Examinations Tropics ofDiscourse (John Hopkins University Press 1986) Nicholson, H. will be in July and November as relevant. The Development ofEnglish Biography (London 1968) relations, the International Workers of the World and Newcastle (u) Historical Writing miners in 1909 and foreign policy in the 1930s. After a careful Content Clifford, J.L. Aseriesof approximately 10 seminarsdealinginapracticalmannerwith reading of Rob Pascoe, The Manufacture of Australian History, (a) a minor thesis of between 10,000 and 15,000 words based upon Frompuzzles to Portraits: problems ofa literary biographer students should prepare for particular seminar topics using: theproblemsandtedmiquesofhistoricalresearchand writing. Atanearly (1970) acceptable primary and secondary sources; meeting students will be required to outline the soopeoftheirtheses and Hogan, T. (b) a "core" course consisting of The Theory and Practice of History commerton theproblemswhidJ might have tobesolved. There willthen Gittings, R. Index to Articles on Australian History (University of New (2 hours per week for 1-1!2 semesters); beanumberofst;ssionsdealingwithsudJrnattersasJibraryandarchival The Nature ofBiography (London 1978) Fngland,1976) (c) two other Special Studies (each involving 2 hours per week in resoun:esand the useoffinding aids,organising ofresearch, verification Walter, J. (ed) Crittenden, Victor & Thawley, John first semester) chosen from a number of options which may be and documentation, II1d thesis writing. These will be followed by Reading life histories (Brisbane 1981) Index to Journal Articles on Australian History 1974-1978 varied from time to time by the Head of the Department. In 1991 exeICisesinthe use ofsourcematerial. Each studentwillalso be required Index to J ournaI Articles on Australian History for 1979 these Special Studies, available subject to reasonable demand and , inlalerstages ofthe course to present a "work-in-progress" seminar on LAND AND SOCIETY Index to J ournaI Articles on Australian History for 1980 the exigencies of staffing, are: his,ober thesis. Other sessions will focus on the nature of evidence, Australian Public Affairs Information Service (APAlS) questions of historical fact, objectivity and subjectivity. This subject examines property concepts which have developed in (i) Gandhi (Associate Professor Wright) Europeand those of Oceanic societies. It will discuss the interaction of these during the colonisation of the Pacific, with special regard REFLECTIVE HISTORY (ii) War and Society (Second semesteronly)(AssociateProfessor ; SPECIAL STUDIES Andrews) to the extent to which indigenous rights were recognised in the HISY320 HISTORY AND SOCIETY 15cp Details of these should be sought from the staff member concerned formal legal system and the effects of this on race relations. Recent (iii) The nature of Biography (Dr. Hempenstall) Offered Semester I Descriptions of some of the options are as follows:- developments such as the Gove Peninsulajudgement on Aboriginal (iv) Land and Society (Professor Ward) land claims, the Aboriginal Land Righls (Northern Territory) Act, Lecturers Associate Professor Fredman, Professor Ward (v) Intellectuals, Society and the State in China since 1895 (Mt , WAR AND SOCIETY 1976 and the recognition in New Zealand law of the Treaty of Prerequisites 20 credit points in History at the 200 level or one Part Chan) (Available only in Semester II in 1991) Waitangi will be examined in detail. II History subject. (vi) State and Society in Tokugawa Japan (Mr. Chan) This semester-long course is not purely military history, but rather an Recommended reading Hours One 2-1!2 to 3 hour workshop per week (vii) The American Presidency (Associate Professor Fredman) analysis of the relationship between war and society. Of necessity it Maddock, K. Examination Essays, class exercises and a final examination beginswithasurveyofwarfarefromtheFrenchRevolutiontoVietnam, Your Land is Our Land (penguin 1983) (viii) Urban History (Associate Professor Fredman) Content but the underlying focus is on the issues which have been raised by Crocombe, R (ed) (ix) The Development of the Hunter Valley and its Industries' ~es during the twentieth century: the effect of the accelerating Land Tenure in the Pacific (OUP 1971) "History and Society" is areflective subject for students, especially 1801-1945 (Dr. Turner) , technology <:l the last 100 years; the problems <:l gerera1ship and prospective Honours students, who wish to explore the nature of command in war, the mer-relationship between war, politics and historical discourse, both as a professional activity and as generated (x) Texts in context: Aspects of Fnglish Social History. (Dr. INTELLECTUALS, SOCIETY AND THE STATE IN Lemmings) polilici.ans; the increasing impact of war on modem societies; morality or used in public life. Issues pursued will include: the word in warfare (asraised by the total warfare concept, the strategic bombing CHINA SINCE 1895 "history" and its various meanings; why people seek to understand Note: Prospective History Honours students must consult the Head ofGenru.ty,andtheaomic bombingofJapan). Itends by looking a the A series of seminars examining the dilemma of modem Chinese themselves in time; popular history; who or what creates our sense of the Department as soon as possible after the publication of the causes <:l wars and possible methods of avoiding them in the future. intellectuals confronting the collapse of their traditional social and of the past; professional history in its various modes; the claim to examination results for 1990 to ascertain whether they are acceptable Slu 100 101 i SECfION FOUR mSTORY SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS I SECfION FOUR LINGUISTICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS Recommended reading I Linguistics SUbject Descriptions The course will give an account of the main techniques used by Batme, G. & Minford, J. (eds) linguists in pursuing these goals, and will survey present I Linguistics is the study of the structure and functioning of knowledge. Seeds ofFire: Chinese Voices ofConscience (Hill & Wang i language. In particular, it seeks to discover what is common to the pb1989) Recommended reading ~l structure of ALL language, so that the basic principles by which Gittings, J. I it works will be understood. It therefore has natural common Hudson, R. China Changes Face: The roadfromrevolution,l949-1989 f borders with other language subjects, including English, but it is Invitation to Linguistics (Martin Robertson) (O.U.P.1989) i not essential to have expertise in a foreign language in order to Texts II study the subject. Greider, J.B. Aitchison, 1. 1ntellectuals and the State in Modern China (Free Press pb Linguistics bears on the relationship between language and The Articulate Mammal (Hutchinson) 1981) thought, and has among its special interests the acquisition and Fromkin, V. (et al) development of language in children, and the interaction of Meisner,M. An Introduction to Language 2nd Australian edn (Holt Mao's China and After (Free Press ph 1986) language and society. Thus it has important connections with such subjects as Education, Philosophy, Psychology, and Rinehart) Sociology. Wardhaugh, R. STATE AND SOCIETY IN TOKUGAWA JAPAN II An Introduction to Sociolinguistics (Basil Blackwell) This course examines the development of the state and state power LINGI01 INTRODUCTION TO LINGUISTICS 20cp References in Japan during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, and the Prerequisite Nil social and ideological consequences of this development. Students Bolinger, D & Sears, D Hours 4 hours per week lectures & tutorials, full year. will have the opportunity to specialise either in the study of Aspects ofLanguage 3rd edn (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich) institutions or the study of political ideas. Examination To be advised. Collins, P & Blair, D (eds) Recommended reading Content Australian English: The Language of a New Society Totman,C. The course provides a general introduction to central issues in (Q.U.P.) Politics in the Tokugawa Bakufu, 1600-1843 (University of Linguistics, and will cover the following areas: Finegan, E & Besnier, N California Press 1988) 1. Language Structure Language: Its Structure and Use (Harcourt Brace Harootunian, H.D. This section of the course introduces basic theoretical and Jovanovich) TowardRestoration The Growth ofPolitical Consciousness methodological principles of linguistics. Some important Lyons, J ofTokugawa Japan (University of California Press 1970) techniques of investigation used by linguists will be introduced, Language and Linguistics (Cambridge University Press) Vlastos,S. and discussion will focus on ways of describing how language Trudgill, P Peasant Protests and Uprisings in Tokugawa Japan works at the levels of phonology, syntax and semantics. Examples Sociolinguistics: An Introduction (penguin) (University of California Press 1986) will be drawn from a number of languages, including Australian Ooms,H. Aboriginal languages, to illustrate the different ways in which information may be organised within a linguistic system. The LING201 LINGUISTIC DESCRIPTION 20cp Tokugawa Ideology: Early Constructs, 1570-1680 (Princeton course includes an introduction to transformational grammar, NOTE that LING201 is a pre-orco-requisite for most Linguistics University Press 1985) whose aim is to provide a scientific account of the structure of 200 level subjects, and a prerequisite for LING301. Koschmann, J.V. language. Prerequisite Linguistics I (LING101) The Mito Ideology: Discourse,Reform and Insurrection in Late TokugawaJapan, 1790-1864 (University of California 2. Language Use and Language Learning Hours 2 hours per week, full year Press 1987) (a) Language and Society Examination Essays and other written assignments The role of social context in language use: An investigation into Content the relationship between language use and social structures, involving such questions as: why do people switch from one way An investigation oflanguage stmctureand techniques of linguistic of speaking to another as the situation changes? How do people analysis with particular emphasis on the following areas: judge different ways of speaking, and why? In what ways do (i) Semantics: Lexical and sentence semantics: sense relations in social groups differ from each other in their linguistic the lexicon; problems of reference; modality; presupposition and "repertoires"? There will also be some discussion of the linguistic implicature. situation in Australia, including social factors relating to migrant (ii) Syntax: Introduction to syntactic theory and its role in and Aboriginal languages, and the development and current explaining the properties oflanguage and the linguistic competence status of Fnglish in Australia of the speaker/hearer. The nature of linguistic generalizations (b) Language AcquiSition & Development and the criteria which must be met by an adequate theory will be LingUists are interested in studying the development oflanguage discussed. in children for two main reasons: (iii) Intonation: The role of intonation in language and its (i) the contribution that it can make to knowledge about relation to syntax; techniques of analysing intonation patterns. child growth and development; and (iv) Phonology: The analysis of speech sounds with particular (ii) the light it can shed on the nature oflanguage in general. reference to their place in the system of language. 102 103 SECfION FOUR LINGUISTICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS SEcrION FOUR LINGUISTICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS References Content Content LING311 to LING320 - See LING211 to LlNG220 Lyons, J The interaction oflanguage and social contexts; the ethnography Syntactic Theory Prerequisite Linguistics ITA (LING201) Semantics Vols 1 & 2 (Cambridge U.P.) of communication; language maintenance and language shift in Corequisite LlNG301 multicultural societies; national language policies. Government/Binding Theory and the explanation of language Radford, A universals as well as the range of variation observed among COMP241 COGNITIVE SCIENCE lOcp Transformational Grammar (Cambridge U.P.) References To be advised languages, and the acquisition of competence. Particular attention In addition to the material listed as texts and references, relevant is given to the formal properties and organisation of the theory, For description, refer to Faculty of Engineering Handbook. This journal articles will be assigned and discussed. LING216 VARIATION IN LANGUAGE lOcp and its application to English and selected additional languages. subject may be counted towards a major sequence in Linguistics at the 200 or 300 level. (Not available in 1991) This course is acontinuationofthe SyntaxcomponentofLING201. LING211 LANGUAGE AND COGNITION lOcp Semantics LING401 LINGUISTIC HONOURS Prerequisite Linguistics I (LINGI01) LING217 HISTORICAL LINGUISTICS lOcp Problems of semantic analysis within generative grammar and Prerequisite Students will be accepted into the Linguistics Corequisite LlNG201 Prerequisite Linguistics I (LING101) other theoretical frameworks. Honours programme at the discretion of the Head of Department. Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Corequisite LlNG201 Text In order to qualify for entry to Linguistics Honours, a student Examination Essays and other written assignments Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Cook,V must normally have completed a major sequence in Linguistics, Chomsky's Universal Grammar (Basil Blackwell) with at least 40 credit points at the 300 level, including LlNG301 Content Examination Essays and other written assignments. References and LING302, with a Credit average or better. Language processing and hemispheric specialisation; Chomskyan Content Lyons,J Hours To be advised and Piagetian views of language acquisition; the relationship An introduction to the study of language change on the lexical, Semantics Vols 1 & 2 (Cambridge U.P.) Examination On seminar papers and essays between language development and the development of other phonological and syntactic levels. cognitive capacities; universals of language development. Radford, A Content Text Transformational Grammar (Cambridge U.P.) References To be advised. LING401 will involve work in current linguistics. Wherever Aitchison, J. In addition to the material listed as texts and references, relevant possible, students will be given the opportunity to extend their Language Change: Progress or Decay (Fontana) LING212 SECOND LANGUAGE ACQUISITION lOcp journal articles will be assigned and discussed. knowledge in areas that are of special interest to them. Reference Prerequisite Linguistics I (LINGlOI) Texts To be advised. Lehmann, W.P. LING302 RESEARCHIMINOR THESIS lOcp Corequisite LlNG201 Historical Linguistics: An Introduction (Holt Rinehart) (NOTE: LlNG302 is a prerequisite for entry to Linguistics Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Honours.) LING218 TOPICS IN SYNTAX lOcp Examination Essays and other written assignments Prerequisite Linguistics ITA (LING201) Content (Not available in 1991) Corequisite LlNG301 Psychological, sociological and linguistic perspectives on the Examination A minor thesis of approximately 6,000 words acquisition of a second language, with particular emphasis on LING219 ANALYSIS OF SPEECH lOcp Content English as a Second Language. The study of 'interlanguage'; (Not available in 1991) acquisition order; error analysis; transfer from first language. An area of linguistic research, approved by the Department. Some attention will also be given to the language learning LlNG220 SPEECH AND LANGUAGE lOcp environment, and to different approaches to second language LING303 RESEARCH/MINOR THESIS lOcp teaching. DISORDERS Prerequisite Linguistics ITA (LING201) References To be advised. Prerequisite Linguistics I (LINGlOl) Corequisite LlNG201 Corequisite 40cp in Linguistics subjects at 300 level LING213 CONVERSATIONAL ANALYSIS lOcp Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Examination A minor thesis of approximately 6,000 words Content (Not available in 1991) Examination Essays and other written assignments Content ~ area of linguistic research, approved by the Department. LING214 STRUCTURE OF LANGUAGES lOcp Language breakdown and impairment in comprehension and OTHER THAN ENGLISH production; phonological, syntactic and semantic deficits in : LING304 DIRECTED READING lOcp (Not available in 1991) aphasia; problems of defining agrammatism and dyslexia Prerequisite Linguistics ITA (LING201) Texts and References To be advised. Corequisites 30cp in Linguistics subjects at 300 level and LING215 LANGUAGE IN MULTICULTURAL lOcp permission of Head of Department SOCIETIES LING301 LINGUISTIC THEORY 20cp Examination Essays and other written assignments Prerequisite Linguistics I or Sociology I (LlNGlOI or SOC 101 , (NOTE: LlNG301 is a pre- or co- requisite for all other Content 102) Linguistics 300 level subjects, and a prerequisite for entry to ~ directed reading course in specified areas of current linguistic Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Linguistics Honours.) rnterest. Examination Essays and other written assignments Prerequisite Linguistics ITA (LING201) Hours 3 hours per week, Semester I Examination Essays and other written assignments 104 105 SECTION FOUR MA TIIEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS ~IONFOUR MA TIIEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Mathematics SUbject Descriptions Texts Anintroductionto statistics: exploratory dataanalysis, uncertainty Piskunov, N. and random variation, probability, use of MlNITAB. Differential and Integral Calculus VoU and II 2nd edn University of Newcastle LEVEL 100 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS (Mir,1981) Tutorial Notesfor MATH1l2 (1991) Texts The usual route for study of Mathematics beyond flrst year - for University of Newcastle Spiegel, M.R. example, to obtain a "Major in Mathematics" starts with MATH References Tutorial notes for MATH103 (1991) Theory and Problems of Advanced Calculus (Schaum, 102 in first semester, followed by MATH 103 in second semester. Ash, C. & Ash, R.B. 1974) However, entry at this point requires an adequate level of The Calculus Tutoring Book (IEEE Press, 1987) References Widder, D. V. knowledge and skill. At the time of writing, the minimum level Stein, S.K. Binmore, K.G. Advanced Calculus (Dover, 1989) is indicated by a mark of at least 120 out of 150 in 3-unit Calculus and Analytical Geometry 3rd edn (McGraw Mathematical Analysis (CUP, 1985) Mathematics at the New South Wales H.S.C. examination. Hill,1982) Brisley, W. MATH202 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL Scp Any student with less than this level of knowledge or skill has Notesfor Linear Algebra (Lecture notes in Mathematics, EQUATIONS MATHI02 MATHEMATICS 102 10cp available MATHIll, followed by MATHl12. This combination University of Newcastle, No.5) Prerequisite BothMATH101 and MATHl020rboth MATH102 allows entry to seven of the seventeen level-200 subjects in Prerequisites Either a satisfactory performance in 3U Chapman, C.R.J. andMATHl03 Mathematics. Such a student could take MATH 103 in a later Mathematics at the NSW HSC (see notes above) or equivalent Introduction to Mathematical Analysis (Routledge & Corequisite MATH203 year to meet the prerequisites for further mathematics subjects. or MATH101 Kegan Paul, 1973) Note that MATH111 is not appropriate for a student who has Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week for one Freedman, D., Pisani, R. & Purves, R. performed substantially above the minimum level for entry to semester Statistics (W.W. Norton & Co., 1978) Examination One 2 hour paper MATH 102/103. Examination One 3 hour paper Giles, J.R. Content MATHl11 MATHEMATICS 111 10cp Content Real Analysis: An Introductory Course. (Lecture notes in Orthogonality, Sturm-Liouville .systems and generalisations, Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6). Series of Orthogonal functions, Fourier Series, Separation of Prerequisite 2U mathematics at HSC level or equivalent Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental variables, The classical partial differential equations (heat! Theorem of Calculus. Taylor's series. Complex numbers. Johnson, R.S. & Vinson, T.O. Not to count for credit with MATH1 01 diffusion, wave, Laplace, Poisson). Differential equations. Anintroduction to the calculus offunctions Elementary Linear Algebra (Harcourt Brace, 1987) Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week for one of two variables. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues, eigenvectors. Text semester. The subject is repeated in each semester. LEVEL 200 MATHEMATICS SEMESTER SUBJECTS Texts University of Newcastle, Examination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment Note that the Prerequisites shown for these subjects are for Mathematics II Tutorial Notes (1991) University of Newcastle 1991. For 1992 refer to the List of Other Approved Subjects. Content Tutorial Notesfor MATH102 (1991) References Elementary algebra, trigonometry and geometry with applications. Walters, R.F.C. & Wehrhahn, K. MATH201 MULTIV ARIABLE CALCULUS Scp Broman, A: Calculus with applications of differentiation and integration. Calculus I 2nd edn (Carslaw, 1989) Prerequisite Both MATH101 and MATH1 02, or both MATH102 An Introduction to Partial Differential Equations (Dover, Newton's method. Trapezium and Simpson's Rules. Vector 1989) References and MATH103 or MATHl02 and Permission of Head of geometry, and its applications. Department. Churchill, R.V. & Brown, J.W. Ayres, F. Text Fourier Series and Boundary Value Problems (McGraw Calculus (Schaum, 1974) Hours 2 hours per week for one semester University of Newcastle Hill, 1978). Edwards, C.H. & Penney, D.E. Examination One 2 hour paper Mathematics 111 Tutorial Notes (1991) Greenberg, M.D. Calculus and Analytical Geometry (Prentice-Hall, 1982) Content References AdvancedEngineering Mathematics (Prentice-Hall, 1988) Anton, H. Partial derivatives, Vector operators, Taylor's Theorem, Line Grossman, S.1. & Derrick, W.R. Ash, C. and Ash, R.B. Elementary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987) integrals, The Calculus Tutoring Book (IEEE Press, 1987) AdvancedEngineering Mathematics (Harper & Row, 1988) Farrand, S. & Poxton, N.J. Multiple and surface integrals, Gauss, Green, Stokes' Theorems. Kreyszig, E. Dobson, A.J. & Stokoe, J. Calculus (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1984) Self-Pacedlntroductory Mathematics 3rdedn (ANU Press, Text Advanced Engineering Mathematics 6th edn pbk (Wiley, Stein, S.K., 1986) University of Newcastle 1988) earlier editions are acceptable Calculus and Analytical Geometry 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill,; Mathematics II Tutorial Notes (1991) 1982) MATH203 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL Scp MATH112 MATHEMATICS 112 10cp References EQUATIONS 1 Prerequisites Either MATH111 or MATHl 01 MATHI03 MATHEMATICS 103 Adams,R.A. Prerequisite: BothMATHl 01 andMATH102 orboth MA THl02 Not to count for credit with MA TH1 02 Prerequisite Either a satisfactory performance in 3 unit! Calculus of Several Variables (Addison Wesley, 1987) and MATH103 Mathematics at the NSW Higher School Certiflcate (see notes Cutjel, C.R. Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week for one Hours: 2 hours per week for one semester semester. The subject is repeated in each semester. above)or equivalent or MATH102or MATHIll andMA THl12' Exercises in Multi variable and V ector Calculus (McGraw Examination: One 3 hour paper Examination One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorial hours per week for one Hill,199O) semester Greenberg, M.D. Content: Contents AdvancedEngineeringMathematics (Prentice-Hall, 1988) Linear differential equations with constant coefflcients, Linear Techniques ofintegration with applications. Differential equations Examination One 3 hour paper differential equations - general case, Series solutions - special and applications. Calculus of several variables together with Content Grossman, S.1. & Derrick, W.R. AdvancedEngineering Mathematics (Harper & Row, 1988) functions, Laplace transforms, Applications. applications. Taylor Series expansions. Complex numbers and Binomial Theorem. Numerical mathematics and computing. Text: their applications. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues, eigenvectors. Vector geometry and linear algebra: vector spaces, linear maps. Kreyszig, E. Analysis of the convergence of sequences and series. Power , Advanced Engineering Mathematics 6th edn pbk (Wiley, University of Newcastle Series. Elementary Theorems of Mathematical Analysis. ,!. 1988); earlier editions are acceptable) Mathematics II Tutorial Notes (1991) 106 107 SECfION FOUR MATIIEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR MATIIEMATICS SUBJECf DESCRIPTIONS References: Clark, C.w. the Cauchy-Riemann Theorem. Elementary functions, MATH209 ALGEBRA Scp ElemenJaryMathematicalAnalysis (Wadsworth-Brooks, Boyce, W.E. & Di Prima, RC. exponential, logarithmic, trigonometric and hyperbolic functions. Prerequisite MATH102, MATH103 and MATH218 ElemenJary DijferenJial Equations and Boundary Value 1982) Integration, the Cauchy-Goursat Theorem. Cauchy's integral Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Problems (Wiley, 1986) Spivak,M. formulae. Liouville's Theorem and the Fundamental Theorem of Examination: One 2 hour paper Burghes, D. & Barrie, M. Calculus (Benjamin, 1967) Algebra. Modelling inJo Dijferential Equations (Ellis-Horwood, References ConJenJ MATH20S ANALYSIS OF METRIC SPACES Scp 1981) Churchill, R.V., Brown, I.W. & Verhey, RP. An introduction to algebraic structures. Groups, rings, algebras, MATH1 02 and MATHl 03 Grossman, S.l. & Derrick, W.R. Prerequisites ComplexVariablesandApplications (McGraw-Hill, 1984) fields. Applications. AdvancedEngineering Mathematics (Harper & Row, 1988) Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Grove, E.A. & Ladas, G. References: Hochstadt, H, Examination One 2 hour paper InJroduction to Complex Variables (Houghton Mifflin, Anton, H. DijferenJial Equations (Dover) ConJenJ 1974) ElemenJary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987) Kreyszig, E. Study in an axiomatic way of the analysis of more abstract spaces: Kreysig, E. Bloom,D.M. Advanced Engineering Mathematics 6th edn pbk (Wiley, metric and normed linear spaces. Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wiley, 1979) Linear Algebra and Geometry (Cambridge, 1979) 1988) earlier editions are acceptable Convergence of sequences and series in Rn with Euclidean and Levinson, N. & Redheffer, R.M. Brisley, W. Martin, W.T. & Reissner, other norms. Complex Variables (Holden-Day, 1970) A Basisfor Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1973) ElemenJary DijferenJial Equations (Dover) Convergence of sequences and series in function spaces with O'Neill, P.V. Hillman, A.P. & Alexanderson, G.L. Sanchez, D.A., Allen, RC. & Kyner, W.T. uniform and integral norms, the three fundamental theorems on Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wadsworth, 1983) A first undergraduate course in abstract algebra DijferenJial Equations 2nd edn (Addison Wesley, 1988) uniform convergence involving continuity, integration and Spiegel, M.R (Wadsworth,1983) differentiation and application to power series. Theory and Problems of Complex Variables (McGraw Lipschutz, S. MATH204 REAL ANALYSIS Scp Completeness, closedness and density in metric spaces; Hill, 1964) Linear Algebra (Schaum, 1974) Prerequisite MATHl 02 and MATH103 Banach Fixed Point Theorem and its application to functions on Tall, D.O. Nering, E.D. Hours 2 hours per week for one semester the real line and to the solution of integral equations. Functions ofa Complex Variable I and II (Routledge & Linear Algebra and Matrix Theory (Wiley, 1964) Kegan Paul, 1970) Examination One 2 hour paper Local and global continuity of mappings on metric spaces and MATH210 DIFFERENTIAL GEOMETRY 1 Scp ConJenJ topological characterisations. MATH207 COMPLEXANALYSIS2 Scp Prerequisite MATH103 Study in an axiomatic way of the properties of the real number Sequential compactness and application in approximation theory. Prerequisite: MA TH206 system and functions defined on the real numbers and on the Corequisites MATH201, MATH218 Text Hours: 2 hours per week for one semester Euclidean plane. Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Giles, I.R. Examination: One 2 hour paper Properties of the real number system: the Supremum Axiom, InJroductionto the Analysis ofMetric Spaces (CUP, 1989) Examination One 2 hour paper completeness and compactness. ConJenJ: References ConJenJ Convergence of sequences and series in the Euclidean plane. Taylor and Laurent series, analytic continuation. Residue theory, Bartle, RG. evaluation of some real integrals and series, the Argument An introduction to the geometry of curves and surfaces. Limits of functions and algebra of limits, continuity and algebra The ElemenJs ofReal Analysis (Wiley, 1976) Parameterised curves and tangent vectors. Vector fields and of continuous functions. Principle and Rouche's Theorem. Conformal mapping and Giles, I.R. applications. Further examination of multivalued functions; integral curves. Vector fields on surfaces. Covariant differentiation Properties of continuous functions: connectedness, compactness Real Analysis: An Introductory Course (Lecture Notes in branch cuts, Riemann surfaces. of vector fields on surfaces. Geodesics and parallel transport. and uniform continuity. The Gauss and Weingarten Maps. Curvature of surfaces. Mathematics, Univ.Newcastle, No.6) References Properties of differentiable functions: Mean Value Theorems References: Goldberg, RR & and Taylor polynomial approximation for functions on the real Churchill, R.V., Brown, I.W. Verhey, R.F. Methods ofReal Analysis (Ginn Blaisdell,1964) ComplexVariablesandApplications (McGraw-Hill, 1984) Thorpe, I.A. numbers and the Euclidean plane. ElemenJary Topics in DijferenJial Geometry (Springer, Simmons, G.P. Grove, E.A. & Ladas, G. The theory of Riemann integration for functions on the real InJroduction to Topology and ModernAnalysis (McGraw 1979) numbers, the study of class of integrable functions. InJroduction to Complex Variables (Houghton Mifflin, Hill,1963) 1974) The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus for functions on the real MATH211 GROUP THEORY Scp White, A.I. Kreysig, E. numbers relating differential and integral calculus. Prerequisites MATHI 02 and MATHI03 Real Analysis (Addison-Wesley, 1968). Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wiley, 1979) Text Hours 2 hours per week for one semester MATH206 COMPLEX ANALYSIS 1 Scp; Levinson, N. & Redheffer, RM. Giles, I.R. Complex Variables (Holden-Day, 1970) Examination One 2 hour paper. Real Analysis: an inJroductory course (Lecture Notes in Prerequisite: MATH1 02 O'Neill, P.V. ConJenJ Mathematics. Univ.Newcastle, No.6). Corequisite MATH201 Advanced Engineering Mathematics (Wadsworth, 1983) Groups, subgroups, isomorphism. Permutation groups, groups of References Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Spiegel, M.R linear transformations and matrices, isometries, symmetry groups Binmore, K.G. Examination One 2 hour paper Theory and Problems of Complex Variables (McGraw of regular polygons and polyhedra. Cosets, Lagrange's theorem, Mathematical Analysis (CUP, 1985) Hill,1964) normal subgroups, isomorphism theorems. ConJenJ Clapham, C.R.I. Tall,D.O. References Complex numbers, Cartesian and polar forms, geometry of the InJroduction to Mathematical Analysis (Routledge & Functions of a Complex Variable I and II (Routledge & Baumslag, B. & Chandler, B. Kegan Paul,1973) complex plane, solutions of polynomial equations. Complex functions, mapping theory, limits and continuity. Differentiation, Kegan Paul, 1970) Group Theory (Schaum, 1968) 108 109 SECTION FOUR MA TIIEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS ~IONFOUR MA TIIEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Budden, P.J. Clements, R.R. This subject will cover a number of areas of operations research Etter,D.M. The Fascination of Groups (CUP,1972) Mathematical Modelling (CUP, 1989) which have proved successful in business, economics and defence. Problem Solving with Structured Fortran 77 (Benjamin, Gardiner, c.P. Cross, M. & Moscardini, A.O. Theseinclude such topics as network and transportation problems, 1984 et seq.) project management, stock control and replacement theory. A First Course in Group Theory (Springer, 1980) Learning the Art ofMathematical Modelling (Ellis Etter, D.M. Herstein, I.N. Horwood,1985) Text: Structured Fortran 77 for Engineers and Scientists Topics in Algebra 2nd edn (Wiley, 1975) Dym, C.L. & Ivey, E.S. University of Newcastle (Benjamin, 1983) Ledermann, W. Principles ofMathematical Modelling (Academic, 1980) Lecture Notes, "Optimization" (1990) Gerald, C.P. & Wheatly, P.O. Introduction to Group Theory (Longman, 1976) Edwards, D. & Hamson, M. References: Applied Numerical Analysis (Addison-Wesley, 1984) Guide to Mathematical Modelling (Macmillan, 1989) Weyl,H. Daellenbach, H.G. & George, J.A. University of Newcastle Computing Centre Symmetry (Princeton, 1952) Haberman, R. Introduction to Operations Research Techniques (Allyn Handbookfor VAXIVMS Mathematical Models (Prentice-Hall,1977) and Bacon, 1978) University of Newcastle Computing Centre MATH212 DISCRETE MATHEMATICS Scp Lighthill, J. Hillier, F.S. & Lieberman, G.J. VAX-ll Fortran Prerequisites MATHlO2 and MATHlO3 or MATHlO2 and Newer Uses of Mathematics (Penguin,1980) Introduction to Operations Research 3rd edn (Holden MATH217 LINEAR ALGEBRA 1 Scp permission of Head of Department Smith,J.M. Day, 1980) Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Mathematical Ideas in Biology (Cambridge, 1971) Taha, H.A. Prerequisite MATHlO2 or (MA THIll and MATH112) Examination One 2 hour paper Smith,J.M. Operations Research 4th edn (MacMillan, 1987) Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Content Models in Ecology (Cambridge, 1974) Hastings, Kevin J. Examination One 2 hour paper Introduction to the Mathematics of Operations Research Content An introduction to various aspects of discrete mathematics of MATH214 MECHANICS Scp (Marcel Dekker, 1989) current interest: Graphs, trees, relations, elements of set theory Matrix representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors. and logic; induction, counting and recurrence equations; basic Prerequisites MATHl 02 and MATHl 03 MATH216 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS Scp Diagonalization. Inner product spaces. Difference and differential combinatorics. Corequisite MATH203 equations. Prerequisites MATHlO2 and MATHlO3 or MATHIOI and Text Hours 2 hours per week for one semester MATHlO2 plus COMPIOI or MATHIll and MATHlO2 plus References Ross, KA. & Wright, C.R.B. Examination One 2 hour paper COMPIOI Anton, H. Discrete Mathematics 2nd edn (Prentice-Hall, 1988) Content Ho",,·s 2 hours per week for one semester Elementary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987) References Summary of vector algebra. Velocity and accelerations. Examination One 2 hour paper Bloorn,D.M. Linear Algebra and Geometry (Cambridge, 1979) Alagor, V.S. Kinematics of a particle. Newton's Law of Motion. Damped and Content Fundamentals of Computing (Prentice-Hall,1989) forced oscillations. Projectiles. Central forces. Inverse square Brisley, W. Sources of error in computation. Solution of a single nonlinear Grimaldi, R.P. law. The energy equation. Motion of a particle system. A Basisfor Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1973) Conservation of linear momentum and of angular momentum. equation. Interpolationand the Lagrange interpolating polynomial. Discrete and Combinatorial Mathematics (Addison Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. Motion with variable mass. Finite differences and applications to interpolation. Numerical Wesley, 1985) differentiation and integration including the trapezoidal rule, Elementary Linear Algebra (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, Kalmanson, K References Simpson's rule and Gaussian integration formulae. Numerical 1987) An Introduction to Discrete Mathematics and its Chorlton, F. solution of ordinary differential equations - Runge-Kutta and Lipschultz, S. Applications (Addison-Wesley, 1986) Textbook of Dynamics (Van Nostrand, 1963) predictor-corrector methods. Numerical solution oflinear systems Linear Algebra (Schaum, 1974) Dierker, P.P. & Voxman, W.L. Goodman, L.E. of algebraic equations. Applications of numerical methods to Roman,S. Discrete Mathematics (Harcourt BraceJovanovich, 1986) Dynamics (Blackie, 1963) applied mathematics, engineering and the sciences will be made An Introduction to Linear Algebra (Saunders, 1985) throughout the course. Marion, J.B. Rorres, C. & Anton, H. MATH213 MATHEMATICAL MODELLING Scp Classical Dynamics (Academic, 1970) Text Applications of Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1979) Prerequisites MATHl02 and MATHI03 Meirovitch, L. Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D. MATH218 LINEAR ALGEBRA 2 Hours 2 hours per week for one semester Methods of Analytical Dynamics (McGraw-Hill,1970) Numerical Analysis 4th edn (Prindle, Weber & Schmidt, Scp 1989) Prerequisite MATHlO2 and MATHI03 or MATHI01 and Examination One 2 hour paper (See also references for MATH 201, 202, 203). References MATHl02 plus COMPIOI Content MATH21S OPERATIONS RESEARCH Atkinson, KE. Hours 2 hours per week for one semester This topic is designed to introduce students to the idea of a An Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Wiley, 1984) Examination One 2 hour paper mathematical model. Several realistic situations will be treated Prerequisites MATHI02 and MATHlO3 or MATHlOI and~ MATH 102 or MATHlll and MATHI02 ' Balfour, A. & Marwick, D.H. beginning with an analysis of th~on-mathematical origin of the Content Programming in StandardFortran 77 (Heinemarm, 1986) problem, the formulation of the mathematical model, solution of Hours: 2 hours per week for one semester Vector spaces and subspaces, Linear Maps, Matrix the mathematical problem and interpretation of the theoretical Examination: One 2 hour paper Cherney, W. & Kincaid, D. representations. Eigenvalues and eigenvectors, Diagonalisation, results. The use of computers is an integral part of this subject. NumericalMathematic sand Computing 2nd edn (Brooks Difference equations. Inner product spaces, Gram-Schmidt Content: References Cole, 1985) process. Orthogonal, unitary, hermitian and normal matrices. Operations research involves the application of quantitativ ' Andrews, J.G. & McClone, R.R. COOper, D. & Clancy, M. References methods and tools to the analysis of problems involving th. Oh! Pascal! (Wiley, 1985) Mathematical Modelling (Butterworth, 1976) operation of systems and its aim is to evaluate the consequen Anton, H. Bender, E.A. of certain decision choices and to improve the effectiveness of Elementary Linear Algebra 5th edn (Wiley, 1987) AnIntroductiontoMathematicalModeliing (WileY,1978) system as a whole. 110 111 SECTrON FOUR MA lliEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECl'rON FOUR MAlliEMA TICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS MATH304 ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL lOcp Smith,M.G. Bloom,D.M. Content EQUATIONS 2 Introduction to the Theory ofPartial Differential Equations Linear Algebra and Geometry (Cambridge, 1979) (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) Prerequisites MATH201, MA TH203, MA TH204 and MA TH218 (Van Nostrand, 1967) Brisley, W. Covariant and contravariant vectors, general systems of (MATH208, 1990) Sneddon, IN. A Basis for Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1973) coordinates. Covariant differentiation, differential operators in Hours 3 hours per week for one semester Elements ofPartial DifferentialEquations (McGraw-Hill, Johnson, R. & Vinson, T. general coordinates. Riemannian geometry, metric, curvature, 1957) Elementary Linear Algebra (Harcourt Brace, 1987) geodesics. Applications of the tensor calculus to the theory of Examination One 2 hour paper. elasticity, dynamics, electromagnetic field theory, and Einstein's Lipschutz, S. Content MATH306 FLUID MECHANICS lOcp theory of gravitation. Linear Algebra (Schaum, 1974) (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) Not in 1991 References Roman,S. Existence and Uniqueness of solutions of first order equations, Prerequisites MATH201 ,MATH203,MATH204 andMATH206 An Introduction to Linear Algebra (Saunders, 1985) Abram,J. vector fields, integral curves. Lie groups, infinitesimal Advisory PrelCorequisite MATH207 Tensor Calculus through Differential Geometry Rorres, C. & Anton, H. transformations, invariant functions and path curves. Invariance Hours 3 hours per week for one semester Applications of Linear Algebra (Wiley, 1979) (Butterworths, 1965) of equations under a given group and reduction to quadratures. Landau, L.D. & Lifshitz, E.M. Construction of all equations which admit a given group. Second Examination One 3 hour paper MATH301 LOGIC AND SET THEORY lOcp The Classical Theory ofFields (Pergamon, 1962) and higher order equations, reduction of order and integration. Content Hours 3 hours per week for one semester Lichnerowicz, A. References (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for300 level subjects) Elements of Tensor Calculus (Methuen, 1962) Examination One 2 hour paper BIuman, G.W. & Cole, J.D. Basic concepts: continuum, pressure, viscosity. Derivation of the Tyldesley, J.R. Similarity Methodsfor Differential Equations (Springer, Content equations of motion for a real incompressible fluid; Poiseuille An Introduction to Tensor Analysis (Longman, 1975) 1974) and Stokes' boundary layer flow. Dynamical similarity and the (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) Willmore, TJ. Hill,J.M. Reynolds number. Flow at high Reynolds number; ideal (non Set Theory: Elementary concepts, relations and functions. An Introduction to Differential Geometry (Oxford, 1972) Solutions of Differential equations by Means of One viscous) fluid; simplification of the equations of motion; Bernoulli Partially and totally ordered sets. Similarity and equivalence. parameter Groups (Pitman, 1982) equations; the case of irrotational flow; Kelvin's circulation Axiom of choice, Zermelo's postulate, Well-ordering theorem MATH303 VARIATIONAL METHODS lOcp theorem. Investigation of simple irrotationalinviscid flows; two and Zorn's lemma Cardinality. Cantor's theorem. Schroder AND INTEGRAL EQUATIONS MATH305 PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL lOcp dimensional flows; circulation; axisymmetric flow around a Bernstein theorem. EQUATIONS 2 sphere; virtual mass. Generation of vorticity at solid boundaries; Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH204 Mathematical Logic: Axiomatic treatment of the propositional Not in 1991 boundary layers and their growth in flows which are initially calculus. Deduction theorem. Completeness theorem. Hours 3 hours per week for one semester irrotational. Prerequisites MATH201, MA TH202, MA TH203 and MA TH204 Quantification theory. Axiomatic treatment of the predicate Examination One 2 hour paper. References calculus. First order theories. Models. Logical validity. GOdel's Hours 3 hours per week for one semester Content Batchelor, G.K. completeness theorem. Examination One 2 hour paper (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level sul>je<:ts)I An Introduction to Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge, 1967) References (:ontent Problems with fixed boundaries: Euler's equation, othlerl~o~'err~:1 Chirgwin, B.H. & Plumpton, C. Crossley, J. et al. equations and their solutions; parametric representation. Pr<>blc~ms'l (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) Elementary Classical Hydrodynamics (Pergamon, 1967) What is Mathematical Logic? (Oxford,1972) with moval>le boundaries: transversality condition; Pirstorderequations: linear equations, Cauchy problems; general Curle, N. & Davies, H.J. Halmos, P.R. boundary conditions; discontinuous solutions; corner' COJlldi:tiorlS.1 golutions; nonlinear equations; Cauchy's method of character Modern Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II (VanNostrand 1968, Naive Set Theory (Springer 1974; Van Nostrand, 1960) Problems with constraints. Isoperimetric problems. istics; compatible systems of equations; complete integrals; the 1971) methods. Fredholm's equation; Volterra's equation; exilstencedi Hofstadter, D.R. methods of Charpit and Jacobi. Higher order equations: linear Goldstein, S. (ed) and uniqueness theorems; method of successive aPIProxirllationSlIl Godel, Escher, Bach: an Eternal Golden Braid (penguin, equations with constant coefficients; reducible and irreducible Modern Developments in Fluid Dynamics Vols I & II other methods of solution. Fredholm's equation with delgenlerateJl 1981) equations; second order equations with varial>le coefficients; (Dover, 1965) kernels and its solutions. characteristics; hyperbolic, paral>olic and elliptic equations. Kline, M. Milne-Thompson, L.M. References Special methods: separation of varial>les; integral transforms; The Loss of Certainty (Oxford,1980) Green's function. Applications in mathematical physics where Theoretical Hydrodynamics (Macmillan, 1968) Arthurs, A.M. Lipschutz, S. appropriate. Panton, R. Complementary Variational Principles (pergamon, Set Theory and Related Topics (Schaum, 1964) References Incompressible Flow (Wiley, 1984) Chambers, L.G. Margaris, A. Paterson, A.R. Integral Equations: A Short Course (International, Colton, D. First Order Mathematical Logic (Blaisdell,1967) Partial Differential Equations -an Introduction (Random A First Course in Fluid Dynamics (Cambridge, 1983) Elsgolc, L.E. Mendelson, E. House, 1988) Robertson, J.H. Calculus of Variations (Pergamon, 1963) Introduction to Mathematical Logic 2nd edn pbk) (Van Courant, R. & Hilbert, D. Hydrodynamics in TheoryandApplication (Prentice-Hall, Kanwal, R.P. Nostrand, 1979) Methods ofMathematical Physics VoUI Partial Differential 1965) Linear Integral Equations (Academic, 1971) Equations (Interscience, 1966) MATH302 GENERAL TENSORS lOcp MATH307 QUANTUM AND STATISTICAL lOcp Weinstock, R. Epstein, B. AND RELATIVITY MECHANICS Calculus of Variations (McGraw-Hill,1952) Partial Differential Equations -an Introduction (McGraw Prerequisites MA TH201, MA TH202, MATH203 and Hill,1962) Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH206 MATH218(MATH208,199O) 'Haack, W. & Wendland, W. Hours 3 hours per week for one semester Hours 3 hours per week for one semester. Lectures on Partial and Phaffian Differential Equations Examination One 2 hour paper Examination One 2 hour paper. (Pergamon, 1972) 113 112 SECTION FOUR MAlHEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECfION FOUR MA TIIEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Content Content Kreysig, E. degree 5 and higher carmot be solved by radicals will be (An essay: see note at the end ofthe listing for 300 level subjects) (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) IntroductoryFunctionalAnalysiswithApplications (Wiley, investigated. 1978) Classical Lagrangian and Hamiltonian mechanics, Liouville Basic counting ideas. Combinatorial identities. Partitions. References Liusternik, L.A. & Sobolev, U.I. theorem. Statistical Mechanics: basic postulate; microcanonical Recurrence relations. Generating functions. Polya methods and Birkhoff, G.D. & MacLane, S. Elements ofFunctional Analysis (Frederick Unger, 1961) ensemble; equipartition; classical ideal gas; canonical ensemble; extensions. Equivalence of some "classical numbers". A Survey ofModern Algebra (Macmillan, 1953) energy fluctuations; grand canonical ensemble; density Construction of some designs and codes. Simmons, G.P. Edwards, H.M. fluctuations; quantum statistical mechanics; density matrix, ideal IntroductiontoTopologyandModernAnalysis (McGraw References Galois Theory (Springer, 1984) Bose gas; ideal Fermi gas; white dwarf stars; Bose-Einstein Hill,1963) Liu, c.L. Herstein, I.N. condensation; superconductivity. Taylor, A.E. and Lay, D.C. Introduction to Combinatorial Mathematics (McGraw TopicsinAlgebra (Wiley,1975) Quantum mechanics: the wave-particle duality, concept of Hill,1984) Introduction to FunctionalAnalysis 2nd edn (Wiley, 1980) Kaplansky, I. probability; development, solution and interpretation of Wilansky, A. Schrodinger's equations in one, two and three dimensions; Krishnamurthy, V. Fields and Rings (Chicago,1969) Combinatorics: TheoryandApplications (Wiley, 1986) Functional Analysis (Blaisdell, 1964) degeneracy; Heisenberg uncertainty; molecular structure. Stewart, I. Young,N. References Brualdi, R. Galois Theory (Chapman & Hall, 1973) Introductory Combinatorics (North Holland, 1977) An introduction to Hilbert space (CUP, 1988) Croxton, C.A. Bogart, K.P. Introductory Eigenphysics (Wiley, 1975) MATH311 MEASURE THEORY & INTEGRATION lOcp MATH313 NUMERICAL ANALYSIS (THEORY) lOcp Introductory Combinatorics (Pitman, 1983) Fong, P. Not in 1991 Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203, MATH204 and ElementaryQuantumMechanics (Addison-Wesley, 1968) Tucker, A. MATH218(MATH208,1990). Programming ability (high Applied Combinatorics (Wiley, 1984) Prerequisite MA TH205 level language) is assumed Huang, K. Hours 3 hours per week for one semester. Statistical Mechanics (Wiley, 1963) Street, A.P. & Wallis, W.o. Hours 3 hours per week for one semester Combinatorics: A First Course (Charles Babbage Examination One 2 hour paper. Examination One 2 hour paper Landau, L.D.& Lifshitz, E.M. Research Centre, 1982) Statistical Physics (pergamon, 1968) Content Content MATH310 FUNCTIONAL ANALYSIS 10cp (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) MATH308 GEOMETRY 2 10cp Prerequisite MATH205 Algebras of sets,Borel sets. Measures, outer measures, measurable Solution of linear systems of algebraic equations by direct and Prerequisites MATH211 and MA TH218(MA TH208, 1990) sets, extension of measures, Lebesgue measure. Measurable Hours 3 hours per week for one semester linear iterative methods; particular attention will be given to the Hours 3 hours per week for one semester functions, sequences of measurable functions, simple functions. influence of various types of errors on the numerical result, to the Examination One 2 hour paper Integration, monotone convergence theorem, the relation between Examination One 2 hour paper. general theory of convergence of the latter class of methods and Content Riemarm and Lebesgue integrals. Lp-spaces, completeness. to the concept of "condition" of a system. Solution by both one Content (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) References step and multistep methods of initial value problems involving (An essay: see note at the end ofthe listing for 300 level subjects) Bartle, R.G. ordinary differential equations. Investigation of stability of linear Normed linear spaces, finite dimensional spaces, inner product marching schemes. Boundary value problems. Finite-difference Euclidean geometry: axiomatic and analytic approach, spaces. Linear mappings, continuity, topological and isometric The Elements of Integration (Wiley, 1966) transformations,isometries, decomposition into plane reflections, (and finite-element methods) of solution of partial differential isomorphisms. Dual spaces, the Halm-Banach Theorem and ,~Barra, G. equations. If time permits, other numerical analysis problems inversions, quadratic geometry. Geometry of incidence: the real reflexivity. Conjugate mappings, operators on Hilbert space, .. Measure Theory and Integration (Ellis Horwood, 1981) projective plane, invariance, projective transformation, conics, such as integration, solution of non-linear equations etc. will be adjoint operators and projection operators. P.R. treated. finite projective spaces. ~almos, Texts Measure Theory (Van Nostrand, 1950) Text References Giles, J.R. ~olmogorov, A.N. & Fomin, S.V. Burden, R.L. & Faires, J.D. Blumenthal, L.M. Introduction to Analysis of Metric Spaces (CUP, 1987) Introductory Real Analysis (Prentice-Hall, 1970) Studies in Geometry (Freeman, 1970) Numerical Analysis 4th edn (Prindle,Weber & Giles, J.R. Schmidt,1989) Eves, H. MATH312 ALGEBRA 10cp Introduction to Analysis ofNormed Linear Spaces References A Survey of Geometry (Allyn & Bacon, 1972) Newcastle Lecture Notes, 1988) Garner, L.E. Atkinson, K.E. References Prerequisites MATH218(MATH208, 1990) and at least one of An Introduction to Numerical Analysis (Wiley, 1978) An Outline ofProjective Geometry (North Holland, 1981) 'MA TII209, MATH210 or MATH211 Bachman, G. & Narici, L. Ames, W.F. Greenberg, M.I. Functional Analysis (Academic, 1966) Hours 3 hours per week for one semester Euclidean and non-Euclidean Geometries 2nd edn Numerical Methods for Partial Differential Equations (Freeman, 1980) Banach, S. lxamination One 2 hour paper (Nelson, 1969) Theorie des Operations Lineaires 2ndedn (Chelsea, -Content Cohen, A.M. et al. MATH309 COMBINATORICS 10cp Brown, A.L. & Page, A. :~~ essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) Numerical Analysis (McGraw-Hill, 1973) Elements of Functional Analysis (Van Nostrand, 1970) Conte, S.D. & de Boor, C. Not in 1991 It\. this topic the solution of polynomial equations and their Prerequisite MATH218(MATH208, 1990) Jameson, G.J.O. . ~Iationships with classical geometrical problems such as Elementary Numerical Analysis 3rd edn (McGraw-Hill, Topology and Normed Spaces (Chapman-Hall, 1974) 1980) Hours 3 hours per week for one semester of the cube and trisection of angles will be studied. It Kolmogorov, A.N. & Fomin, S.V. examine the relations between the roots and Forsythe, G.E., Malcolm, M.A. & Moler, C.B. Examination One 2 hour paper. Elements of the Theory of Functions and of equations, relations which gave rise to Galois Computer Methods for Mathematical Computations Analysis VoU (Grayloch, 1957) and the theory of extension fields. Why equations of (Prentice-Hall, 1977) 114 115 SECTION FOUR MATIIEMATICS SUBJECT ~CTIONFOUR MATHEMATICS SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Isaacson, E. & Keller, H.M. Ponstein, I. The following reference list will be supplemented by other Ireland, K. & Rosen, M. Analysis ofNumerical Methods (Wiley, 1966) Approaches to the Theory of Optimization materia:!s (e.g. journal references) as required. A Classical Introduction to Modern Number Theory Univ.Press, 1980) Lambert,I.D. & Wait, R. References: (Springer, 1982) ComputationalMethods in Ordinary DifferentialEquations Roberts, R.W. & Vanberg, D.E. Anderssen, R.G. & de Hoog, F.R.(eds): Long, Ca:!vin T. (Wiley, 1973) Convex Functions (Academic Press, 1973) TheApplicationofMathematicsinlndustry (Nijhoff, 1982) Elementary Introduction to Number Theory (Heath, 1982) Mitchell, A.R. & Wait, R. Werner, I. Andrews,I.G. & McLone, R.R. The Finite Element Method in Partial Differential Optimization Theory and Applications (Vieweg, 1984) Mathematical Modelling (Butterworths, 1976) Notes on Mathematics Level 300 Essay Assignment Equations (Wiley, 1977) Students enrolled in Level 300 Mathematics semester subjects MATH315 MATHEMATICAL BIOLOGY Barton, N.G. (cd): Pizcr, S.M. & Wallace, V.L. Mathematics-in-Industry Study Group (Proceedings will be required to complete an essay on any topic chosen from Prerequisites MATH201, MATH203 and MATH213 To Compute Numerically: Concepts and Strategies (Little, CSIRO Div isionof Mathematics & Statistics, 1985, the history or philosophy of Mathematics. Only one essay is Brown, 1983) Hours 3 hours per week for one semester 1988, 1989) required and students may nominate in which 300 level semester subject they will present the essay. The essay does not have to be Smith,G.D. Examination One 2 hour paper Burghes, D.N. & Borrie, M.S. on the materia:! directly relevant to fue semester subject irl which Numerical Solution of Partial Differential Equations: Modelling with Differential Equations (Ellis Horwood, Content it is submitted for assessment. Finite Difference Methods (Oxford, 1978) 1981) (An essay: see note at the end ofthe listing for 300 level sub'jec'tsll Crank,I. MATH314 OPTIMIZATION 10cp This subject will show the use of mathematical models to Free and Moving BoundaryProblems (Oxford U.P., 1984) Prerequisites MATH201 and MATH218(MATH208, 1990) the understanding of certain biological phenomena. AnI11mh>r"I'. biological situations will be investigated and students will Hill,I.M. Hours 3 hours per week for one semester One-dimensional Stefan problems: An Introduction expected to use both analytical and computational techniquElS t~,. Examination One 2 hour paper (Longman, 1987) obtain results which can be compared wilthe'xperilnel~ta:L fUldiJ~gs.1 Content References: KlamkID, M.S.(ed): (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) Mathematical Modelling: Classroom notes in Applied Edelstein-Keshet, L. Mathematics (S.I.A.M., 1987) Many situations in Economics, Engineering, Experimental and MathematicalModelsinBiology (Random-House, 1 Un, C.C. & Segel, LA Pure Science are reducible to questions of Optimization. The Jones, D.S. & Sleeman, B.D. course is introduced by considering some simple examples of Mathematics applied to deterministic problems in the Differential Equations and Mathematical Biology natural sciences (Macmillan, 1974) this. The basic analysis and theory of convex sets and convex & Unwin, 1983) functions underlying optimization are then developed. The Neunzert, H.(ed) theory oflinearprogramming, including Bland' s anticyclingrule Murray,I.D. Proceedings of the Second European Symposium on and duality, is examined. Constrained nonlinear optimization in Mathematical Biology (Springer, 1989) Mathematics in Industry (Kluwer Academic, 1988) both the convex and the smooth case are developed from a Segel, L.A. Noble,B. Modeling Dynamic Phenomena inMolecularand Cellular common separation argument. Ekeland's variational principle, Applications of Undergraduate Mathematics in Biology (Cambridge, 1984) descent methods and the one dimensional Fibonacci search for Engineering (Macmillan, 1967) unconstrained problems form the final section of the course. MATH316 INDUSTRIAL MODELLING lOcp Tayler, A.B. Text Mathematical Models in Applied Mechanics (Clarendon University of Newcastle Prerequisites MATH201, MATH202, MATH203, MATH213, Press, 1986) Lecture Notes, "Optimization" (1990) MATH216 and permission of fue Head of De,pa:rtmlent.• Programming ability (high level language ) is assumed Wan,F.Y.M. References Mathematical ModelsandTheir Analysis (Harper & Row , Hours Nominally (see content) 3 hours per week for 1989) Cameron,N. semester Introduction to Linear and Convex Programming (Cambridge U.P., 1985) Examination Depending on course content either one 2 JMATH317 NUMBER THEORY lOcp paper or one paper of less fuan 2 hours duration plus I''''J''''',<. Greig, D.M. Not offered in 1991 Optimization (Longman, 1980) Content Prerequisites MATH102 and MATH103 Hestenes, M.R. (An essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level sub,jecll§l. Hours 3 hours per week in one semestcr Several 'industrial' models will be examined, each cOInmlem:inl11 Optimization Theory: The Finite Dimensional Case (Wiley, :kxamination One 2 hour paper 1975) with the problem in non-rigorous verbal form, proceedIDg Holmes, R.B. mathematical formulation, solving the latter and tennm.atiJ1 A Course on Optimization and Best Approximation with a discussion of the 'industria:!' interpretation essay: see note at the end of the listing for 300 level subjects) (Springer, 1972) mathematical results. Here, 'industria:!' is meant in the 'UJ."ISI101l1IV and primes. Linear and quadratic congruences, possible sense. Models may be taken from some or all of Luenberger, D.G. .,qUadrati<;reciorocitv. Arithmeticfunctions and Mobiusinversion. following industries: finance, commerce, manufacturing, 4Ji,op~lanlline equations. Quadratic number fields. Optimization by Vector Space Methods (Wiley, 1969) exploration, defence, scientific, travel and service. Luenberger, D.G. At the same time small groupings of students will be Introduction to Linear and Nonlinear Programming either a journal-based or an industry-based project. Each I. & Zuckerman, H. (Addison-Wesley, 1973) will present a written report on its project, and probably a An Introduction to the Theory ofNumbers (Wiley, 1980) too. 116 117 SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - FRENCH SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS _ FRENCH Modern Languages Subject Descriptions Progression to Honours Content Byrne, L.S.R. & Churchill, E.L. Students intending to enrol in subjects offered by the Department Students wishing to proceed to Level 400 (Honours) would need A comprehensive language course for school leavers and an A Comprehensive French Grammar 3rd edn (Blackwell) of Modem Languages should contact the Department (French, to supplement their major sequence with an additional forty introduction (one hour a week) to the essential skills and concepts Tournier, M. German or Japanese Section) before completing enrolment. points, taken from non-core units at the 200 and/or 300 levels (see of literary analysis through a chosen set of stories and poems. L' aire du Muguet (Folio Junior) below, entry for FRE4l0). Texts FIaubert, G. French Further information Capelle, G. & Raasch, A. Un coeur simple (Hachette "Lectures") General More detailed information is included in the 1991 edition of the Avec plaisir 2, livre de l'eleve (Hachette) *Either Manual for Students ofFrench. Avec plaisir 2, Cahier d'exercices (Hachette) French subjects are arranged in two groups. One contains the Robert, P. et al "core" units which, at all levels (100, 200, 3(0), are essentially Byrne, L.S.R. & Churchill, E.L. Le Micro-Robert (Societe du Nouveau Littre) A Comprehensive French Grammar 3rd edn (Blackwell) French language units. The other group is made up of the non Core Subjects *Or core units, which propose a choice of literary, linguistic or FREllO ELEMENTARY FRENCH 1 lOcp Ayme, M. et al Robert, P. et al civilisation topics. These non-core units may only be taken in Le Proverbe et autres nouvelles (Hachette) Offered Semester I Le Petit Robert 1 (Societe du Nouveau Littre) conjunction with core units of a corresponding level. All units are Prerequisites Nil *Either of semester length. Core units are worth ten credit points each, *Students will be advised as to the more appropriate dictionary non-core units five. Hours 6 hours per week Robert, P. et al for their needs. Those intending to proceed to a higher level Le Micro-Robert (Societe du Nouveau Littre) should consider purchasing the Petit Robert. Modes of progression (core units) Examination Regular progressive assessment with a major test at the end of the semester *Or Students may follow one of two possible modes of progression FRE230 POST-INTERMEDIATE FRENCH lOcp through the core units, depending on their background in the Content Robert, P. et al Le Petit Robert 1 (Societe du Nouveau Littre) Offered Semester I language. Those with little or no previous knowledge of French This is a first semester language unit designed for those with little would take the following core sequence over six semesters: or no previous knowledge of French. It introduces a basic .. Students will be advised as to the more appropriate dictionary Prerequisites FRE220 or (pre-1990) French IA for their needs. Those intending to proceed to a higher level FRE110 vocabulary and concentrates on speaking and understanding at Hours 3 hours per week the level of the language's most fundamental sentence patterns. should consider purchasing the Petit Robert. FREl20 Examination Predominantly by end of semester exam FRE2l0 Texts FRE210 INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 1 lOcp Content FRE220 Gilbert, P. & Greffet, P. A language course which places emphasis on developing the FRE310 Bonne Route! lA (Hachette) Offered Semester I student's powers of free expression in the oral and written codes, Prerequisites FRE120 or (pre-1990) French IS FRE320 Other texts as detailed in the Manual for Students of French. and on understanding authentic documents; it is also the first Direct entry to FRE120 (in the second semester of first year) Hours 5 or 6 hours per week stage in a comprehensive review of grammatical structures. could be considered for those who already possess a knowledge FRE120 ELEMENTARY FRENCH 2 lOcp Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester Texts of basic French, and who meet the standard set by a formal examination. Offered Semester II ~ Dominique, P. et al placement test. Prerequisites FREllO or its equivalent Content Those who have successfully completed at least 2 Unit French Sans Frontieres 3 . Livre de l'eleve (CIe international) A comprehensive language course for post-beginners, and an for the HSC and who meet the standard set by a formal placement Hours 6 hours per week Dominique, P. et al introduction (one hour a week) to the essential skills and concepts test conducted in the Department prior to final enrolment can be Examination Regular progressive assessment with a major test of literary analysis through a chosen set of stories and poems. Sans Frontieres 3 . Exercices complementaires (Cle admitted to FRE130. They would take the following core sequence: at the end of the semester international) Texts FRE130 Content Byrne, L.S.R. & Churchill, E.L. , As for FRE130 FRE220 An elementary language unit designed as a sequel to FREllO. It A Comprehensive French Grammar 3rd edn (Blackwell) FRE230 completes the introduction to the basic vocabulary and sentence hE220 *Either FRE320 structures of the spoken language, and considers some basic INTERMEDIATE FRENCH 2 lOcp Robert, P. et al FRE330 features of the written language. Offered Semester II FRE340 Texts '~rerequisites FREl30 or FRE210 Le Micro-Robert (Societe du Nouveau Littre) Major sequence Gilbert, P. & Greffet, P. Hours 5 or 6 hours per week *Or Bonne Route! 1B (Hachette) It is recommended that students intending to teach or to pursue Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester Robert, P. et al further studies in the language complete a "major sequence". Other texts as detailed in the Manual for Students ofFrench. Le Petit Robert 1 (Societe du Nouveau Littre) Formal requirements for a major sequence are set out in the BA. Fontent *Students intending to proceed to Level 300 should purchase the regUlations. To complete a major sequence in French, students FREl30 POST-ELEMENTARY FRENCH comprehensive language course designed as a sequel to FREI 30 Petit Robert. commencing in FREll 0 would need to add to their core sequence 'A. Offered Semester I FRE210, with one hour a week devoted to the study of some a further ten non-core points at Level 200, and a further twenty or narrative texts. non-core points at Level 300. Prerequisites HSC French (not 2 UZ) and formal placement FRE310 ADVANCED FRENCH 1 lOcp Those commencing in FRE130 and finishing in FRE340 would Hours 5 or 6 hours per week Offered Semester I need to take, in addition to the core sequence, a minimum of ten Examination Progressive assessment and end of G. & Raasch, A. Prerequisites FRE220 or (pre-l990) French lIS Avec plaisir 2, Livre de l'eleve (Hachette) non-core points at Level 200, and ten at Level 300. Twenty non examination. Hours 3 hours per week core points at Level 300 are recommended, however. Avec plaisir 2, Cahierd'exercices (Hachette) Examination Predominantly by end of semester exam 118 119 SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - FRENCI-I SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - FRENCH Content Non-Core Subjeds FRE204 MODERN FRENCH DRAMA Scp FRE302 FRANCE IN THE 1920s Scp For fuller details and more up to date information about non-core AND THE GREEK MYTH A language course which places emphasis on developing the Offered Semester! in 1991 student's powers of free expression in the oral and written codes, units, including lists of texts, students should consult the 1991 Hours 1 hour per week and on understanding authentic documents; it is also the first edition of the Manw:JI for Students ofFrench. Pre- or corequisites Either FRE310, FRE320, FRE330 or Examination End of semester test FRE340 stage in a comprehensive review of grammatical structures. It should be noted that the Level 200 units devoted to literary Content Texts topics are designed primarily for those who have already Hours 1 hour per week completed FRE220. These units are not recommended for those A study of how modem dramatists transform the myths of the As for FRE230. Examination End of semester test and individual student expose classical world and reinvest them with new meanings. who have completed only FREl20 and obtained a pass result in Content it. Texts FRE320 ADVANCED FRENCH 2 10cp A study of society, politics, art and style in France during this All students intending to enrol in non-core units should seek Giraudoux, J. Offered Semester II most fascinating of decades. advice from the staff of the French Section before completing La guerre de Troie n'aura pas lieu (Livre de Poche) their enrolment. Forms are available on which you should indiCate Texts Nil Prerequisites FRE230 or FRE310 Anouilh, J. your choice of non-core units; these should be returned to the Hours 3 hours per week Antigone (Didier) Reference A reading list is available French Section office by mid-January 1991. Examination Predominantly by end of semester exam FRE303 THE 19th CENTURY NOVEL Scp Content FRE20S THE PHONETICS OF FRENCH I Scp FRE201 VOLTAIRE AND Scp Offered Semester I in 1991 A language course designed as a sequel to FRE230 or FRE31 O. THE ENLIGHTENMENT Offered Semester I Pre- or corequisites Either FRE31O, FRE320, FRE330 or Pre- or corequisites Either FRE21O, FRE220 or FRE230 Texts Offered Semester I in 1991 FRE340 Hours 1 hour per week As for FRE230 or FRE310. Pre- or corequisites Either FRE210, FRE220 or FRE230 Hours 1 hour per week Hours 1 hour per week Examination End of semester test Examination End of semester test supplemented by progressive FRE330 ADVANCED FRENCH 3 10cp Examination End of semester test Content assessment Offered Semester I Content An introductory course in French phonetics covering the Content articulation and phonetic notation of the sounds of French, both Prerequisites FRE320 or (pre-1990) French IIA or illS A study of selected writings of Voltaire, with special attention to in isolation and in combination. A study of at least two very different nineteenth century French Hours 3 hours per week his comic masterpiece Candide. novelists. Texts As detailed in the Manual for Students of French. Examination Predominantly by progressive assessment Text Texts Content Voltaire FRE206 THE PHONETICS OF FRENCH II As detailed in the Manual for Students ofFrench. Candide (Blackwell) Scp An advanced language course with a strong audio-visual base, Offered Semester II designed to reinforce the major skills (speaking, listening, writing) FRE304 THE 20th CENTURY NOVEL Scp Prerequisite FRE205 with the emphasis on communication. Students are introduced on FRE202 THEMES ET TEXTES Scp Offered Semester II in 1991 another level to the techniques of translation. Offered Semester II in 1991 ,Pre- or corequisites Either FRE21 0, FRE220 or FRE230 Pre- or corequisites Either FRE3lO, FRE320, FRE330 or Texts Pre- or corequisites Either FRE21O, FRE220 or FRE230 Hours 1 hour per week FRE340 Robert, P. et al Hours 1 hour per week Examination End of semester test Hours 1 hour per week Le Petit Robert 1 (Societe du Nouveau Littre) Examination End of semester test :r:ontent Examination End of semester test Other course books as detailed in the Manw:JI for Students of A more advanced phonetics course covering phonetic transcription Content French. Content and Texts land oral practice in various registers (formal, conversational, A literary topic which may be author-based or thematic in approacb. A study of two twentieth century French novelists. Reference etc.) with special reference to intonation patterns and features For current content and texts see the Manualfor Students ofFrench. Judge, A. & Healey, F.G. .such as elision, linking, assimilation etc. Texts A Reference Grammar ofModern French (Arnold) Texts As detailed in the Manw:JI for Students of French. Proust, M. FRE203 ROBBE-GRILLET AND Scp Combray (Harrap) THE NARRATIVE FRE340 ADVANCED FRENCH 4 10cp THE FRENCH CINEMA Scp Duras,M. Offered Semester I in 1991 Offered Semester II .offered Semester II in 1991 Moderato cantabile (Methuen) Pre- or corequisites Either FRE2lO, FRE220 or FRE230 Prerequisite FRE330 Either FRE3lO, FRE320, FRE330 or Hours 1 hour per week FRE30S FRENCH POETRY FROM Scp Hours 3 hours per week BAUDELAIRE TO APOLLINAIRE Examination Progressive assessment supplemented by 1 hour per week Examination Predominantly by progressive assessment semester test Offered Semester I in 1991 Content P:amllUlltlon Progressiveassessment supplemented by an end of Content test Pre- or corequisites Either FRE3lO, FRE320, FRE330 or An advanced language course designed as a sequel to FRE330. A theory of narrative approached through the study of FRE340 Texts texts and films of Alain Robbe-Grillet. Hours 1 hour per week study of the French cinema both as an art form and in relation As for FRE330 Texts French society. Examination End of semester test supplemented by progressive assessment As detailed in the Manw:JI for Students ofFrench, ,...... 'u" ..... - Nil the French Section office. 120 121 SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - FRENCH SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - GERMAN Content Texts German This course is intended for students with little or no previous A study of three of France's most important modern poets. Leon,M. German can be taken as an area of specialisation in the Faculty of knowledge of German. Elementary German, Semester 1 and /l, Texts Oral niveau 1. Cahier de l'eleve (Hachette) Arts, but is also a useful second string for students of Commerce, is a complete German course, developing the skills of Economics, Engineering and Science. understanding, speaking, reading and writing German. It will Baudelaire, C. Pimsleur, P. equip students with the necessary basic structures and vocabulary Les Fleurs du mal (Garnier-Hammarion) Le Pont sonore (Hachette) Courses in German are offered as major semester units of 10 (100 to expand their knowledge of the language either in formal level), 15 (200 level), and 20 credit points (300 level), and as Vedaine, P. studies or by exposure to the language FRE410 HONOURS FRENCH separate options of at least 5 credit points. Students can enrol in Choix de poesies (Larousse) Text Offered Full year either a major unit, or a selection of separate options, or a Apollinaire, G. combination of both. Students wishing to study a full course of AufderstraBe, H. Alcools (Larousse) Prerequisites German should enrol in a major subject. Themen 1, Kursbuch & Arbeitsbuch., Munich 1983 Students admitted to FRE410 will have completed a major All units are of semester length, and students possessing adequate FRE306 LITERATURE AND SOCIETY IN 5cp sequence in French (including core units at least to the level of linguistic competence may start a German course in Second GERl20 ELEMENTARY GERMAN, THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY FRE320), and have earned, in addition to their major sequence, lOcp Semester. SEMESTER 2 Offered Semester II in 1991 a minimum of fortynon-core points in French subjects at Level 200 and/or Level 300. A high level of performance is expected, Courses are offered at the following linguistic levels: Offered Semester 2 Pre- or corequisites Either FRE3lO, FRE320, FRE330 or particularly in the Level 300 units. Students who have passed Elementary German (100 level) Prerequisite GERII0 or equivalent (GER2UZ at HSC, a WEA FRE340 neither FRE330 nor FRE340 may be required to complete some Post-HSC-German (100 level) or German Saturday School course, stay in Germany, etc.) Hours 1 hour per week work drawn from these units in addition to the work prescribed Continuing German (200 level) subject to approval by the Section for the Honours year. Examination End of semester test Intermediate German (200, and 300 level) Hours 6 hours per week Students who wish to enter FRE410 should seek an interview Content Advanced German (300 level) Examination Selective progressive assessment and end of with the senior member of the French Section staff as early as Business German is offered at 100 and 200 level semester examination A study of some seventeenth century authors in the context of the possible, and in any case well prior to enrolment, as it is customary social background of their age. to undertake some long vacation reading as preparation for the All students considering enrolling in German should consult a Content Texts As detailed in the Manual for Students ofFrench. Honours year. member of staff. An introduction to the major structures and basic vocabulary of Hours 5 hours per week of class contact, in addition to the German; the aim is a working knowledge in speaking, FRE307 APPROACHES TO 5cp research project 100 LEVEL COURSES understanding, reading and writing the language Major Subjects WRITING FRENCH Examination As prescribed by the Examination Committee of Text Offered Semester II in 1991 the French Section Two types of first-year courses are offered: AufderstraBe, H. Pre- or corequisites Either FRE3lO, FRE320, FRE330 or Content 1'. Elementary German for beginners Themen, 1 & 2, Kursbuch & Arbeitsbuch (Munich 1983) FRE340 The Level 400 subject involves advanced work in French language ). Post-HSC-German for students who have completed the HSC Hours 1 hour per week and literature, and is designed, inter alia, as an introduction to the "In German or hold similar qualifications. Some students who GERl30 POST-HSC GERMAN, SEMESTER 1 lOcp Examination Progressive assessment techniques ofresearch. There is a core of seminars and assignments have completed the HSC may nevertheless find it advisable to Offered Semester 1 in literary criticism, bibliography and research methods, ~ol in Elementary German. Prerequisite A satisfactory result in the HSC in German or Content comparative stylistics and advanced reading and discussion in ~ote: GERI20; or pre-I990 German IS or the equivalent (a WEA, The study and imitation of French techniques of presenting French. In addition, there are five ten-hour seminars devoted to , Students with some knowledge of German wishing to further their German Saturday School course, stay in Germany, etc.) subject events and ideas in writing. literary topics, in which every effort is made to accommodate , 'competence of the language should consider enrolling in both to approval by the Section student choice. A major essay of some 10,000 words in French is ' Text Elementary German and Post-HSC German or in Elementary to be submitted by the beginning of November on a topic agreed Hours 5 hours per week Vigner,G. 'german and German Language Revision and perhaps also in upon between the student and the staff of the French Section. Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester La machine a ecriture 2 (Cle international) Business German. Texts To be advised examination Students with considerable knowledge of German may consider Content FRE308 THE SPOKEN LANGUAGE 5cp enrolling in Intermediate German courses. A revision and extension of all the major structures of German, Offered Semester I in 1991 , either case, the permission of the Section must be obtained. an introduction to the study of basic texts Pre- or corequisites Either FRE310, FRE320, FRE330 or Text FRE340 ELEMENTARY GERMAN, 10cp Lohnes,Strothmarm Hours 1 hour per week SEMESTER 1 German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. Examination End of semester test Content GER140 POST HSC GERMAN, SEMESTER 2 lOcp This course studies the French language used as a spontaneous Prerequisite GER130 or the equivalent, subject to approval by means of oral communication, and includes some study of Selective progressive assessment and end of the Section examination regional variations. Offered Semester 2 Introduction to the major structures and basic vocabulary German. Hours 5 hours per week Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester examination 122 123 SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - GERMAN SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - GERMAN Conteru Content Text Hours 6 hours per week Revision and extension of the major structures of German. The An introduction to the vocabulary and structures of business Herde, D and Royce, D. Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester study of basic texts German Vertrag in der Tasche. Practical Business in German. examination Text: (Hodder & Stoughton, London 1989) Text Content Lohnes, Strothmann Herde, D. and Royce, D. A revision and extension of all the major structures of German (3 German A Structural Approach 4th edn. Vertrag inder Tasche,Practical BusinessGerman (Hodder 200 LEVEL SUBJECTS hours). The study of graded texts (2 hours). The study of literary & Stoughton, London 1989) Major Subjects texts (l hour) Separate Options: Students who have completed Elementary German (GER120) Text GER111 GERMAN LANGUAGE REVISION, Scp GER121 GERMAN LANGUAGE REVISION, Scp will enrol in Continuing German (GER21O). Lohnes, Strothmann SEMESTER 1 SEMESTER 2 Students who have completed Post-HSC German will enrol in German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. B Offered Semester 1 Offered Semester 2 Intermediate German A or Intermediate German or in both; Prerequisite GER111 or the equivalent, subject to approval by students can also enrol in Intermediate German A and a number Prerequisite A satisfactory result in the HSC in German; or of the individual courses offered (see below). GER240 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN A 1Scp GER120; or pre-1990 German IS; or the equivalent (a WEA, the Section SEMESTER 2 German Saturday School course, stay in Germany, etc.); subject Hours 3 hours per week GER210 CONTINUING GERMAN A, 1Scp Offered Semester 2 to approval by the Section Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester SEMESTER 1 Prerequisite 1991 10 credit points at 200 level, or the equivalent, Hours 3 hours per week examination Offered Semester 1 subject to approval by the Section Content Revision and extension of the major structures of Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester Hours 3 hours per week examination German Prerequisite GER120 or pre-1990 German IS or the equivalent subject to approval by the Section Examination Progressive and selective assessment Content Text Hours. 6 hours per week Content A revision and extension of all the major structures of German Lohnes, Strothmann German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester 2 hours of language study, 1 hour of literature Text , examination Lohnes, Strothmann Content GER260 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN B, 1Scp German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. GER122 BASIC GERMAN TEXT STUDY, Scp SEMESTER 2 A revision and extension of all major structures of German (3 SEMESTER 2 Offered Semester 2 hours). The study of graded texts (2 hours). The study of literary As for GER240 GER112 BASIC GERMAN TEXT STUDY, Scp fexts (l hour) SEMESTER 1 Prerequisite GERl12 or the equivalent subject to approval by Text Separate Options Offered Semester 1 the section Lohnes, Strothmann GER211 CONTINUING GERMAN LANGUAGE, Scp Corequisite GER121. In the case of students with considerable Prerequisite As for GER111 German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. SEMESTER 1 knowledge of German this corequisite may be waived Corequisite GER111. In the case of students with considerable Offered Semester 1 Hours 2 hours per week knowledge of German this corequisite may be waived GER230 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN A, 1Scp Prerequisite GER120 orpre-l990 German IS or the equivalent, Hours 2 hours per week Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester SEMESTER 1 subject to approval by the Section examination Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester Offered Semester 1 Hours 3 hours per week examination Content , Prerequisite 199120 credit points of German orpre-I990 German Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester Content The study of graded texts .. IN or German IS or the equivalent, subject to approval by the examination Section The study of graded texts Text Content Lohnes, Strothmann Text A revision and extension of all the major structures of German German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. Ijxamination Progressive and selective assessment Lohnes, Strothmann Text German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. Content GER123 BUSINESS GERMAN, SEMESTER 2 Lohnes, Strothman 2 hours of language study, 1 hour of text study German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. GER113 BUSINESS GERMAN, SEMESTER 1 Scp Offered Semester 2 Prerequisite GER113 Offered Semester 1 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN B, 1Scp GER212 INTRODUCTORY GERMAN Scp SEMESTER 1 Prerequisite A satisfactory result in the HSC in German; or Corequisite GER121, or the equivalent. In the case of TEXT STUDY, SEMESTER 1 GER120; or pre-1990 German IS; or the equivalent (a WEA, with considerable knowledge of German, this corequisite may Offered Semester 1 waived German Saturday School course, stay in Germany, etc.); subject Prerequisite As for GER211 to approval by the Section Hours 2 hours per week CONTINUING GERMAN B, 1Scp Corequisite GER211. In the case of students with considerable SEMESTER 2 Corequisite GER111. In the case of students with considerable Examination Progressive assessment and end of knowledge of German, this corequisite may be waived knowledge of German, this corequisite may be waived examination Hours 2 hours per week Hours 2 hours per week Content rrel'fM.n.if", GER21 0 or the equivalent, subject to approval by Examination Selective progressive assessment and end of Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester An introduction to the vocabulary and structures of semester examination examination German. 124 125 SECfION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - GERMAN SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS _ GERMAN Comem GER234 INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY B, Scp Hours 2 hours per week SEMESTER 1 The study of graded texts Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester GER246 INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY D, Scp SEMESTER 2 Text Offered Semester 1 eXamination Offered Semester 2 Lohnes, Strothmann Comem German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. GER23S INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY C, Scp The study of graded texts. Pre~equisite 10 credit points at 200 level or the equivalent, SEMESTER 1 subject to approval by, the Section Text Offered Semester 1 Corequisite A German language option GER2l3 BUSINESS GERMAN, SEMESTER 1 Scp Lohnes, Strothmann Offered Semester 1 German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. Hours 1 hour a week GER236 INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY D, 5cp Comem Prerequisite GER120 or pre-1990 German IS or the equivalent, SEMESTERl subject to approval by the Section GER223 BUSINESS GERMAN, SEMESTER 2 Scp As for GER233 - GER236 Offered Semester 1 Corequisite GERlll or GER211. In the case of students with Offered Semester 2 Prerequisite GERI40; or GER121; or GERI20, subject to considerable knowledge of German, this corequisite may be Prerequisite GER213 or the equivalent, subject to approval by 300 LEVEL SUBJECTS waived approval by the Section; or pre-l990 German IN or German IS or the equivalent, subject to approval by the Section the section Major Subjects Hours 2 hours per week Corequisite A German language option, this corequisite may be Corequisite GER221 or the equivalent Students, depending on their competence in the language, can Examination Selective progressive assessment and end of waived, subject to approval by the Section. In the case of students with considerable knowledge of German, enrol either at the Intermediate or the Advanced level. semester examination Hours 1 hour a week this co-requisite may be waived Comem GER3l0 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN, Examination Progressive and selective assessment 20cp An introduction to the vocabulary and structures of business SEMESTER 1 Comem progressive assessment and end of German semester examination Offered Semester 1 GER233 - GER236 consist of one each of the Intermediate Text Prerequisite 15 Credit points at 200 level or the equivalent, literature options offered by the German Section. subject to approval by the Section or pre-1990 German ITS or Herde, D. & Royce, D. An introduction to the vocabulary and structures of business Vertrag inderTasche.PracticalBusinessGerman. (Hodder Some of these options will be offered in the daytime, others in the German ITA evening, subject to student demand, staff availability and timetable German & Stoughton, London 1989) Hours 6 hours per week constraints. Examination Progressive and selective assessment GER23l INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Scp Some of these options may be suitable for students enrolled in D. & Royce, D. Comem LANGUAGE A, SEMESTER 1 GER211 and GER212. Vertrag in derTasche,Practical Business German (Hodder & Stoughton, London 1989 A minimum of2 hours oflanguage, and 2 hours of literature, and Offered Semester 1 For a list of options consult the German Notice Board and Section Office. two further hours of either literature or language Prerequisite GER121 orGER140 orpre-1990 GermanIN orIS INTERMEDIATE GERMAN lOcp or the equivalent, subject to approval by the Section GER22l CONTINUING GERMAN LANGUAGE, Scp LANGUAGE A, SEMESTER 2 GER330 ADVANCED GERMAN A, 20cp Hours 2 hours per week SEMESTER 2 SEMESTER 1 Examination Progressive and selective assessment Offered Semester 2 Offered Semester 1 Comem Prerequisite GER211 or the equivalent, subject to approval by INTERMEDIATE GERMAN lOcp Prerequisite 15 credit points from GER240 - GER246 or the Emphasis on reading, speaking and grammar revision the Section LANGUAGE B, SEMESTER 2 equivalent, subject to approval by the Section orpre-l990 German IIS or German IIA Hours 3 hours per week Hours 6 hours a week GER232 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN lOcp Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester 10 credit points at 200 level, or the equivalent, LANGUAGE B, SEMESTER 1 examination to approval by the Section Examination Progressive and selective assessment Offered Semester 1 Comem Comem Prerequisite As for GER231 Revision and extension of the major structures of German. Language and text classes, also involving the study of German films Hours 2 hours per week Text INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY A, Scp Examination Progressive and selective assessment Lohnes, Strothmann SEMESTER 2 GER3S0 ADVANCED GERMAN B, Comem German. A Structural Approach 4th edn. 20cp SEMESTER 1 Translation from and into German and the study of German As for GER330 videos GER222 INTRODUCTORY GERMAN TEXT STUDY, SEMESTER 2 INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY B, Scp SEMESTER 2 GER320 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN, 20cp GER233 INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY A Sc Offered Semester 2 SEMESTER 2 SEMESTERl Prerequisite GER211; or the equivalent, subject to approval Offered Semester 2 Offered Semester 1 the Section INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY C, Scp Prerequisite 15 credit points at 300 or the equivalent, subject to Corequisite GER221. In the case of students with collsi(ieniblt SEMESTER 2 approval by the Section knowledge of German, this co-requisite may bewaived 126 127 SECfION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - GERMAN SECfION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - GERMAN GER3SS ADVANCED GERMAN Hours 6 hours per week GER314 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Scp Scp GER326 INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY", Scp LITERATURE C, SEMESTER 1 Examination Progressive and selective assessment LITERATURE B, SEMESTER 1 SEMESTER2 Offered Semester 1 Content Offered Semester 1 Offered Semester 2 A minimum of two hours oflanguage, and two hours of literature, Prerequisite 15 credit points at 300 level or the equivalent, GER3S6 ADVANCED GERMAN two further hours of either literature or language. GER31S INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Scp Scp subject to approval by the Section LITERATURE C, SEMESTER 1 LITERATURE D, SEMESTER 1 Corequisite GER321 or GER322 Offered Semester 1 Offered Semester 1 GER360 ADV ANCED GERMAN A, 20cp Contact Iwurs 2 hours a week SEMESTER 2 Prerequisite as for GER351 Examination Progressive and selective assessment Offered Semester 2 GER316 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Scp Pre- or corequisite GER351 or GER352 LITERATURE D, SEMESTER 1 Content Prerequisite At least 10 credit points from GER330 - GER356 Hours 2 hours per week Offered Semester 1 GER 323 - GER326 consist of two each of the Intermediate Hours 6 hours a week Examination Progressive and selective assessment literature options offered by the German Section. Prerequisite 15 credit points at 200 level or pre-l990 German lIS Examination Progressive and selective assessment or German IIA Some of these options will be offered in the daytime, others in the Content The intensive study of works of German literature evening, subject to student demand, staff aVailability and timetable Corequisite GER311 or GER312 constraints. Language and text classes, also involving the study of German Hours 2 hours a week films INTERMEDIATE GERMAN lOcp For a list of options consult the German Notice Board and Section Examination Progressive and selective assessment LANGUAGE C, SEMESTER 2 Office. GER380 ADVANCED GERMAN B, 20cp Content Offered Semester 2 GER381 SEMESTER 2 GER313 - GER316 consist of two each of the Intermediate Prerequisite GER311 or GER312; or GER351 or GER352; or ADVANCED GERMAN Scp LANGUAGE A, SEMESTER 2 Offered Semester 2 literature options offered by the German Section. equivalent, subject to approval by the Section Offered Semester 2 As for GER360 Some of these options will be offered in the daytime, others in the evening, subject to student demand, staff availability and timetable . Examination Progressive and selective assessment Prerequisite GER351 or GER352; or the equivalent, subject to constraints. approval by the Section Separate Options Content For a list of options consult the GermanNoticeBoard and Section Hours 2 hours a week GER311 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 10cp Office. ;.~:mplnasls on reading, speaking and grammar extension LANGUAGE C, SEMESTER 1 Examination Progressive and selective assessment Content Offered Semester 1 GER3S1 ADVANCED GERMAN INTERMEDIATE GERMAN lOcp Prerequisite 15 credit points at 200 level or the equivalent, LANGUAGE A, SEMESTER 1 LANGUAGE D, SEMESTER 2 The study of German films subject to approval by the Section or pre-1990 German lIS or Offered Semester 1 GermanlIA GER382 ADVANCED GERMAN Prerequisite GER241 or GER242 or pre-l990 German lIS or Prerequisite GER311 or GER312; or GER351 or GER352; or Scp LANGUAGE B, SEMESTER 2 Hours 2 hours per week German ITA or the equivalent, subject to approval by the Section equivalent, subject to approval by the Section Offered Semester 2 Examination Progressive and selective assessment Hours 2 hours a week: 2 hours per week Prerequisite GER351 or GER352; or the equivalent, subject to Content Examination Progressive and selective assessment ,nXi(un!:nal'lOn Progressive and selective selection approval of the Section Emphasis on reading, speaking and grammar extension Content Hours 2 hours a week The study of German films J "1JIIM,ill(Jln from and into German and study of German videos GER312 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN 10cp Examination Progressive and selective assessment LANGUAGE D, SEMESTER 1 Content GER3S2 ADVANCED GERMAN INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY E, lOcp Offered Semester 1 LANGUAGE B, SEMESTER 1 SEMESTER 2 Advanced language study Prerequisite 15 credit points at 200 level orpre-l990 German lIS Offered Semester 1 or German IIA or the equivalent, subject to approval by the GER383 ADVANCED GERMAN As for GER351 Scp Section LITERATURE A, SEMESTER 2 INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY F, 10cp Hours 2 hours per week SEMESTER 2 Offered Semester 2 GER3S3 ADVANCED GERMAN Examination Progressive and selective assessment LITERATURE A, SEMESTER 1 GER384 ADVANCED GERMAN Content Offered Semester 1 Scp LITERATURE B, SEMESTER 2 Translation from and into German, and study of German videos INTERMEDIATE TEXT STUDY G, Scp SEMESTER 2 Offered Semester 2 GER3S4 ADVANCED GERMAN GER313 INTERMEDIATE GERMAN Scp LITERATURE B, SEMESTER 1 GER38S ADVANCED GERMAN LITERATURE A, SEMESTER 1 Offered Semester 1 Scp LITERATURE C, SEMESTER 2 Offered Semester 1 Offered Semester 2 128 129 SECfION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS - GE~ ~CTIONFOUR MODERN LANGUAGES SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS _ JAPANESE GER386 ADVANCED GERMAN 5cp Japanese JPN220 INTERMEDIATE WRITTEN LITERATURE D, SEMESTER 2 lOcp The object of the course is to equip students with a working JAPANESE Offered Semester 2 knowledge of the language so that they may make use of it in Offered Full year Prerequisite 10 credit points at 300 level; or the equivalent, employment as well asin such diSCiplines as Japanese commerce, Prerequisites Elementary Japanese (JPNllO) or (pre-1990) economics, geography, history ,linguistics,literature and sociology subject to approval by the Section Japanese I or equivalent in the corresponding Departments. Corequisite GER381 or GER382 Corequisites Intermediate Spoken Japanese (JPN210) Hours 2 hours per week ELEMENTARY JAPANESE 20cp Hours 2 class hours per week Examination Progressive and selective assessment Offered Full year Content Written Japanese at intermediate level Content Prerequisites Nil Examination Progressive assessment The intensive study of works of German literature Hours 6 class hours per week Texts Soga, M. et al 400 LEVEL SUBJECTS Standard Japanese (Taishukan) GER 410 HONOURS GERMAN An introduction to the phonology and structure of the language with practice in listening, speaking, reading, and writing. Travel inJapan (The Association for Overseas Technical Prerequisite A high performance in German at the 300 level with Scholarship) a minimum total of 40 credit points; or the equivalent, subject to approval by the Section References Contact hours at least six hourS per week Nelson, A.N. (The Japan Times) The Modern Reader's Japanese-English Character Examination A minor thesis in addition to language assignments Dictionary (Tuttle) and seminar assessment Ogawa, Y. et al (eds.) Content Basic Japanese-English Dictionary (Bonjinsha) Obunsha's Essential English-Japanese Dictionary Two language classes and two literature seminars per semester (Obunsha) A Guide to Reading and Writing Japanese (Tuttle) The course can be taken part-time over two years. It is also JPN311 ADVANCED SPOKEN JAPANESE I lOcp possible to take joint Honours with other disciplines. In either Offered Semester I case, the exact division will depend on the requirements of each Supplementary Grammar Notes to An Introduction to Modern Japanese, Pts 1 &2 (University of Michigan) Prerequisites Intermediate Spoken Japanese (JPN210) or (pre- individual student, who must have a proposed programme 1990) Japanese ITA approved by the Section before enrolment. It is suggested that Frakllhaslhi, M. more than half the coursework be carried out in the first year, to Pocket Romanized English-Japanese Dictionary Hours 3 class hours per week allow time for the writing of essays in the second year. Content Spoken Japanese at advanced level INTERMEDIATE SPOKEN 20cp Examination Progressive assessment JAPANESE Text Mizutani, N. Elementary Japanese (JPNllO) or (pre-1990) Nihongo Chuukyuu Zenki (Bonjinsha) I or equivalent References Io-Y'-eOllISI'ces Intermediate Written Japanese (JPN220) Makino, S. & Tsutsui, M. A Dictionary of Basic Japanese Grammar (The Japan Spoken Japanese at intermediate level Times) ~mi'Ultlion Progressive assessment JPN312 ADVANCED SPOKEN JAPANESE II IOcp Offered Semester IT (The Japan Times) Prerequisites Advanced Spoken Japanese I (JPN311) Hours 3 class hours per week An Introduction to Advanced Spoken Japanese Content Spoken Japanese at adv!ll1ced level (University Center for Japanese Language Studies) Examination Progressive assessment Text Mizutani, N. Handbook ofModern Japanese Grammar Nihongo Chuukyuu (Bonjinsha) (The Hokuseido press) References Makino, S. & Tsutsui, M. A Dictionary ofBasic Japanese Grammar (TheJapanTimes) 130 131 SECTION FOUR MODERN LANGUAGES - JAPANESE SUBJECT DESCRIPTIO~ @IONFOUR PillLOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS JPN 321 ADVANCED WRITTEN JAPANESE I lOcp JPN341 READING IN MODERN JAPANESE I lOcp Philosophy Subject Descriptions Texts Offered Semester I Offered Semester I The 100 level subject PHILl 01 offers a broadly based introduction Clendinnen, F.J. Prerequisites Intermediate Written Japanese (JPN220) or (pre- Prerequisites Intermediate Written Japanese (JPN220) or (pre- to the main areas of philosophy, namely metaphysics, Perspectives of Scientific Explanation 1990) Japanese IIA 1990) JapaneseIIA epistemology, value theory and reasoning. Each of these areas is Hobbes, T. Hours 3 class hours per week Hours 3 class hours per week explored at greater depth in the 200 and 300 level subjects, some Leviathan (penguin) of which are offered in alternate years to permit wider choice. The Content Written Japanese at advanced level Content Reading in Japanese language, society and literature. Hospers, J. subject at 100 level is worth 20 credit points, while most of those An Introduction to Philosophical Analysis (Routledge) Examination Progressive assessment Examination Progressive assessment at 200 or 300 level are worth 10 credit points. There is one 400 Text Texts level (Honours) subject, consisting of an honours thesis and Plato The Last Days of Socrates (Penguin) Soga, M. et al Harada, Y. prescribed coursework. The availability of subjects depends in Standard Japanese (TaishOkan) Banka every case upon the enrolment of a sufficient number of students Sparkes, A.W. and the availability of staff. Forfurtherinformation about courses, Argument Diagrams and Logical Relations References Nittetsu Shooji (ed.) including reference lists and courses likely to be offered next Sparkes, A.W. Makino, S. & Tsutsui, M. Nihonjin to Nihon no Bunka year, see The Philosophy Manual, which is available from the Talking Philosophy (Routledge) ADictionaryofBasicJapaneseGrammar (TheJapanTimes) References To be advised Department of Philosophy. References See The Philosophy Manual JPN322 ADVANCED WRITTEN JAPANESE II lOcp JPN342 READING IN MODERN JAPANESE II lOcp 100 LEVEL SUBJECTS PHIL205} LOCKE AND BERKELEY INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHY 20cp lOcp Offered Semester II Offered Semester II PHIL305} Prerequisites Advanced Written Japanese I (JPN321) Prerequisites Reading in Modem Japanese I (JPN341) Offered Semester I Hours 3 class hours per week Hours 3 class hours per week Lecturer Dr Lee Content Written Japanese at advanced level Content Reading in Japanese language, society and literature. Prerequisite PHILlOI for PHIL205; 30cp at PHIL200 level for Examination Progressive assessment Culture seminars. PHIL305 Examination Progressive assessment Text Hours 3 hours per week Texts /!;JUllmnallOn Essays and assignments and an examination at the Soga, M. et al Examination Essay(s) and examination of each semester. Standard Japanese (TaishQkan) Harada, Y. Content References Banka A discussion of the empiricist philosophies ofJ ohn Locke (1632- Nittetsu Shooji (ed.) Book I of Hobbes's classic Leviathan will be read; it will be Makino, S. & Tsutsui, M. 1704) and George Berkeley (1685-1753), including Locke's Nihonjin to Nihon no BunIca '.eXI~la.tIl"U and expounded in detail to bring out the Hobbesian A DictionaryofBasicJapaneseGrammar (TheJapan Times) theory of knowledge, rejection of innate truths and ideas, theory view systematically, the world view of liberalism that References To be advised of sense-perception, doctrine of primary and secondary qualities, western democracies (1 hour per week). JPN331 COMMUNICATION IN JAPANESE I 10cp discussion of substance, and theories of abstraction and language, A segment on knowledge and reality examines some questions and Berkeley's idealism, natural theology, philosophy of science, Offered Semester I JPN410 HONOURS JAPANESE belief and knowledge, the mind/body relationship, and the and criticisms of Locke. Offered Semester I & Semester II '"y; 132 133 SECTION FOUR PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIO~ SECTION FOUR PillLOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Content correspondence, pragmatic, coherence and semantic theories of PHlL2S4} POLITICS lOcp Content This course will be concerned with certain topics andissues in the truth. The second part of the course examines theories of meaning PHlL3S4} and reference. Verificationist and truth-conditions theories of A course of lectures and discussions focussing on the ethical, development of naturalistic and anti-naturalistic philosophies. Offfered Semester I spiritual, social, political and economic issues that arise in The traditions of Platonism and Christian Aristotelianism and the meaning will be considered. The course will conclude with an Lecturer Dr Sparkes technological decisions. The course is presented in two parallel Scientific Naturalism of the late nineteenth century will receive examination of the causal theory of reference. strands. StrandAis based on an examination of Australian energy particular attention. Text Prereql,4isite PHILlOl for PHIL254, 30cp at PHIL200 level for PHIL354 policy. This example of decision making is used to develop an Texts Harrison, B. awareness of (i) how non-technical dimensions enter decisions Hours 3 hours per week Plato Anlntroduction to thePhilosophy ofLanguage (Macmillan) and (ii) a systematic approach to public policy making. Strand B The Last Days of Socrates (Penguin) References See The Philosophy Manual Examination One seminar paper and one essay OR one seminar complements Strand A by introducing a range of additional paper and one 2 hour formal examination topics which broaden the horizon of consideration and deepen the Plato treatment of specific features of decision making. The Republic (penguin) PHIL243} INTRODUCTION TO lOcp Content Texts (Strand A) Plato PHIL343} RATIONALITY THEORY (a) Are there decisive criteria for distinguishing what is political The Symposiwn (penguin) Offered Semester II from what is not? Commoner, B. The Poverty ofPower (Bantam 1977) Plotinus Lecturer Professor Hooker (b) The activity of politicians in relation to the arts, crafts and sciences. Can politics be a rational activity? Hooker, c.A., et a1. The Essential Plotinus (ed. E. O'Brien) (Hackett) Prerequisite PHILl01 for PHIL243; 30cp at PHIL200 level for Energyandthe Quality ofLife (University of Toronto Press PHIL343 (c) I-low far can we apply the same moral principles to both public (political) action and private (interpersonal) action? 1981) PHIL207} SCIENTIFIC KNOWLEDGE AND lOcp Hours PHIL307} SCIENTIFIC METHOD Text None. Notes will be provided. Saddler, H. Examination Short essay, and major essay at end of semester Energy in Australia (Geo. Allen and Unwin 1981) Offered Semester I Content Texts (Strand B) Lecturers ProfessorHooker and Dr Wright -PHIL2SS} UTI LITARIANISM lOcp An introduction to theories of rationality, primarily in decision PHIL3SS} Brown, L.R. Prerequisite 40cp for PHIL207; 30cp at PHIL200 level for making, and to their problems; and to largerissues concerning the Offered Semester II The Twenty Ninth Day (W. W. Norton 1978) PHIL307. Please note: Students who have previously passed a nature of rationality and its place in human life. Philosophy subject of which 382115 Philosophy of Science was Lecturer Dr Lee Schumacher, E.F. Texts Small is Beautiful (Abacus 1974) acomponent may not enrolforthis subject without the permission ,Prere,(]ui,site PHILlOlfor PHIL255 (orSWK201 ascorequisite); of the Head of the Philosophy Department. Brams, S.J. 30cp at PHIL200 level for PHIL355 Teich, A.H. (ed.) Hours 4 hours per week Paradoxes in Politics (Free Press) Technology and Man's Future (St Martin's Press 1977) Core(]uislite forPHIL255is SWK201 (orPHILlOl as prerequisite) Rapoport, A. Examination Assessment by assignments to be submitted during Hours 3 hours per week semester, and essay to be submitted at the end of semester. Fights, Games and Debates (Michigan U.P.) PHIL299 DIRECTED READINGS lOcp Content Rapoport, A. Offered By arrangement Two-Person Game Theory (Ann Arbor Paperbacks) An examination of the theory of scientific method. Topics to be Prerequisite PHILlOl References See The Philosophy Manual covered include: the principle of empiricism, scientific induction, course examines classical, evolutionary, 'ideal' and modem Hours 3 hours per week criticisms of inductivism, the theory -dependence of observation, :l1til~taIiantheories of ethics and some of their practical applications. Examination Essays and/or formal examination the theory of scientific method of Sir Karl Popper, the notion of PHIL244} INFORMAL LOGIC falsifiability, T. S. Kuhn on paradigms, and the distinction PHIL344} Content between Normal Scienceand Revolutionary Science. The concepts Offered Semester I Utilitarianism (ed. M. Warnock, Collins) This subject is available by permission of the Head of Department dealt with in the course will be illustrated by means of numerous to students who have special reasons for wishing to study a topic Lecturer Dr Sparkes P. examples drawn from the History of Science and recent Science. not otherwise currently offered by the Department. In considering Prerequisite PHILl 01 for PHIL244; 30cp at PHIL200 level for Practical Ethics (Cambridge) Texts To be advised. applications, the Department will take into account the student's PHIL344 J.J.C. & Williams, B. current programme and previous record. Normally only one References See The Philosophy Manual Hours 3 hours per week Utilitarianism: For and Against (Cambridge) course of directed readings is permitted, and enrolment is strictly Kel'ere'nc,,_< See The Philosophy Manual subject to aVailability of staff. PHIL208} PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE lOcp Examination By assignments and exercises PHIL308} Content TECHNOLOGY AND 300 LEVEL SUBJECTS Offered Semester II This course develops further and adds to the techniques of lOcp HUMAN VALUES I Note that SUbjects PHIL301 to PHILJ91 are also offered at the analysis and criticism introduced in the Critical Reasoning Lecturer Dr Wright 200 level as PHIL201 to PHIL291. See the 200 level course segment of PHILlOl. Prerequisite PHILl01 for PHIL208; 30cp at PHIL200 level for descriptions. Texts Professor Hooker and Dr Wright PHILJ08 Prerequisite: In each case is 30 credit points at PHIL200 level. PHILl01 for PHIL291; 30cp at 200 level for Hours 3 hours per week Sparkes, A.W. Argwnent Diagrams and Logical Relations Examination By assignments and essay Sparkes, A.W. Content Talking Philosophy (Routledge) Essays, assignments and examination The first section of the course examines rival philosophical theories oftruth. Particular attention will be paid to the redundancy, 134 135 SECTION FOUR PHll.OSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIO~ SECTION FOUR PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Content correspondence, pragmatic, coherence and semantic theories of PHlL2S4} POLITICS lOcp Content This course will be concerned with certain topics and issues in the truth. The second part of the course examines theories of meaning PHlL3S4} and reference. Verificationist and truth-conditions theories of A course of lectures and discussions focussing on the ethical, development of naturalistic and anti-naturalistic philosophies. O./ffered Semester I spiritual, social, political and economic issues that arise in The traditions of Platonism and Christian Aristotelianism and the meaning will be considered. The course will conclude with an Lecturer Dr Sparkes technological decisions. The course is presented in two parallel Scientific Naturalism of the late nineteenth century will receive examination of the causal theory of reference. strands. StrandAis based on an examination of Australian energy particular attention. Text Prerequisite PHlLl 01 for PHlL254, 30cp at PHlL200 level for PHIL354 policy. This example of decision making is used to develop an Texts Harrison, B. awareness of (i) how non-technical dimensions enter decisions Hours 3 hours per week Plato An Introduction to thePhilosophy ofLanguage (Macmillan) and (ii) a systematic approach to public policy making. Strand B The Last Days of Socrates (penguin) References See The Philosophy Manual Examination One seminar paper and one essay OR one seminar complements Strand A by introducing a range of additional paper and one 2 hour formal examination topics which broaden the horizon of consideration and deepen the Plato treatment of specific features of decision making. The Republic (penguin) PHIL243} INTRODUCTION TO lOcp , Content Texts (Strand A) Plato PHIL343} RATIONALITY THEORY (a) Are there decisive criteria for distinguishing what is political The Symposium (penguin) Offered Semester II from what is not? Commoner, B. The Poverty ofPower (Bantam 1977) Plotinus Lecturer Professor Hooker (b) The activity of politicians in relation to the arts, crafts and sciences. Can politics be a rational activity? Hooker, C.A., et al. The Essential Plotinus (ed. E. O'Brien) (Hackett) Prerequisite PHlLl01 for PHlL243; 30cp at PHlL200 level for Energy and the Quality ofLife (University of Toronto Press PHIL343 , (c) How far can we apply the same moral principles to both public 1981) (political) action and private (interpersonal) action? PHIL207} SCIENTIFIC KNOWLEDGE AND lOcp Hours PHIL307} SCIENTIFIC METHOD , Text None. Notes will be provided. Saddler, H. Examination Short essay, and major essay at end of semester Energy in Australia (Geo. Allen and Unwin 1981) Offered Semester I Content Texts (Strand B) Lecturers ProfessorHooker and Dr Wright PHIL2SS} UTILITARIANISM lOcp An introduction to theories of rationality, primarily in decision , PHIL3SS} Brown, L.R. Prerequisite 40cp for PHIL207; 30cp at PHIL200 level for making, and to their problems; and to larger issues concerning the 'Offered Semester II The Twenty Ninth Day (yI.W. Norton 1978) PHIL307. Please note: Students who have previously passed a nature of rationality and its place in human life. Philosophy subject of which 382115 Philosophy of Science was DrLce Schumacher, E.F. acomponent may not enrolforthis subject without the permission Texts Small is Beautiful (Abacus 1974) , Prerequisite PHILl 01 for PHlL255 (orSWK201 ascorequisite); of the Head of the Philosophy Department. Brams,S.J. at PHIL200 level for PHIL355 Teich, A.H. (ed.) Hours 4 hours per week Paradoxes in Politics (Free Press) Technology and Man's Future (St Martin's Press 1977) :Co'reauisl~te forPHlL255is SWK201 (orPHlLl01 as prerequisite) Examination Assessment by assignments to be submitted during Rapoport, A. semester, and essay to be submitted at the end of semester. Fights, Games and Debates (Michigan U.P.) PHIL299 DIRECTED READINGS lOcp Essay(s) and examination Content Rapoport, A. Offered By arrangement Two-Person Game Theory (Ann Arbor Paperbacks) An examination of the theory of scientific method. Topics to be Prerequisite PHlLlOI References See The Philosophy Manual covered include: the principle of empiricism, scientific induction, course examines classical, evolutionary, 'ideal' and modem Hours 3 hours per week criticisms of inductivism, the theory -dependence of observation, 'ntillitaJiantheories of ethics and some of their practical applications. Examination Essays and/or formal examination the theory of scientific method of Sir Karl Popper, the notion of PHlL244} INFORMAL LOGIC falsifiability, T. S. Kuhn on paradigms, and the distinction PHIL344} Content between Normal Science and Revolutionary Science. The concepts Offered Semester I Utilitarianism (ed. M. Warnock, Collins) This subject is available by permission of the Head of Department dealt with in the course will be illustrated by means of numerous to students who have special reasons for wishing to study a topic Lecturer Dr Sparkes P. examples drawn from the History of Science and recent Science. not otherwise currently offered by the Department. In considering Prerequisite PHlLl 01 for PHIL244; 30cp at PHlL200 level for Practical Ethics (Cambridge) Texts To be advised. applications, the Department will take into account the student's PHIL344 J.J.C. & Williams, B. current programme and previous record. Normally only one References See The Philosophy Manual Hours 3 hours per week Utilitarianism: For and Against (Cambridge) course of directed readings is permitted, and enrolment is strictly subject to aVailability of staff. By assignments and exercises 'H""pr~'n~.,. See The Philosophy Manual PHlL208} PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE lOcp Examination PHIL308} Content 300 LEVEL SUBJECTS TECHNOLOGY AND lOcp Offered Semester II This course develops further and adds to the techniques of HUMAN VALUES I Note that subjects PHlL301 to PHlL391 are also offered at the analysis and criticism introduced in the Critical Reasoning Lecturer Dr Wright 200 level as PHIL201 to PHIL291. See the 200 level course segment of PHlLl 01. Prerequisite PHlLl 01 for PHIL208; 30cp at PHlL200 level for descriptions. Texts Professor Hooker and Dr Wright PHIL308 Prerequisite: In each case is 30 credit points at PHlL200 level. PHILl01 for PHIL291; 30cp at 200 level for Hours 3 hours per week Sparkes, A.W. Argument Diagrams and Logical Relations Examination By assignments and essay Sparkes, A.W. Content Talking Philosophy (Routledge) Essays, assignments and examination The first section of the course examines rival philosophical theories oftruth. Particular attention will be paid to the redundancy, 134 135 SECTION FOUR PHILOSOPHY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIO~ SECTION FOUR PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS PHIL396 PHILOSOPHY SEMINAR 3A lOcp PHIL399 DIRECTED READINGS lOcp Psychology Subject Descriptions Texts Offered Semester I Offered By arrangement PSYCIOI PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION 1 lOcp Cotman, C.W. & McGaug, J.L. Lecturer Dr Wright Prerequisite 30cp at PHIL200 level Hours 5 hours per week for one semester Behavioural neuroscience (Academic Press, 1980) Prerequisite 30cp at PHIL200 level Hours 3 hours per week Examination One 2 hour paper Kuffler, S.W., Nicholls, lG. et al From neuron to brain (Sinauer, 1984) Corequisite 3 other Philosophy subjects at PHIL300 level, Examination Essays and/or formal examination Content including any PHIL300 level subjects passed in a previous Content References To be advised semester, other than PHIL397 Three written laboratory reports. Introductory Methodology and This subject is available by permission ofthe Head of Department Statistics for Psychology; Biological Foundations;Perception PSYC202 BASIC PROCESSES Hours 3 hours per week to students who have special reasons for wishing to study a topic and Learning lOcp Prerequisite PSYCI02 Examination Essays and seminar or tutorial papers not otherwise currently offered by the Department. In considering Texts Content applications, the Department will take into account the student's Corequisite PSYC201 current programme and previous record. Normally only one General-anyrecent comprehensive text on General Psychology A great deal of recent analytic philosophy has been devoted to the or Introduction to Psychology. The follOwing alternatives are Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with course of directed readings is permitted, and enrolment is strictly laboratory work. debate between Realism and non-Realism. The seminars examine subject to availability of staff. recommended (others may be added later). this debate in a way accessible to students without a background Atkinson, R.L., Atkinson, R.C., et al Examination A 1 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises. in logic or technical philosophy. Writers such as Hilary Putnam, Introduction to Psychology 10th edn (Harcourt Brace Content Michael Dummett, Nelson Goodman and Michael Devitt will be 400 LEVEL SUBJECT Jovanovich,1990) This subject will examine basic p[rocesses in Psychology such as studied. The subject requires participation in seminars and/or PHIL401 PHILOSOPHY HONOURS 80cp For Statistics course: perception, cognition, and learning. Both animal and human tutorials, as well as the presentation of papers on prescribed Offered Full year topics. Howell, D.C. models may be considered. Prerequisites Students will be accepted into PHIL401 at the Fundamental Statistics for the Behavioural Sciences 1 st The Cognition topic will examine two contrasting approaches to Text A booklet of readings will be available from the Department discretion of the Head of Department. In order to qualify for entry or 2nd edn (Duxbury, 1985 or 1989) the study of human intelligence. It will do so within the historical of Philosophy. to PHIL401 a student must normally have been credited with at References To be advised contexts of both areas and in doing so will explore the strengths least 110 credit points in Philosophy including at least 40 credit and limitations of the scientific method. PHIL397 PHILOSOPHY SEMINAR 3B lOcp points at 300 level with an average Credit standard in all Philosophy PSYCI02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION 2 lOcp The Perception section will deal primarily with audition. The Offered Semester I subjects passed. Prerequisite PSYC101 follOwing topics will be covered: structure ofthe auditory system, Hours 12 hours per week Lecturer Dr Wright Hours 5 hours per week for one semester subjective dimensions of sound, sound localization, elementary Examination is by (a) an honours thesis of about 15,000 words aspects of speech perception. Prerequisite 30cp at PHIL200 level Examination One 2 hour paper. and (b) such further examinations and assignments as the Texts Corequisite Seven other Philosophy subjects at PHIL300 level, Department prescribes. Equal weight is given to (a) and (b). Content including any PHIL300 level subjects passed in a previous Anastais, A Content semester Three written laboratory reports; Cognition; Social Psychology; Psychological testing 6th edn (Macmillan, 1988) Developmental Psychology. Hours 3 hours per week (a) The honours thesis (on a topic approved by the Department), Hould, SJ. which is to be submitted by the end of second semester. Texts Examination Essays and seminar or tutorial papers The mismeasure of man (Norton & Co, 1981) (b) A seminar programme in areas of philosophy approved by the General - as for PSYCI 01. Content References To be advised Department and requiring 6 hours (average) attendance per week For Social Psychology This course covers similar material to PHIL396, but deals with throughout the year. For details see The Philosophy Manual. PSYC203 DEVELOPMENTAL AND selected topics in greater detail. The course also requires ~allan, Y., Gallois, C. & Noller, P. lOcp Social Psychology (Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1986) SOCIAL PROCESSES participation in seminars and/or tutorials, as well as the presentation THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF LETTERS of further papers on prescribed topics other than those taken in References To be advised Prerequisite PSYC102 PHIL396. The M Litt programme in the Department of Philosophy is Corequisite PSYC201 intended for pass graduates with a major in Philosophy, or with · PSYC201 FOUNDATIONS FOR PSYCHOLOGY lOcp Text A booklet of readings will be available from the Department equivalent qualifications approved by the Department. Candidates Hours 2 hours per weekforone semester together with laboratory of Philosophy. · Prerequisite PSYC102 work. are required to complete six semester courses or their equiv~~L Each course is of two contact hours per week. In addItion, .. Hours 2 hours lectures per week for one semester together with Examination A 1 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises . '. laboratory work. PHIL398 HONOURSSEMINAR3C lOcp candidates are required to submit a major essay (normally 10,000 Content words) on a subject chosen by the candidate and approved by the Offered Semester I or II Examination A 1 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises. Department. This course will cover such topics as Social Cognition, Prerequisite 30cp at PHIL200 level Content Interpersonal Relationships and Developmental Themes. Assessment Written examination papers, essays and other Hours 3 hours per week assignments . ~i) a selection of topics in experimental design, parametric tests, The Social Cognition course will continue from the study of Examination Essays and/or formal examination lOtroduction to analysis variance and related topics, and social behaviours in PSYC102 and will examine the cognitive processes underlying these behaviours, focussing on attributions Content . ii) a range of topics aimed at elucidating the anatomy, physiology · and biochemistry of the brain. The unit will be accompanied by for events and our understanding of social situations, and attitude This subject is available by permission of the Head of Department structure and change. a) a tutorial series in which practical experience will be to students who have achieved a high standard of performance at Text 100 and 200 level. The subject has a common programme with an given in the application of statistical methods using approved area of the coursework for PHIL401 below. computer-assisted statistical packages and Forgas, lP. b) a laboratory component which will mainly deal with Interpersonal Behaviours (pergamon, 1985) neuroanatomy. References To be advised 136 137 SECTION FOUR PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR PSYCHOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS PSYC204 INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES lOcp The third topic will coverthe rationale and assumptions undedying Leavitt, F. Content Drugs & behaviour (Saunders, 1974) Prerequisite PSYC102 behavioural management, and will include a description of appropriate data, collection methods and research design. This subject will examine basic processes in Psychology such as Corequisite PSYC201 Treatment procedures based on classical conditioning and PSYC301 ADVANCED FOUNDATIONS lOcp perception, cognition, memory and learning and the effects of Hours 2 hours perweekforone semester together with laboratory instrumental learning procedures will be covered in some detail. FOR PSYCHOLOGY early experience. Topics not covered in this subject will be dealt with in PSYC304. Both animal and human models will be work. Texts Prerequisites PSYC201, PSYC202, PSYC203 considered. The subject will be supplemented with a laboratory A 1 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises. Examination Martin, G., & Hrycaiko, D. (Eds) /lours 4 hours per week for one semester program which will run over 4-5 weeks. Content Behaviour Modification and Coaching (C.C. Thomas, Examination One 2F(1,2) hour exam paper References 1983) This subject examines the ways in which individuals differ Content Frisby, J. Shea, J.D. through a study of such topics as models of personality, patterns Seeing (Oxford U.P., 1979) of abnormal behaviour, methods of assessing these differences. Human Sexuality: Psychology lIB, 1989. A set oflecture A selection of topics in experimental design, advanced parametric tests, introduction to analysis of covariance and factor analysis Nisbett, R. & Ross, L. Abnormal Behaviour: Itisintended that this topic should introduce notes prepared by Dr. Shea, will be available from the and topics in applied statistics. Human inference: strategies and shortcomings of ;ocial the student to some of the main approaches to the understanding bookshop early in the semester. judgement (Prentice-Hall,1980) of abnormal behaviour. The subject will be accompanied by a tutorial series in which PSYC206 APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 2 lOcp practical experience will be given in the application of statistical Sekuler, R. & Biake, R. The student should be able to demonstrate understanding of: (a) methods using computer-assisted statistical packages. Perception (Knopf,1985) the historical background of mental illness (b) the basic diagnostic Prerequisite PSYC102 Text categories of psychiatric disorder (c) the symptoms of the major Corequisite PSYC201 Osofsky, J.D. Howell, D.C. Handbook ofInfant Development 2nd edn (Wiley, 1987) psychoses (d) the symptoms of neurosis (e) approaches to mental Hours 2hours perweekforone semestertogether with laboratory hcal th care. work Statistical methodsfor psychology 2ndedn (Duxburg Press 1%~ , PSYC304 BASIC PROCESSES Personality: The topic will examine a number of prominent lOcp Examination A 1 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises IN PSYCHOLOGY2 approaches to personality theory, research, and assessment. o References Content Prerequisite PSYC201 Students will be expected to read assigned sections of the Marascuilo, L.A. & Levin, J.R. recommended text, and to complete simple exercises and present This subject explains the application of Psychological theories Multivariate statistics in the social sciences: A researcher's Corequisite PSYC301 with reference to selected areas of human concern such as human material in seminar sessions from time to time. guide (Brooks/Cole, 1983) Hours 4 hours per week for one semester neuropsychological disturbance, and the effects of drugs on Text Harris, R.J. behaviour. Examination One 2 hour exam paper and an analytical report. Hall, C.S., & Lindzey, G A primer of multivariate statistics 2nd edn (Academic Content Introduction to theories of personality (Wiley, 1985) Neuropsychology: It is intended that this course should introduce Press, 1985) the student to some ofthe types of human neurological disturbance This subject will extend the examination of basic processes Potkay, C.R. & Allen, B.P. and their causes. PSYC302 INDEPENDENT PROJECT covered in PSYC303. The subject will be complemented by Personality: Theory, research and application (Brooks/ lOcp Students should be able to demonstrate an understanding of: either a laboratory or workshop program run over about 4-5 Cole, 1986) Prerequisite PSYC201 weeks. (a) infantile neurological dysfunctions and their causes, References To be advised Corequisite PSYC301 References (b) childhood neurological dysfunctions and their causes, 2 hours per week for the full year PSYC20S APPLIED TOPICS IN PSYCHOLOGY 110cp A series ofreadings will berecommendedas the course progresses. (c) neurological dysfunctions of the elderly and their causes. Submission of a written report containing Prerequisite PSYC102 Behavioural Assessment: This topic addresses issues concerned \intro(luction. methods, results and discussion not more than thirty PSYC30S INDIVIDUAL PROCESSES lOcp Corequisite PSYC201 with the assessment of human behaviour. The areas to be covered in length due early October. Not offered in 1991 J/ours 2 hours per week for one semestertogetherwithlaboratory will be: work (a) models of behaviour assessment, project consist~ of an experiment or series of experiments, Examination A 1 hour exam paper plus laboratory exercises (b) DSM-ill, or tests deSIgned to explore a hypothesis. Each student PSYC306 ADVANCED SOCIAL PROCESSES lOcp Content (c) behavioural observation, by an academic staff member of the Departrnent Prerequisite PSYC 201 . The list of research areas will be available at the This subject explains the application of Psychological theories (d) cognitive assessment, Corequisite PSYC301 ""I!lfInm 140 141 SECTION FOUR SOCIOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR SOCIOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Sociology Subject Descriptions There is a broad range of offerings at 200 level. Students may Content: Content undertake as few as a single semester subject or any number up to Introduction This course has two main lecture components: the state and the full range being offered by the Department. This subject focuses ontheanalysisofmedical systems as structures inequality, and media and society. In this Department the disciplines of Sociology and Social of meaning and practice. Following an overview of the three great Students applying to undertake a 300 level subject need to have Anthropology are both taught as integrated sub-fields of the study (a) The first section looks at evidence about the role of the state in medical traditions, Humoral-Western, Ayurvedic, and Chinese, completed at least 20 credit points of Sociology at 200 level or its of society. either correcting or reproducing social inequality in Australian case studies are presented to demonstrate the nature and relevance equivalent. They alsoneed to comply with the necessary prerequisites society. Examples include the functiOning of the local and welfare ofcontemporary medical sy'stemsinnon-Western societies. Through Sociologists focus on the study of contemporary industrial society for the subject they wish to take. and examine topics such as the political process, work and industry , societies. There is particular focus on current political debates these case studies, the issues of cultural relativism and universalism Students undertaking 60 credit points or more at 300 level shall social inequality, gender, the family, community, medicine, regarding the expansion and cuts in state activity. are examined. Finally, the analysis of this issue is developed further include either SOC301 or S0C302. ideology, religion, social change and the capitalist economic system. Recommended Reading through the study ofcases of culturally specific patterns ofbehaviour Sociology SOClOl and SOCI02 will be offered at both day and that have been labelled odd or bizarre by Western observers Social anthropologists study similar topics, mainly among non Waters, M. & Crook, R. evening times each year. All other subjects in sociology will be (commonly referred to as the "culture-bound syndromes"). European societies. Since these societies areincreasingly becoming Sociology One (Longman Cheshire 1990) part of a single world system, and the basic problems of social life offered at either day or evening times. Those subjects offered in the Recommended Reading day one year will, if available, be offered in the evening the Giddens,A are everywhere the same, sociology and social anthropology have Connor, L., Asch, T. & Asch, P. following year. Sociology,aBriefbutCriticalintroduction (Macmillan,1982) become complementary parts of a general comparative study of Jero Tapakan: Balinese Healer (C.U.P.1986). society. Sociology and social anthropology, while grounded in our , (b) Media and Society begins with an examination ofthe ownership The presentation of any subject is dependent on the availability of Leslie, C.(ed) observations of human social life, have strong theoretical and staff to teach that subject. The department also reserves the right not and control ofthe mass media and advertising in Australia Particular Asian Medical Systems: A Comparative Study (University philosophical bases. Their purpose is not simply to aecumulate to offer a subject where enrolments are insufficient in number. aspects of the media (eg news, magazine and television advertising) of California Press 1977). information but to understand how society is organised, develops are then considered in some detail, both in terms of their explicit and changes. content and also the hidden messages conveyed by their language Simons & Hughes (eds) SOCIOI INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY A lOcp Culture-Bound Syndromes (D. Reidel 1985) The Department's undergraduate program establishes clear and imagery. The relationship of the mass media to social inequality Offered Semester I; day and evening guidelines for the students while allowing for a reasonable degree in Australian society is a central issue throughout. of choice on their part. Sociology subjects include both "core" Prerequisite nil Text SOC203 WORK IN INDUSTRIAL SOCIETY 10cp subjects and anumberof"options" which students may elect to take Hours 3 hours teaching per week Windschuttle, K. Offered Semester IT; day only in 1991 aecording to their interests. Examination Classwork, assignments, examination The Media 3rd edn (Penguin 1988) Prerequisite: SOCI 01/1 02 or Industrial Relations ITA Graduates, satisfying the necessary prerequisites, may proceed to Content Recommended Reading the Bachelor of Arts (Honours) in Sociology. Postgraduate studies Hours 3 hours teaching per week Berger,J. may be undertaken for the degrees of Master of Arts and Doctor of This course gives a general introduction to Sociology with an Examination: Research project, essay, examination emphasis on relations of inequality in society. Following a brief Ways ofSeeing (BBCtpenguin 1981) Philosophy, and in conjunction with the Faculty of Medicine for the Content Diploma of Health Science and the Master of Medical Science introduction to the subject of Sociology and some basic concepts Bonney, B. & Wilson, H. (Medical Social Science). used by sociologists to assist the understanding of society, we will Australia's Commercial Media (Macmillan 1983) :nus course will examine the growth of industrial capitalism, its look at some of the histories, structures and practices of social Impact on the organisation and experience of work, the degree to Itis hoped that a coursework Masterof Arts degree will be available inequality in Australia. Specific aspects of Australian society and which its form is determined by technology, and the relationship from the start of 1991. INTRODUCTORY THEORY 10cp between recent technological innovations and unemployment. culture will be examined, with particular focus on theirrelationship (SOCIOLOGy) A major stream in Sociology, as defined by the Faculty of Arts, to class, gender and ethnicity. Text consists of at least 90 credit points: at least 30 credit points at 200 Offered Semester I; evening only in 1991 Texts Probert, B. level, which must include SOC201 and 40 credit points at 300 level. , Prerequisite: SOClOl/102 Abercrombie, N.& Hill, S. (et al) Working Life (McPhee Gribble 1988) The Department considers that the above is a bare minimum. It Dictionary ofSociology (penguin 1984) Hours 3 hours teaching per week Recommended Reading recommends that students seeking to major in Sociology with a Examination: To be advised view to teaching in the discipline, graduate workorotheremployment Najman, J. & Western, J. (eds) Game, A. & Pringle, P. in an arearelated to the discipline should undertake at least 40 credit A Sociology of Australian Society: Introductory Readings Content Gender at Work (Allen & Unwin 1983) (Macmillan 1988) points at 200 level, including SOC201 and SOC204, and at least 60 •In this course we will deal with the sociological classics, by looking littler, c.R. (ed.) credit points at 300 level. Wa1ers, M. & Crook, R. ,at those themes in their work which have become central to The Experience ofWork (Gower and Open University 1985) Sociology One (Longman Cheshire 1990) Students who wish to proceed to the BA Honours degree in ~bsequent sociological discourse. Thus the 'Great Men' approach Willis, E. (ed) Sociology will normally be expected to have completed at least 40 Recommended Reading , IS here combined with the 'central themes' approach in an attempt Technology and the Labour Process: Australasian Case credit points at 200 level (including SOC201 and SOC204) and 60 to trace some of the main links between classical and modem social Connell, R. W., Ashenden, DJ.et al Studies. (Allen & Unwin 1988) points at 300 level (including SOC302), with a Credit average in theory. Making the Difference. Schools,FamiliesandSocial Division' Sociology at 300-level. In certain cases, subjects within other (Allen & Unwin 1982) Recommended Reading SOC204 Departments which have substantial relevance to sociology are INTRODUCTORY RESEARCH lOcp Austin-Broos, D. METHODS AND DESIGN acceptableascountingtowardstheentryrequirements.Studentsare Giddens, A. Creating Culture (Allen & Unwin 1987) invited to discuss their proposed course with the Head of Department Sociology,aBriefbutCriticalintroduction (Macmillan Offered Semester IT; evening only in 1991 at any time. Prerequisite SOClOI/102 MEDICAL SYSTEMS lOcp Students applying to undertake a 200 level subject need to have SOC 102 INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY B Hours 3 hours per week completed 20 credit points of Sociology at 1 oolevel orits equivalent Semester I; day only in 1991 Offered Semester IT; day and evening Examination: To be advised (ie. Sociology n. [Excepting that for SOC203 Industrial Relations Hm.n""o>t~ Prerequisite SOClOl SOC101/102 ITA may serve as a prerequisite]. Content Hours 3 hours teaching per week 3 hours per week This subject provides acritical introduction to sociologicalresearch iiUaminn'tin ..· To be advised Examination Classwork, essay, examination. methods. From 1991 onwards it will be a prerequisite forS0C302. 142 143 SECTION FOUR SECfION FOUR SOCIOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SOCIOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Examination Assignments and examination The course looks at qualitative and quantitative research methods value-neutral enterprise concerned primarily with the allocation of material forces are mutually constitutive. The point of departure of and includes a number of practical research exercises. resources (means) to achieve socially desired ends. Content the course is the sociology of knowledge, taking as its central theme Recommended Reading Recommended Readings This subject will introduce students to historical, sociological and the sociohistorical forms of rationality and irrationality. Babbie, E. Aabrams, P. anthropological analyses of Indonesian Society and cultures. This will be analysed with reference to: The Practice 0/ Social Research 5th edn (Macmillan 1984) Historical Sociology (Open Books 1982) Recommended Reading To be advised. (a) Social patterns of distorted communication, exploring certain Bulmer, M. (ed) Bendix,R. phenomenologically orientated accounts of social action; Sociological Research Methods: An Introduction 2nd edn Max Weber, An Intellectual Portrait (Methuen 1966) SOC301 CONTEMPORARY SOCIAL THEORY (b) Social dislocation 'of knowledge in the wider socio-rultural (Macmillan 1984) Giddens, A. & Held, D. (eds) Not offered in 1991. context, particularly thehistorical' discovery' ofthe social categories Rose,G. Classes, Power and Conflict (Macmillan 1982) of reason and insanity; Deciphering Sociological Research (Macmillan 1982) (c) Psychiatric knowledge as ideology and, psychiatric diagnosis as Gough, I. SOC302 RESEARCH METHODS IN 20cp ThePoliticalEconomyo/the Welfare State (Macmillan 1979) SOCIOLOGY AND SOCIAL the pragmatic reconstruction of 'abnormal' everyday knowledge; SOC20S INTRODUCTORY THEORY lOcp Kennedy, R. (ed) ANTHROPOLOGY (d) Political economy of decarceration/ deinstitutionalisation, and (SOCIAL ANTHROPOLOGY) Australian Welfare: Historical Sociology (Macmillan 1989) Offered Semester I; evening only in 1991 theinfluencethatstate/bureaucraticknowledgehasoncontemporary Offered Semester IT; day only in 1991 conceptions of rationality; Prerequisite 30 credit points at 200 level including SOC201 and Prerequisite SOClOl/102 SOC207 WOMEN AND THE WELFARE STATE lOcp S0C204 (e) Gender and the social construction of psychiatric morbidity; Hours 3 hours per week Offered Semester IT; evening only in 1991 HOUTS 4 hours teaching per week (f) The RichmondReport. Historical, empirical and clinical sources Examination: Assignments and examination Prerequisite SOC101/102 will be used throughout. Along with MIIIX, Dilthey, Weber and Examination Research project, examination Durkheim, the ideas of the contemporary theorists Karl Mannheim, Content Hours 3 hours teaching per week Content Gregory Bateson, Michel Foucault, Alfred Schutz and Harold Garfinkel will be central to the course. This subject introduces students to the majortheoriesin the discipline Examination To be advised This subject, while focussing on the methods ofresearch, emphasises of social anthropology through a series of case studies selected from Content the integral connections between theory and method. We shall Recommended Readings societies of South-East Asia and the Pacific. It also introduces concern ourselves with both discussion of the ethical, theoretical This subject is essentially concerned with the natureof the state with Foucault, M. students to some of the areas for which we teach more advanced and methodological issues of social research, and withleaming and a focus on gender relations. Women have until recently been largely TheBirtho/the Clinic: AnArchaelogyo/MedicalPerception anthropology subjects at 200- and 300-level (e.g. Indonesia, applying the various research techniques of sociology and social cast by the state as dependent, either on men as wives or as (Vintage 1975) Thailand). anthropology. In this latter context we shall emphasise different dependent on state welfare. Economic and welfare policies will be Garton, S. styles of research and their complementarity in overall research Recommended Reading considered for the way they affect women The effects of women's design. MedicineandMadness:;ASocialHistoryo/InsanityinNew Keesing, R. inteIVentions into the state over the last two decades will also be South Wales 1880-1940 (UNSW Press 1988) CuituralAnthropology: A ContemporaryPerspective2ndedn examined. Recommended reading Ingleby, D. (ed) (Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1981) Babbie, E. Texts Critical Psychiatry: The Politics o/Mental Health (penguin The Practice o/SocialResearch 5th edn (Wadsworth 1989) Murphy, Robert F. Baldock, C. & Cass, B. (eds) 1981) An Overture to Social Anthropology (Prentice-Hall 1979) Women, Social Welfare and the State. (Sydney: Allen & Bulmer, M. (ed) Mannheim, K. Wolf, Eric R. Unwin,1983) Sociological Research Methods: An Introduction 2nd edn Ideology and Utopia (Routledge 1936) Europe and the People without History (University of (London 1984) Franzway, S.,Court, D. & Connell, R. W. Scull, A. California Press 1982) Rose,G. Staking a Claim: Feminism, Bureaucracy and the State Decarceration 2nd edn (polity Press 1984) (Allen & Unwin 1989) Deciphering Sociological Research (Macmillan 1982) Turner, R. (ed) ~OC206 POLmCS AND PUBLIC POLICY lOcp Wadsworth, Y. Sawer, M. Ethnomethodology: Selected Readings (penguin 1974) Offered Semester I; evening only in 1991 Sisters in Suits (Allen & Unwin 1990) Do it Yourself Social Research (Longman 1984) Prerequisite SOC101/102 Watson, S. (ed) SOC304 MEDICINE IN INDUSTRIAL 20cp SOC303 KNOWLEDGE, IDEOLOGY, Hours 3 hours per week Playing the State: AustralianFeminist Interventions (Allen 20cp SOCIETY & Unwin 1990) AND PSYCHIATRY Examination To be advised Offered Semester IT; evening only in 1991 Yeatman,A. Offered Semester IT; day only in 1991 Content Prerequisite 20 credit points at 200 level including S0C201 Bureaucrats, Technocrats, Femocrats: Essays on tM Prerequisite 30 credit points at 200 level including SOC201. This subject is an introduction to political sociology, focussing Contemporary Australian State (Allen & Unwin 1990) Hours 4 hours teaching per week liOUTS 4 hours teaching per week upon the nexus between politics and the formulation and ~ Examination: To be advised implementation of public policy, and the provision of welfare Examination To be advised SOC2l2 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SOCIETY Content: To be advised ,Content seIViccs. An historical and comparative approach will be taken to AND CULTURE: A POLITICAL STUDY the development of the welfare state, with special attention to This subject is an introduction to selected issues in contemporary contemporary Australian issues. Selected policy issues will be Not offered in 1991. SOC30S SOCIETY AND CULTURE: 20cp SOcial theory. Particular attention is given to the competing claims discussed in relation to Marxian, liberal democratic, pluralist , of: THAILAND AND TIBET and New Right theories of the state. These theoretical debates SOC2l4 INDONESIAN SOCIETY & CULTURE l~ Offered Day only in 1991 will be set against a discussion of public policy with reference causal/reductive explanations of social phenomena which give Offered Semester I; day only in 1991 Prerequisite 20 credit points at 200 level including SOC205. to capital and private ownership, bureaucratic domination, to the theoretical constructs of the investigator; and Prerequisite SOC101/102 Hours 4 hours teaching week (Semester 1) welfare capitalism, and state intervention. The course will the interpretative tradition which places emphasis upon reason per question the liberal democratic idea that state intervention is a Hours 3 hours per week motive in human agency, and that knowledge and social and Examination: To be advised 144 145 SECTION FOUR SOCIOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FOUR SOCIOLOGY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS Conlenl models - will be analysed and assessed with reference to historical have substantial relevance to sociology are acceptable as counting GENDER AND SOCIOLOGY Tibet and Thailand are both Buddhist societies. Both can be seen as and empirical evidence. The central theme of the course will focus towards the entry requirements. Students are invited to discuss their This subject will be offered in first semester 'loosely-structured' in comparison with many Asian societies. TIley upon the growth of the state's responsibility for discipline and proposed course with the Head of Department at any time. incarceration, and the legitimation of state power through the contrast sharply with each other in areas such as the nature of the Conlenl The gender dimension of sociology will be explored in three ways. state and of political power and the role of religion in social life. expansion of the justice apparatus. TIle substantive issues to be First as it is dealt with in conventional sociological theory; e.g. Through studying these two societies we can explore central addressed will include: crime, class, and access to the legal system; (a) A thesis on a topic chosen by the student in consultation with Durkheim, Marx and Weber. Second through the work of femiilist anthropological themes relating to the state, power, hierarchy, corporate crime and political corruption; women and the justice mcmbers of staff. The thesis is to be submitted by the end of the theorists, paying particular attention to the role of the state. Third, religion and gender. system; contemporary trends in policing; the privatisation of second week of October, and will count for 55% of the final mark. through consideration of the light shed by sociological reseaICh on punishment. Recommended Reading (b) Two semester subjects to be assessed by coursework and/or the empirical dimensions of gender relations. Recommended Reading examination. Each contributes 22.5% of the final mark. Readings Keyes, C. F. Thailand: Buddhist Kingdom as Modern Nation-State. Cohen, S. (c) Students are expected to attend the Department's seminar Connell, R W. (Westview, 1987) Visions ofSocial Conlrol (polity Press 1985) program, and will normally give at least one seminar on their thesis GenderandPower (Sydney: Allen & Unwin, 1987) work. Samuel,G. Braithwaite, J. Eisenstein, H. Part-time studenlS Shamanic and Clerical Buddhism in Tibet [Typescript Inequality, Crime and Public Policy (Routledge 1979) Contemporary Feminist Thought. (Allen & Unwin 1984) available at Short Loans desk in Auchmuty Library.] Findlay, M. & Hogg, R (eds) Part -time students take the two semester subjects in the first and Franzway, S., Court, D. & Connell, R.W. Tambiah,S. Understanding Crime and CriminaiJustice (Law Book Co. second semesters of the first year and submit their thesis in October Staking a Claim: Feminism, Bureaucracy and the State of the second year. World Conqueror and World Renouncer. (C.U.P. 1976) 1988) (Allen & Unwin 1989) Foucault, M. Sydie, R SOC306 FAMILY AND. SOCIETY 20cp Discipline and Punish (penguin 1979) CRIME, JUSTICE AND THE STATE Natural Women, Cultured Men. (Open University Press 1987) Offered Semester IT; evening only in 1991 Garland, D. & P. Young (eds) This subject will be available in first semester. The Power to Punish: Conlemporary Penalty and Social Williams, F. Prerequisite 20 credit points at 200 level including SOC201. This course deals critically with both classical and contemporary Analysis (Heinemann 1983) Social Policy: A Critical Introduction (polity 1989) Hours 4 hours teaching per week arguments about the 'causes' of crime, its punishment and Zdenkowski, G. & Brown, D. classification in late industrial society . Rival theoretical perspectives Yeatman, A. Examination Seminar papers, essays, examination. The Prison Struggle: Changing Australia's Prison System -liberal-utilitarian, post-structuralist, leftrea1ism, and New Right Bureaucrats, Technocrats, Femocrats: Essays on the Conlenl (penguin 1982) models - will be analysed and assessed with reference to historical Contemporary Australian State (Allen & Unwin 1990) This course provides an introduction to the sociological study of and empirieal evidence. The central theme of the course will focus families and the ways in which they interact with the wider society. SOC312 AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL upon the growth of the state's responsibility for discipline and CONTEMPORARY FRENCH SOCIAL THOUGHT SOCIETY AND CULTURE: incarceration, and the legitimation of state power through the One strand of the course will involve the reading of cross cultural This subject will be offered in second Semester and historical studies of families, and studies of recent changes in A POLITICAL STUDY expansion of the justice apparatus. TIle substantive issues to be This course will explore the work of several prominent theorists the form of families, and an examination of the theories which Not offered in 1991 addressed will include: crime, class, and access to the legal system; who have been engagedinradicalrethinking ofissues relating to the inform research in this area A second strand involves studies of key corporate crime and political corruption; women and the justice self, power, sexuality and gender, among them Michel Foucault, issues of contemporary life, for example, division of labour, SOC314 INDONESIAN SOCIETY & CULTURE lOcp system; contemporary trends in policing; the privatisation of punishment. . Gilles Deleuze, Julia Kristevaand LuceIrigaray. We will look at the parenting, divorce and remarriage. Offered Semester I; day only in 1991 Recommended Reading question of 'postmodernism'. We will also consider ways in which Recommended Reading Prerequisite 20 credit points at 200 level the course material is relevant to contemporary work in sociology Cohen,S. Morgan, D.H.J. and anthropology. Hours 3 hours per week Visions ofSocial Conlrol (Polity Press 1985) TheFamily,PoliticsandSociaiTheory (RoutledgeandKegan Preliminary Readings Paul 1985) Examination Assignments and examination Braithwaite, J. Turkle,S. Content Inequality, Crime and Public Policy (Routledge 1979) Thorne, B. & Yallom, M. (eds) Psychoanalytic Politics. (Andre Deutsch 1979) Rethinking the Family: SomeFeministQuestions (Longman This subject will introduce students to historical, sociological and Findlay, M. & Hogg. R. (eds) Rabinow, P. (ed) 1982) anthropological analyses of Indonesian Society and cultures. Understanding Crime and Criminal Justice (Law Book Co. 1988) A Foucault Reader. (penguin 1986) Barrett, M. & Mcintosh, M. Recommended Reading To be advised. Deleuze, G. & Parnet, c. The Anli-Social Family (Verso 1982) Foucault, M. Dialogues. (Athlone Press 1987) SOCIOLOGY HONOURS Discipline and Punish (Penguin 1979) Grosz, E. SOC307 CRIME, JUSTICE AND THE STATE 20cp Garland, D. & Young, P. (eds) The degreeofBachelorof Arts (Honours) is available in Sociology. Sexual Subversions. (Allen & Unwin 1989) The Power to Punish: COnlemporary Penalty and Social Offered Semester 1; day only in 1991 The Honours degree can be taken as a one-year full-time course ~ Analysis (Heinemann 1983) a two-year part-time course following on from the B.A. degree. It Prerequisite: 20 credit points at 200 level including SOC20l. SUPERVISED READING COURSE AS APPROVED BY provides the depth of study in the discipline which is desirable, and Zdenkowski, G. & Brown, D. THE HEAD OF DEPARTMENT Hours 4 hours per week. often necessary ,for students wishing to pursue a careerin sociology The Prison Struggle: Changing Australia's Prison System Examination To be advised. or to undertake further graduate research work. (Penguin 1982) This subject will be available in second semester only. COnlenl Prerequisite This course deals critically with both classical and contemporary Thenormal requirement for entry to Honours willbe40credit pointS arguments about the 'causes' of crime, its punishment and at 200 level (including SOC201 and SOC204) and 60 points at 300 classificationinlateindustrial society. Rival theoretical perspectives level (including S0C302), with a Credit average in Sociology at - liberal-utilitarian, post-structuralist, left realism,and New Right 3OO-1evel.In certain cases, subjects within other Departments which 146 147 BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK COURSE PROGRAM SECTION FOUR SECfION FOUR BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK COURSE PROORAM Communication- sharing inJormationandconveyingmeaning. The Integrated Approach to Learning finally,~~sessors. Throughout the course arange ofotherexperts Bachelor of Social Work Course Program Social Workers must also be sensitive, able to "read" and to and specIalist lecturers from Social Work and related disciplines The Department of Social Work uses an int~ed a~proach to will be involved in the programme. . The Bachelor ofSocial Work degree consists offour years full-time student learning within the Social Work core subjects. This approach respond aptly to what is going on in a situation. Good study. There is no specific part-time programme but it may be covers the range of knowledge and skills that students need to begin communication skills enable Social Workers to receive and to Thus the organisation of core Social Work curriculum resembles a convey signals verbally and non verbally using a range of possible, with the permission of the Dean of the Faculty of Arts, to practice. In this approach to learning, students .also ex~lore ~eir learning space designatedby a cube in which the various study areas spread the course over six or seven years. own values and the various value positions and ethical COJlSlderalions spoken, written, visual, audio and other media are introduced and developed through successive application to a The course is designed to prepare students to practise as Social encountered in practice. Students are encouraged to build on their lntervention- taking or sharing inaction. range of themes or stages in the human Iife-cycle as they might affect individuals, couples, etc. Workers and to be eligible for membership of the Australian own experience and to incorporate the knowl~e ~d s~s Competent professional practice involves taking action with Association of Social Workers. developed in other specified subjects and electives mto thetr clients, using knowledge, developing understanding, Field Education The degree comprises core subjects in Social Work, other s~ed learning. evaluating situations and communicating with others toassess, Field Education placements are provided by individual Social subjects and elective subjects. The Social Work core subjects Although the subjects in the Social Work core are divided into three refer or act in a social, political and economic context, with Workers, agencies and organisations in the community. They are a include a total of 150 days (1050 hours) of supervised field strands; Social Work Theory, Social Work Practice and Field due regard for ethical considerations, in orner to bring about crucial part of Social Work Education and go beyond any simple education placements in Social Work agencies, other organisations Education, the three strands are closely integrated and are usually change which is in the interests of the clients. Intervention notion of "gaining experience" in the work place. Every student is and in the community. taken together. However, it is possible for students who are not involves the planned use of a range of resources, including placed with a designated Field Teacher. Through the placement the doing the full programme, or for those who have not ~sed ~ the oneself, and may occur with individuals and small groups or Field Teachers is effectively part of the teaching staff of the assessments in a Social Work Practice or Field Education subject to at the levels of organisations, communities orthrough social Department. Field Education placements are arranged by the SOCIAL WORK SUBJECTS (200 credit points) proceed to a subsequent stage of the Social Work ~eory and to policy initiatives. University and both students and Field Teachers receive support The Social Work strand consists of one first year subject and then undertake, or repeat, the missing subject( s) at that Ilme. Professional Approach to Work - processing work through during the placement from staff of the Social Work Department. three subjects in each of the second, third and fourth years of the Within each of the Social Work Theory and Practice subjects, time. During the course of their degree students undertake three Field degree. ThroughouttheSocial Work core the basic teaching method Education placements of approximately 50 days each, one in each knowledge and skills are grouped into seven study areas covering All professionals need to be able to organise their work as consists of an integrated approach, in which students develop of the second, third and fourth years of the course. Placements cover the objectives of the course and for the purposes of assessment. The individuals,in teams orin a larger organisation. They mustbe knowledge and skills through individual and group participation in a range of fields and methods of practice in different settings. Field exploration of values permeates throughout ~ aspects. of the able to deal with organisations and systems and generally be work on a graded set of typical cases, issues and projects. course. This exploration and discussion of values IS not deSIgned to Educationis alsolinked,by various means, to the campus based part able to manage their workload in ways which enhance their of the curriculum. It is assessed and students must perform all Field The first year subject introduces students to the major methods and compel students to conform to some ideal notion of a "professional" practice, enrich theirown lives and do not lead to any harm for Education activities and exercises at a satisfactory level to gain a fields of Social Work, the broad knowledge base and the value nor is it closed-ended. The examination of values should be seen as their clients, their colleagues or themselves. pass in the subject. stance of the profession. In subsequent years the core is divided into open-ended, challenging and designed to help each st?~ent Self-DirectedLeaming -preparationforalife-timeoflearning. Social Work Theory, Practice Skills and Field Based Education. understand their own values, to explore the range of value posIllons Assessment The system of prerequisites and corequisites ensures that students in Social Work and in related fields, and prepare them for dealing Practising professionals must develop their ability to go on At the start of each case or theme based exercise in the core Social do not enter the Field Education subjects until they have passed the with value issues in practice. acquiring knowledge, developing skills, exploring values Work subjects students will receive a list of learning goals and and adapting to change. Self-directed learning includes appropriate Theory and Practice subjects. The Study Areas assessment criteria Feedback will be given during the course of the recognising learning opportunities, self monitoring, Students pursue a range of graded activities and exercises in each exercise and fmal assessments made at the end of each exercise or participation in professional supervision sessions and setting stage in the subject. Students will also keep a record of their self OTHER SPECIFIED SUBJECTS (80 credit points) of the seven study areas throughout the Social Work component .of and working towards self learning goals. theircourse. Theintegratedapproachtolearningmeansthatmatenal directedleaming activities. This record will be formally assessed at Social Workers draw upon the knowledge and skills of other from different study areas is incorporated into every activity or These seven study areas defIne the scope of the campus based Social the end of each year of the course. disciplines, mainly Psychology, Sociology, History, Philosophy exercise. Assessments also test knowledge and skills across study Work curriculum. Intending students should remember that the Texts and Law. In some Social Work programmes the Department of areas. Each activity undertaken by students will have specific study areas are not separate subjects. All work is integrated, in the Social Work attempts to distil the appropriate content and methods Staffwill make specially preparedLearning Units, aField Education objectives relating to nominated study areas. The seven areas of first instance, within the theory and practice subjects and, then, from each ofthese disciplines for its own students. This often results between these subjects and Field Education placements. Manual and other resources available to students. Reading lists and in a narrow programme of lectures about each of these di.s~plin~ study are - advice on appropriate texts will also be provided during the course This integration is achieved in a number of ways. Two of the most rather than exposing students to the richness and the vanallons m Exploration and Discovery - the acquisition of knowledge. of each subject. A small charge will be made for some course important means for achieving integration are to have students approach and method within each of the disciplines. Knowledge informs practice. Students need to build a materials. work through a number of themes or stages in the human life-cycle knowledge base and to learn about the types and sources of In this degree students will study introductory Psychology, over the four years of the course, and to work on each theme from Advanced Standing knowledge, how to acquire knowledge for their own practice introductory Sociology, Public Policy, History, Ethics and the the perspective of the individual, the couple or small group,larger The degree structure allows for advanced standing, under rules and how to produce knowledge that will contribute to the Foundations of Law in the Departments offering those subjects. groups and communities and agencies or organisations, all seen in similar to those for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Arts for development of the profession The implications for Social Work Theory and Practice will then be the context of the society, the economy and the State. Throughout students with another degree, or transferring from another degree drawn out within the core subjects of the degree. Critical Reasoning and Analysis - the process ofthinking. the course emphasis is placed upon both individual and group with relevant units in Psychology, Sociology, etc. Social workers must be able to think logically and laterally. learning experiences. As many of the potential studentsinthis category already have some Logical thinking is the basis of assessment, judgeme~ and Rather than simply attend a number of lectures and tutorials in experience of the fields and meth()fjs of Social Work they may be ELECTIVE SUBJECTS (40 credit points) argument and a means for arriving at an understanding of Social Work on specific topics, students work in small groups on a allowed to enrol in a subject SWK204, special Project, instead of A number of other subjects and disciplines taught in the University available information. Lateral thinkingiscreative,itlooksfor series of cases or situations of the kinds encountered in Social Work SWKlOl. This subject will be tailored to the specific needs of can be taken by Social Work students to broaden their own new ways of understanding. Practice. The students then use a range of resources, including advanced standing students. It will recognise and build on their education or to pursue a particular interest in one of the disciplines Feeling and Evaluation - the searchfor meaning. themselves, each other, staff, library and resource materials, previous educationandworkexperiences and extendtheirknow1edge to which they have been introduced in the OtherS pecified Subjects knowledge and skills acquired in other subjects and their own and skill by individual and group exercises. Social Workers must be able to assess the quality and the component of their course. experience to develop the appropriate Social Work knowledge and importance of information, judge the integrity of Advanced standing students enrolled in SWK204 could fInish their s~, skills for their stage oflearning, and to exanIine the values relevant appreciatetherelevanceofinformation and assess themeanmg degree in three years if they have the appropriate Other Specified to the situation. Staff are involved in the learning process as teachers of situations for the persons involved in them. Subjects in their first degree. in their own area of speciality, consultants, guides, co-learners and, Advanced standing for Core Social Work Subjects will only be 149 148 SECTION FOUR BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK COURSE PROGRAM SECTION FOUR BACHELOR OF SOCIAL WORK COURSE PROGRAM given for Social Work subjects in another approved Social Work Subject Descriptions The structure of the degree for a full-time student is as follows: degree where evidence is provided that the content and methods of SWKIOI INTRODUCTION TO SOCIAL WORK 20cp Credit Pre- Co Discipline instmction are similar to those in this degree. SUbject Name (No.) Length Points Requisite Requisite Problem Based Exercises Special Admission for Aboriginal Students YEAR 1 Introduction to Social Work focusses on the Social Worker in In line with Social Work programmes in some other Universities Social Work contemporary Australian Society. It introduces students, through a Introduction to Social Work FY 20 NIL NIL (SWK101) and with other Schools and Departments in the University of series of exercises, visits and activities to the broad knowledge base Newcastle, e.g. Medicine,it is proposed to reserve three places each Sociology of Social WorIc, the methods used and the fields or areas of practice. Introduction to Sociology A SEM 10 NIL NIL year for Aboriginal students. Additional educational support will be Through involvement in a range of typical practice issues and (SOC 101) provided for these students. examples students gain knowledge, develop initial skills and explore Introduction to Sociology B SEM 10 SOC101 NIL the values inherent in Social Work Practice. (SOC 102) Psychology SWK201 SOCIAL WORK THEORY I 20cp Psychology Introduction I SEM 10 NIL NIL (pSYClOl) Problem Based Exercises Psychology Introduction II SEM 10 PSYCI0l In the second year of their course students focus on individuals and (PSYCI02) couples or small groups. They learn about the stages and processes Other of development, including the impact of deprivation or loss and the Elective: either one Full Year or 20 NIL NIL implications of changes throughout the life cycle. Students are 2 Semester length 100 level subjects in expected to draw upon the knowledge and skills they have acquired an approved Discipline in the University in prerequisite subjects and to build on this previous learning through work on a series of graded exercises in each of the StUdy YEAR 2 Areas. Assessment in this subject deals essentially with the Social Work knowledge base of Social Work practice and theories about different Social Work Theory I (SWK201) FY 20 SWKI0l" SWK202,203 modes of practice. The SUbject is closely integrated with SWK202 Social Work Practice I (SWK202) FY 20 SWK101 " SWK201,203 Field Education I (SWK203) FY 20 SWK101 " SWK201 , 202 Philosophy SWK202 SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE I 20cp Utilitarianism (PHIL255) SEM 10 NIL SWK201 Oosely integrated with SWK201, this subject consists of the or equivalent as approved History designated work activities and professional skills prescribed in the Foundations of Australian Society (HISTl01) SEM 10 NIL NIL learning goals for each module or exercise during the year. or equivalent as approved SWK203 FIELD EDUCATION 20cp YEAR 3 This subject consists of 50 days of supervised ReId Education Social Work Social Work Theory II (SWK301) FY 20 SWK201 placement with adesignated Field Teacher in a Social Work agency SWK302, 303 Social Work Practice II (SWK302 FY 20 SWK202 or organisation and of a number of campus based seminars and SWK301,303 Field Education II (SWK303) FY 20 SWK203 activities. SWK301, 302 Law Foundations of Law (LAW101) SEM 10 NIL" NIL or equivalent as approved SWK204 SOCIAL WORK SPECIAL PROJECT 20cp Sociology Politics and Public Policy (SOC206) SEM 10 SOC101/102 NIL This subject is taken, only by students with advanced standing for or equivalent as approved first year of the course, in lieu of SWKI 01. The aims of the subject are similar to those of SWK101, but the content will be varied according to the previous educational and other experiences of YEAR 4 students with advanced standing. Social Work Social Work Theory III (SWK401) FY 20 SWK301 SWK402,403 Social Work Practice III (SWK402) FY 20 SWK302 SWK401,403 Field Education III (SWK403) FY 20 SWK303 SWK401,402 Other Elective: either one Full Year or 20 as appropriate as appropriate two Semester length subjects at 200 level or higher in an approved Discipline in the University " May be replaced by a corequisile SWK204 - Social Work Special Projeci for sludents wilh advanced slanding for the rest of 1 sl year. .. Either HSC aggregate required for Bachelor of Commerce OR total of40 credil points prior to enrolment in this subject. 150 151 SECTION FOUR INTERDISCIPLINARY SUBJECT DESCRIPTIONS SECTION FIVE Interdisciplinary Subject Descriptions Sharpe, E.J. Understanding Religion (Duckworth) IEACIOI EAST ASIAN CIVILISATIONS For details see HISTl 03 in the History Subject Descriptions. References A quota may apply to this subject with priority being given to Passmore, J.A. students taking Asian languages. The Perfectibility of Man (Duckworth) Man's Responsibility for Nature (Duckworth) IRES201 RELIGIOUS STUDIES II 20cp Niebuhr,R. (Students enrolled in lRES20I may also enrol in PHIL206, Topics The Nature and Destiny ofMan (Scribner) in Ancient, Medieval and Modern Philosophy, for a further 10 Brandon, S.G.F. credit points.) Manand his Destiny in the GreatReligions (Manchester U.P.) Prerequisite 40 credit points at 100 level Macquarrie, J. Offered Full year Twentieth Century Religious Thought (SCM) Course Managers Mr D.W. Palmer (Oassics) and Sharpe, E.J. Dr T.J. Lovat (Education) Comparative Religion (Duckworth) Hours 4 teaching hours per week COMP241 COGNITIVE SCIENCE lOcp Examination Assessment is by written work and by examination. For description, refer to Faculty of Engineering Handbook. This Content subject may be counted towards a major sequence in Linguistics The aim of this subject is to introduce students to the study of world at the 200 or 300 level. religions and to consider the bearing of religious and secular views of man on a number of contemporary moral and social issues. A strand of lectures throughout the year will outline the teachings of POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS the major religious traditions, along with their secular rivals, as to the nature and destiny of man. There will also be some lectures on the study of religion in the modem period. Rules Relating to the Honours Degree of The study of contemporary moral and social issues will consist in Bachelor of Arts identifying and examining anumberof problem areas arising out of 1. General recent social, scientific and technological developments. Topics for (c) have obtained approval to enrol given by the Dean on the discussion may include: health and environmental issues; These Rules prescribe the requirements for the honours degree of recommendation of the Head of the Department offering the overpopulation, our obligations to the developing world, sexism, Bachelor of Arts of the University of Newcastle. honours SUbject. racism, speciesism, genetic engineering and bioethical issues such as abortion, infanticide, euthanasia, and organ transplantation. 2. Definitions 4. Qualification for Admission to the Degree The course is taught by staff from several departments. In thcse Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise (1) Toqualifyforadmissiontothedegreeacandidateshall,inone indicates orrequires: year offull-time study or two years of part-time study, pass Texts an honours subject. "course" means the total requirements prescribed from time to time ling,T. to qualify a candidate for the degree. (2) The following (or their equivalent as approvcd by the Faculty A History ofReligion East and West (Macmillan) "Dean" means the Dean of the Faculty. Board) shall be honours subjects: Smart, N. Oassical Studies Honours: Civilisation The Religious Experience of Mankind (Collins) "the degree" means the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Honours). Oassical Studies Honours: Greek Smith, H. "Department" means the Department or Departments offering a Oassical Studies Honours: Latin Religions of Man (Harper & Row) particular subject and includes any other body so doing; Combined Greek and Latin Honours Stevenson, L. "Faculty" means the Faculty of Arts. Drama Honours Industrial Relations Honours Seven Theories of Human Nature (Oxford) "Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the FacUlty. Economics Honours Japanese Honours Singer, P. Education Honours Latin Honours Practical Ethics (Cambridge) 3. Admission to Candidature English Honours Linguistics Honours Regan, T. (cd.) In order to be admitted to candidature for the degree an applicant French Honours Mathematics Honours Matters ofLife and Death (Random House) shall: Geography Honours Philosophy Honours Laura, R.S. & Ashman, A.F. (cds) (a) havecompletedtherequirementsforadmissiontotheordinary German Honours Psychology Honours Moral Issues in Mental Retardmion (Croom Helm) degree of Bachelor of Arts of the University of Newcastle or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; Greek Honours Sociology Honours Laura, R.S. & Ashton, J.F. History Honours (P) have completed any additional work prescribed by the Head Health and Environment: Away from a Techlwlogy of of the Department offering the honours subject; and (3) The Faculty Board may approve certain combinations from Holocaust (Routledge) the subjects listed in sub-Rule (2) as honours subjects. 152 153 POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS SECfION FIVE POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS SECfION FIVE (3) These Rules shall not apply to degrees cooferred honoris 8. (1) If the Faculty Board is of the opinioo that the candidate is not 14.(1) The candidate shall comply with the following provisions 5. Subject causa. making satisfactory progress towards the degree then it may cooceming the presentation of a thesis: (1) To complete the honours subject a candidate shall attend such terminate the candidature or place such conditions on its lectures, tutorials, seminars,laboIatory classes and field work (4) A degree of Master shall be cooferred in one grade ooly. (a) the thesis shall contain an abstract of approximately cootinuatioo as it deems fit. 200 words describing its cootent; and submit such written orotherworkas the Department shall 2. An application for admission to candidature for a degree of (2) For the purpose of assessing a candidate's progress, the require. Master shall be made on the prescribed form and lodged with the (b) the thesis shall be typed and bound in a manner Faculty Board may require any candidate to submit a report Secretary to the University by the prescribed date. prescribed by the University; (2) To pass the honours subject a candidate shall complete it and or reports on his progress. pass such examinatioos as the Faculty Board shall require. 3.(1) To be eligible for admissioo to candidature an applicant shall: (c) three copies of the thesis shall be submitted together (3) A candidate against whom adecision of the FacultyBoard has with: (3) A candidate who has failed the honours subject shall not be (a)(i) have satisfied the requirements for admission been made under Rule 8(1) of these Rules may request that the permitted to re-enrol in that subject. to a degree of Bachelor in the University of Faculty Board cause his case to be reviewed Such request (i) main content of the thesis has not been submitted by Newcastle as specified in the Schedule; or shall be made to the Dean of the Faculty within seven days the candidateforadegree of any other tertiary institutioo; and 6. Withdrawal (ii) have satisfied the requirements for admissioo to a from the date of posting to the candidate the advice of the (1) A candidate may withdraw from the honours subject ooly by degree or equivalent qualification, approved for the Faculty Board's decision or such further period as the Dean (ii) a certificate signed by the supervisor indicating informing the Secretary to the University in writing and the purpose by the Faculty Board, in another tertiary may accept. whether the candidate has completed the program and withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such institution; or (4) A candidate may appeal to the Vice-Chancellor against any whether the thesis is of sufficient academic merit to warrant examinatioo; and notificatioo. (iii) have such other qualifications and experience as decisioo made following the review under Rule 8(3) of these (2) A candidate who withdraws from thehooours subject after the may be approved by the Senate 00 the recommendatioo Rules. (iii) if the candidate so desires, any documents or Monday ofthe third week of second semester shall be deemed of the Faculty Board or otherwise as may be specified in 9. In exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the published work of the candidate whether bearing on the to have failed the subject save that, after consulting with the the Schedule; and Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any subject of the thesis or not. Head of the Department, the Dean may grant permission for (b) have satisfied such other requirements as may be provision of these Rules. (2) The Faculty Board shall determine the course of action to be withdrawal without penalty. specified in the Schedule. taken should the certificate of the supervisor indicate that in Part II -Examination and Results the opinioo of the supervisor the thesis is not of sufficient (2) Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule, applications for 7. Classes of Honours academic merit to warrant examinatioo. admission to candidature shall be coosidered by the Faculty 10. The Examination Rules approved from time to time by the There shall be three classes of hooours: Gass Gass IT and Gass I, Board which may approve or reject any application Council shall apply to all examinations with respect to a degree of 15. The University shall be entitled to retain the submitted copies of III. Gass IT shall have two divisions, namely Divisioo 1 and Master with the exception of the examinatioo ofathesis which shall the thesis, accompanying documents and published work. The (3) An applicant shall not be admitted to candidature unless Division 2. be conducted in accordance with the provisions of Rules 12 to 16 University shall be free to allow the thesis to be consulted or adequate supervisioo and facilities are available. Whether inclusive of these Rules. borrowed and, subjectto the provisioos of the Copyright Act, 1968 these are available shall be determined by the Faculty Board 8. Relaxing Provision (Com), may issue it in whole or any part in photocopy or microfilm unless the Schedule otherwise provides. 11. The Faculty Board shall consider the results in subjects, the In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a reports of examiners and any other recommendations prescribed in or other copying medium. 4. To qualify for admissioo to a degree of Master a candidate shall particular case the Senate on the recommendatioo of the Faculty the Schedule and shall decide: 16.(1) For each candidate two examiners,at least ooe of whom shall be enrol and satisfy the requirements of these Rules including the Board may relax any provision of these Rules. an externa1 examiner (being apersoo who isnot a member of the Schedule. (a) to recommend to theCouncil that the candidate be admitted to staff of the University) shall be appointed either by the Faculty the degree; or Rules Governing Masters Degrees 5. The program shall be carried out:- Board oc otherwise as prescribed in the Schedule. (b) in a case where a thesis has been submitted, to permit the (a) under the guidance of a supervisor or supervisors either Part I - General candidatetoIesubmitan amendedthesis withintwelvemooths (2) Iftheexaminers'reportsaresuchthattheFacultyBoardisunab1e appointed by the Faculty Board or as otherwise prescribed in to make any decisioo pursuant to Rule 11 of these Rules, a thin! 1.(1)TheseRules prescribethecooditions and requirements relating of the date on which the candidate is advised of the result of the Schedule; or examiner shall be appointed either by the Faculty Board or to the degrees of Master of Applied Ethics, Master of the first examination or within such longer period of time as otherwise as prescribed in the Schedule. Architecture, Masterof Arts, Masterof Commerce, Masterof (b) as the Faculty Board may otherwise determine. the Faculty Board may prescribe; or Education, Master of Educational Studies, Master of 6. Upoo request by a candidate the Faculty Board may grant leave (c) to require the candidate to undertake such further oral, written SCHFDULE 2-MASfER OF ARTS Engineering, Master of Engineering Science, Master of of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into or practical examinations as the Facuhy Board may prescribe; Mathematics, Master of Psychology (Oinical), Master of account in calculating the period for the program prescribed in the or 1. The Faculty of Arts shall be respoosible for the course leading to the Psychology (Educatiooal), Master of Science, Master of Schedule. (d) not to recommend that the candidate be admitted to the degree of Mastex of Arts. Medical Science, Master of Scientific Studies, Master of 7.(1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or course only by degree, in which case the candidature shall be terminated. 2 To be eligitie for admissioo to candidature an applicant shall: Special Education, Master ofSurveying and MasterofLetters. informing the Secretary to the University in writing and such (a) have satisfied all thereqDremen1s foradmissiootothe Degree of (2) In these Rules and the Schedules thereto, unless the context or withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such Part ill - Provisions Relating to Theses BachelorofArts with honoms class I or class IToftheUniversity subject matter otherwise indicates or requires: "Faculty notification. 12(1) The subject of athesis shall be approved by the Faculty Board of Newcastle or to a Degree, apITOVed for this purpose by the Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty respoosible Faculty Board, of the University of Newcastle or any other (2) A candidate who withdraws from any subject after the on the recommendatioo of the Head of the Department in for the course in which a person is enrolled or is proposing relevant date shall be deemed to have failed in that subject which the candidate is carrying out his research. university; OR to enrol; unless granted permission by the Dean to withdraw without (2) The thesis shall not cootain as its main cootent any work or (b) have satisfied all thereqDremen1s foradmissiootothe Degree of "program" means the program of research and study penalty. The relevant date shall be: materia\~~haspreviouslybeensubmitledbythecandidate BachelorofArtsoftheUniversityofNewcastleorolheraprroved prescribed in the Schedule; (a) in the case of a subject offered in the first semester foradegm! inanytertiary institution unless the Faculty Board university and have completed such wOOl: and sal for such "Schedule" means the Schedule of these Rules pertaining to the Monday of the ninth week of first semester; otherwise permits. examinations as the Faculty Board may have determined IRI have achieved a slaldald at least equivalett to that reqlired for the course in which ~ person is enrolled or is proposing to (b) in the case of a subject offered in the secood semester 13. The candidate shall give to the Secretary to the University three admissimtoaDegreeofBacrelocwithsecmdclassixlnoursin enrol; and - the Mooday of the ninth week of second semester; months' written notice of the date he expects to submit a thesis and "thesis" means any thesis or dissertation submitted by a such notice shall be accompanied by any prescribed fee.1 an appropriate subject; OR (c) in the case of any other subject - the Mooday of the candidate. third week of secood semester. 1 At present there is no fee payable. 155 154 SECfION FIVE POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS SECfION FIVE POSTGRADUATE DEGREE REGULATIONS (c) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such (a) four half-year units, or their equivalent, of advanced work; 3. To be eligible for admission to candidature, an applicant shall: Rules Governing the Diploma in Arts other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board and; (a) have satisifed all the requirements for admission to the 1. These Rules prescribe the requirements for the Diplomain Arts on the recommendation of the Head of the Department in (b) such other work as may be prescribed by the Head of the degree of Bachelor of Arts of the University of Newcastle or of the University of Newcastle and are made in accordance with which the applicant proposes to enrol. Department. another degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty the powers vested in the Council under By-law 5.2.1. 3.(1) An applicant shall apply for admission to candidature in a 6. The Faculty Board may grant standing to a candidate on such Board, of the University ofNewcastle or any other University; program consisting of one of the following patterns: or 2. In these Rules, unless the context or subject matter otherwise conditions as it may determine in respect of work undertaken for an indicates or requires: (a) primarily the completion of a thesis embodying the uncompleted qualification. Standing shall not be granted for more (b) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing suchother "the Department" means the Department offering the subject in results of the candidate's research, together with such than half the program. qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board onthe which a person is enrolled or is proposing to enrol; other work as the Faculty Board may prescribe; recommendation of the Board. 7. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, the program "the Diploma" means the Diploma in Arts; (b) primarily lectures and other coursework and shall be completed within one year in the case of a full-time 4. To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall "the FaCUlty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty of associated examinations as the Faculty Board may candidate or within four years in the case of a part-time candidate. complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program Arts; prescribe. approved by the Faculty Board consisting of: "Part IV subject" means a Part N subject offered in the course Pattern (a) is hereinafter referred to as "research and thesis" SCHEDULE 21 - MASTER OF ENVIRONMENTAL (a) eight semester units, or their equivalent, of advanced work; leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts. and pattern (b) is hereinafter referred to as "coursework". STUDIES and 3.(1) An applicant for admission to candidature shall: (2) The Faculty Board shall approve or reject the application 1. The Faculty of Arts shall be responsible forthe course leading (b) such other work and examinations as may be prescribed by (a) have satisfied the requirements for adruission to a and the proposed degree pattern on the recommendation of to the degree of Master of Fnvironmental Studies. the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board. degree in the University of Newcastle; or the Head oftbe Department in which the applicant proposes 5. The Faculty Board may grant standing to a candidate on such (b) have satisfied the requirements for adruission to a to enrol. 2. In this schedule, "Department" means the Department or Departments offering the units comprising the program. conditions as it may determine following advice from the Board. degree, approvedforthis purpose by the Faculty Board, 4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall Standing shall not be granted for more than half the program. of another institution of tertiary education. complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board the program 3. To be eligible for admission to candidature, an applicant 6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board: (2) An applicant shall have met such requirements for entry to specified under section 3(1) of this Schedule. shall: (a) a full-time candidate shall com plete the program in not less a Part IV subject as may be prescribed from time to time by 5. The Faculty Board may grant to a candidate for the degree by (a) have satisifed all the requirements for admission to the the Head of the Department and approved by the Faculty degree of Bachelor of Arts of the University of Newcastle or than two and not more than three calendar years from its coursework such standing on such conditions as it may determine commencement; Board or have achieved at another tertiary institution a provided that standing may not be granted in respect of any other another degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty standard of performance deemed by the Head of the work which has already been counted towards another completed Board, ofthe University of Newcastle or any other University; (b) a part-time candidate shall complete the program in not Department to be equivalent. or more than five calendar years from its commencement. degree or diploma 4.(1) To qualify forthe Diploma, a candidate shall enrol and shall 6.(1) A candidate for the degree by research and thesis shall (b) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such complete the Part IV subject to the satisfaction of the other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board submit his thesis for examination in not less than 15 months SCHEDULE 26 - MASTER OF THEATRE ARTS Faculty Board. and in not more than five years. In special cases the Faculty on the recommendation of the Head of Department. 1. The Faculty of Arts shall be responsible for the course leading (2) Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, the Part Board may approve of the submission of the thesis after 4. The Faculty Board shall approve or reject the application on to the degree of Master of Theatre Arts. IV subject shall be satisfactorily completed in not less than only 9 months. the recommendation of the Head of Department. one yearoffull-time study or not less than two years of part 2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall: time study. (2) A full-time candidate for the degree by coursework shall 5. To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall complete the requirements for the degree in two years, and complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program (a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the 5.(1) The Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of a part-time candidate in three years. approved by the Faculty Board consisting of: degree of Bachelor of Arts of the University of Newcastle the Department, may grant standing towards the Diploma or another degree, approved for this purpose by the Faculty on condition that the work for which standing is granted (a) four half-year core units, or their equivalent, of advanced Boardofthe University of Newcastle or any other University; shall have a reasonable correspondence with work forming SCHEDULE 16 - MASTER OF LETTERS work; and OR part of the content of the Diploma (b) such other work as may be prescribed by the Head of 1. The Faculty of Arts shall be responsible for the course leading to (b) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such (2) Standing shall not be granted for more than one third ofthe Department. the degree of Master of Letters. other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty work for the Diploma 2. In this schedule, "Department" means the Department or 6. The Faculty Board may grant standing to a candidate on such Board. 6. The Diploma shall be awarded in three classes, namely Class conditions as it may deterruine on the advice of the Head of Departments offering the units comprising the program. 3. To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall I, Class IT and Class ill. Oass IT shall have two divisions. The Department. Standing shall not be granted for more than half Classes shall indicate a level of achievement comparable with 3. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall: complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program the program. approved by the Faculty Board consisting of: that of a candidate for the degree of Bachelor of Arts (Honours). (a) have satisfied all the requirements for admission to the degree 7. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, the program (a) eight semester units, or their equivalent, of advanced work; 7. The Diploma shall specify the Part IV subject completed. of Bachelor of Arts of the University of Newcastle or another shall be completed within two years in the case of a full-time degree, approved forthis purpose by the Faculty Board, of the and 8.(1) A candidate may withdraw from the course only by informing candidate or within four years in the case of a part-time the Secretary to the University in writing and the withdrawal University of Newcastle or any other university; OR (b) such other work as may be prescribed by the Faculty Board. candidate. shall take effect from the date ofreceipt of such notification. (b) in exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such 4. The Faculty Board may grant standing to a candidate on such (2) A candidate who withdraws from the subject after the other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board conditions as it may determine. Standing shall not be granted for SCHEDULE 22 - MASTER OF APPLIED ETHICS Monday of the third week of second semester shall be on the recommendation of the Head of the Department. more than half the program. deemed to have failed the subject save that, after consulting 1. The Faculty of Arts shall be responsible for the course leading 4. The Faculty Board shall approve or reject the application on the 5. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, the program with the Head of Department, the Dean may grant permission to the degree of Master of Applied Ethics. recommendation of the Head of the Department. shall be completed in not less than four semesters and not more for withdrawal without penalty. 2 .In this schedule, "Board" means the Applied Ethics Board 5. To qualify for admission to the degree the candidate shall than eight semesters. 9. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program constituted by the Senate. particular case, the Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty approved by the Faculty Board consisting of: Board may relax any provision of these Rules. 156 157 r- ftI I o so 100 150 200 250 ~ metres \ sportsfield 3 __ .-6 -:.: -0:" l'/ _.--;; _<..J" -~;- <:) .... ~-::. I,,' r ...... => . ..,:"-,,,; C')"J/ / :",'~ ...:"') :~.:..~) ., .... , " .._ ":.'u;,~ '- ,,,,'" c} c' / / ." j:lo,~, ~ r / / // I I , I... , ;- , '--- " , , , , ) INDEX THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE CAMPUS MAP C ALPHABETICAL LOCATION GUIDE GeoIOIY Medical ScIences GH SITE GUIDE by BUILDING NUMBER K Great Hall GOT L Aucbmuty Library Aboriginal Education Centre AE Grlftltb Duncan Theatre A McMullin LO Lecturers' Otl1ces Administration in McMullin A Information" Public Relations in Administration, Arts, Cashier, HH Ht4 M Aviation Administration in Hunier Hunler Building IA Computing Centre, EEO MW Maintenance Workshop Animal Hou-Central AN International House Student Administration N Arcbltecture " Building Art AT K202 Medical Sciences Aboriginal Education Centre Drama Theatre A I AE P Arts in McMullin L«ture Tbeatre L AN Central Animal House PO postOmce Architecture" Balldlng N Library - Allchmuty Central Animal Store Q Drama Studio M Library - Huxley in Hunter Building HH AS Aviation H A AT Art R Social Sciences Basden Theatre HOI McMullin V B Lecture Tbeatre BOI RW Richardson Wing Behavioural ScIences W Mathematics J EC Basketball Courts SB Science Building· Biological ScIences Medlanical Engineering BC K C Geology SC Auchmuty Sports Centre BOI Lecture Theatre B Medical ScIences Commonwealth Bank Special Education Centre EG 0 CB SE Bulk Solids Engineering Physics PO CCK Child Care Centre (Klntalba) SH Staft'House Careers" Student postOmce CCW Child Care Centre (Wonnayba) SP Sports Pavilion Employment in Temp. Bldgs TB Radio Station 2NUR-FM Squash Courts, Oval No.2 HH V CE Ceramics Cashier in Hunter in Malhematics RW .CG Central Garage SW Sculpture Workshops Cashier in McMullin A Richardson Wing CE SW CT Computer Teaching TA Tunra Annexe Ceramics Sculpture Workshops Temporary Buildings T8 Special Education Ceatre SE D Physics TB Chaplains in Temp. Bldgs SC E Lecture Theatre EOI Careers" Student Employment Chemical" Materials Ene· EB Sports Cealre-Auchmuty Q SP EA Engineering Administration Chaplains, Sport " Recreation Chemistry Sports PIIVHlon Chemical" Materials Engineering Student Accommodation CCK Sport " Recreation in Temp. Bldgs TB EB Child Care Centre (Kintaiba) SH EC Mechanical Engineering TC Tennis Courts Child Care Centre (Wonnayba) CCW StatrHouse ED ED CIvil Engineering" Surveying TG Tractor Garage CIvil Eng. " Surveying Student Accommodation in Electrical" Computer Engineering The Hunter Technology CB Temporary Buildings TB EE TH Commonwealth Bank A EF Engineering Classrooms Development Centre Community Programmes in Student Administration in McMullin University Central Administration- y EG Bulk Solids Engineering UC Malhematics The Hvlller TtchnoioIY TH ES D.W. George Building UH Union - Hunter Computing Centre in McMuilill A J>evetopment Centre Union - Shortland CT Temporary B_H4Ing5 TB G Chemistry US Computer Teaching Building . TC GOT Grlmth Duncan Theatre C _ Buildings shown with a dotted outline are proposed or under construction.